- Avery Dennison
Packet
Reference
Manual
Monarch® 9825® and 9855® Printers
TC9800PM Rev DR
10/15
Printer & Fastener
Solutions
©1996 Avery Dennison Corp. All rights reserved.
Each product and program carries a respective written warranty, the only warranty on which the
customer can rely. Avery Dennison Corp. reserves the right to make changes in the product, the
programs, and their availability at any time and without notice. Although Avery Dennison Corp.
has made every effort to provide complete and accurate information in this manual, Avery
Dennison Corp. shall not be liable for any omissions or inaccuracies. Any update will be
incorporated in a later edition of this manual.
©1996 Avery Dennison Corp. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any
means, without the prior written permission of Avery Dennison Corp.
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CANADIAN D.O.C. WARNING
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from
digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department
of Communications.Le présent appareil numérique német pas de bruits radioélectriques
dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A prescrites dans
le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicte par le ministére des Communications
du Canada.
Trademarks
Monarch®, 9800®, 9825®, and 9855® are registered trademarks of Avery Dennison Corporation.
MONARCH LANGUAGE INTERPRETER, MLI, MonarchNet2, 7410, 926, 928, 932, 935, 939, and 939i are
trademarks of Avery Dennison Corporation.
Aver y Dennison® is a trademark of Aver y Dennison Corporation.
Microsoft, W indows, and NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.
Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
EPCglobal, Inc. and Electronic Product Code (EPC) are trademarks of Uniform Code Council, Inc.
UFST, Monotype, the Monotype logo, and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc.
Avery Dennison
170 Monarch Lane
Miamisburg, OH 45342
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S
GETTING STARTED ................................................................................................................................... 1-1
About This Manual ................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Before You Begin ................................................................................................................................. 1-1
Creating an MPCLII Format Packet ........................................................................................................ 1-1
Sample Batch Packet ......................................................................................................................... 1-2
Daily Startup Procedures ...................................................................................................................... 1-2
Starting with a Design ........................................................................................................................... 1-2
Determining Format Contents ................................................................................................................ 1-3
Determining the Print Area .................................................................................................................... 1-3
Drawing Rough Sketches ...................................................................................................................... 1-4
Using Supply Layout Grids .................................................................................................................... 1-4
Considering Field Types ........................................................................................................................ 1-5
Considering Fonts ................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Interchanging Packets ........................................................................................................................... 1-5
Using the Format Worksheet.................................................................................................................. 1-6
Filling in the Format Worksheet .......................................................................................................... 1-6
CONFIGURING THE PRINTER .................................................................................................................... 2-1
Setting Communication Parameters ........................................................................................................ 2-1
Using Parallel Communications .............................................................................................................. 2-1
Using MPCLII Conventions .................................................................................................................... 2-2
MPCLII Punctuation ........................................................................................................................... 2-2
Standard Syntax Guidelines ............................................................................................................... 2-2
Using Online Configuration Packets ....................................................................................................... 2-3
Configuration Packet Header .............................................................................................................. 2-3
Configuration Syntax Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 2-5
Making Print Adjustments ...................................................................................................................... 2-5
Defining the System Setup Packet ......................................................................................................... 2-5
Defining the Supply Setup Packet .......................................................................................................... 2-7
Defining the Print Control Packet ........................................................................................................... 2-8
Defining the Monetary Formatting Packet ............................................................................................... 2-9
Defining the Control Characters Packet ................................................................................................. 2-10
Resetting Control Characters ............................................................................................................ 2-11
Using Immediate Commands ............................................................................................................. 2-11
Enabling Immediate Commands ......................................................................................................... 2-11
Sending Immediate Commands .......................................................................................................... 2-11
Defining the Communication Settings Packet ......................................................................................... 2-14
Defining the Backfeed Control Packet ................................................................................................... 2-15
Special Considerations When Using Backfeed .................................................................................... 2-16
Defining the Memory Configuration Packet ............................................................................................ 2-17
Checking Current Buffer Sizes .......................................................................................................... 2-18
About Memory Buffers .......................................................................................................................... 2-18
Buffer Worksheet ............................................................................................................................. 2-19
Buffer Allocation Considerations ........................................................................................................ 2-20
Table of Contents i
Memory Considerations with Downloaded TrueType Fonts ................................................................... 2-20
About Flash Memory ............................................................................................................................ 2-21
Formatting Flash Memory .................................................................................................................. 2-21
Checking Available Flash Memory ..................................................................................................... 2-21
Flash Memory Guidelines .................................................................................................................. 2-21
Clearing Packets from Memory ............................................................................................................. 2-22
Using the Font Packet .......................................................................................................................... 2-23
Uploading Format Header Information ................................................................................................... 2-25
Defining a Network Console Packet....................................................................................................... 2-26
Defining a Verifier Configuration Packet ................................................................................................ 2-27
Defining the RFID Setup Packet (9855 RFMP Printer Only) ..................................................................... 2-28
DEFINING FIELDS ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Defining the Format Header ................................................................................................................... 3-1
Defining Text Fields .............................................................................................................................. 3-2
Defining Bar Code Fields ...................................................................................................................... 3-6
Defining Non-Printable Text Fields ........................................................................................................ 3-19
Defining Constant Text Fields ............................................................................................................... 3-20
Defining Line Fields ............................................................................................................................. 3-24
Line Types ....................................................................................................................................... 3-24
Defining Box Fields .............................................................................................................................. 3-26
Defining Verifier Fields ........................................................................................................................ 3-27
Defining the RFID Data Field (9855 RFID Printer Only) ........................................................................... 3-28
DEFINING FIELD OPTIONS ........................................................................................................................ 4-1
Applying Field Options .......................................................................................................................... 4-1
Combining Field Options .................................................................................................................... 4-1
Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Using Option 1 (Fixed Data) .................................................................................................................. 4-2
Using Option 2 (Data Type Restrictions) ................................................................................................. 4-2
Using Option 3 (Data Entry Templates) .................................................................................................. 4-3
Using Option 4 (Copy Data) ................................................................................................................... 4-4
Merging Fields .................................................................................................................................. 4-5
Sub-Fields ........................................................................................................................................ 4-5
Using Option 5 (Define Data Entry Sources) ........................................................................................... 4-5
Using Option 6 (Upload Field Data) ........................................................................................................ 4-6
Using Option 20 (Define Data Entry Prompts) ......................................................................................... 4-7
Using Option 21 (Define Extended Field Names) ..................................................................................... 4-7
Using Option 30 (Pad Data) ................................................................................................................... 4-8
Sample Use for Padding .................................................................................................................... 4-8
Using Option 31 (Calculate Check Digit) ................................................................................................. 4-8
Using Option 42 (Price Field)................................................................................................................. 4-9
Using Option 50 (Bar Code Density) ....................................................................................................... 4-9
Using Option 51 (PDF417 Security/Truncation) ...................................................................................... 4-10
Using Option 52 (PDF417 Width/Length) ............................................................................................... 4-11
Using Option 53 (Optional Settings for Aztec) ........................................................................................ 4-11
Using Option 60 (Incrementing/Decrementing Fields) ............................................................................. 4-12
ii Packet Reference Manual
Fixing the First Number in the Incrementing Sequence ........................................................................ 4-12
Using Option 61 (Re-image Field) ......................................................................................................... 4-13
Using Option 62 (Bypass Bar Code) ...................................................................................................... 4-14
Verifier Information .......................................................................................................................... 4-15
Using Option 64 (Program AFI Field for UHF RFID) ................................................................................ 4-16
Using Check Digits .............................................................................................................................. 4-16
Sum of Products Calculation ............................................................................................................. 4-17
Sum of Digits Calculation .................................................................................................................. 4-18
CREATING GRAPHICS ............................................................................................................................... 5-1
Overview of Compliance Labels ............................................................................................................. 5-1
Overview of Bitmapped Images .............................................................................................................. 5-2
Determining a Method ........................................................................................................................ 5-2
Designing Compliance Labels ................................................................................................................ 5-2
Designing Bitmapped Images ................................................................................................................. 5-2
Special Considerations ...................................................................................................................... 5-3
Using the Hex Method ....................................................................................................................... 5-3
Using the Run Length Encoding Method .............................................................................................. 5-4
Determining How to Store the Image ...................................................................................................... 5-5
Using Flash ...................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Using Volatile RAM ........................................................................................................................... 5-5
Using Temporary Storage .................................................................................................................. 5-6
Creating a Graphic Packet..................................................................................................................... 5-6
Positioning the Graphic Image ............................................................................................................ 5-6
Defining the Graphic Header ................................................................................................................. 5-7
Creating Bitmap Fields .......................................................................................................................... 5-8
Creating Next-Bitmap Fields .................................................................................................................. 5-8
Creating Duplicate Fields ...................................................................................................................... 5-9
Sample Compliance Graphic Packet ...................................................................................................... 5-10
Sample Hex Graphic Packet ................................................................................................................. 5-10
Sample Run Length Graphic Packet ...................................................................................................... 5-11
Placing the Graphic in a Format ............................................................................................................ 5-12
Defining the Graphic Field .................................................................................................................... 5-12
Sample Compliance Label .................................................................................................................... 5-13
Sample Bitmap Graphic Image .............................................................................................................. 5-14
PRINTING ................................................................................................................................................. 6-1
Downloading Files ................................................................................................................................ 6-1
About Batch Packets (Print Jobs) ........................................................................................................... 6-2
Defining the Batch Header..................................................................................................................... 6-2
Defining the Batch Control Field ............................................................................................................ 6-3
Defining Batch Data Fields .................................................................................................................... 6-4
Merged or Sub-Fields ........................................................................................................................ 6-4
Incrementing Fields ........................................................................................................................... 6-5
Using Gen2 RFID Data (9855 RFMP Printer Only) ................................................................................... 6-5
Entering Batch Data for QR Code .......................................................................................................... 6-7
Structured Append Mode .................................................................................................................... 6-8
Table of Contents iii
Structured Append QR Code Packet ................................................................................................... 6-9
Using Special Characters in Batch Data ................................................................................................. 6-9
Sample Batch Data with Special Characters ........................................................................................ 6-9
Special 9855 Printing Considerations ..................................................................................................... 6-9
Serial Bar Code Printing Information .................................................................................................. 6-10
Downloading Methods .......................................................................................................................... 6-10
Sequential Method ........................................................................................................................... 6-10
Batch Method ................................................................................................................................... 6-10
Batch Quantity Zero Method .............................................................................................................. 6-10
Modifying Formats ............................................................................................................................... 6-11
Optional Entry Method ...................................................................................................................... 6-11
Creating DOS Batch Files for Downloading ............................................................................................ 6-11
STATUS POLLING ..................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Inquiry Request (ENQ) .......................................................................................................................... 7-1
Inquiry Response .............................................................................................................................. 7-1
ENQ Reference Table - Byte #2 ............................................................................................................. 7-2
ENQ Reference Table - Byte #3 ............................................................................................................. 7-4
Job Request ......................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Job Response ................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 1 Codes) ............................................................................ 7-8
Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 2 Codes) ............................................................................ 7-9
Status Polling Considerations for Script Mode........................................................................................ 7-10
DIAGNOSTICS AND ERRORS ..................................................................................................................... 8-1
Printing a Test Label ............................................................................................................................. 8-1
Reading a Test Label ............................................................................................................................ 8-2
If You Receive an Error Message ....................................................................................................... 8-2
Reading an Error Label ......................................................................................................................... 8-2
If the PC and Printer Are Not Communicating ...................................................................................... 8-3
Calling Technical Support ..................................................................................................................... 8-3
Additional Diagnostics Information ......................................................................................................... 8-3
Data Errors .......................................................................................................................................... 8-4
Format Errors ................................................................................................................................... 8-4
Batch Errors ..................................................................................................................................... 8-6
Option Errors .................................................................................................................................... 8-6
Online Configuration Errors ................................................................................................................ 8-7
Check Digit Errors ............................................................................................................................. 8-9
Graphic Errors .................................................................................................................................. 8-9
Communication Errors ...................................................................................................................... 8-10
Data Formatting Failures ...................................................................................................................... 8-11
Machine Faults .................................................................................................................................... 8-12
RFID Errors ......................................................................................................................................... 8-12
Script Errors ....................................................................................................................................... 8-16
Hard Printer Failure Errors ................................................................................................................... 8-16
PRINTER OPTIMIZATION ........................................................................................................................... 9-1
Adjusting the Print Quality ..................................................................................................................... 9-1
iv Packet Reference Manual
Reducing Imaging Time ......................................................................................................................... 9-2
Increasing Throughput ....................................................................................................................... 9-3
General Format Tips and Hints .............................................................................................................. 9-3
With Packets ..................................................................................................................................... 9-3
With Bar Codes ................................................................................................................................. 9-3
With Fields ....................................................................................................................................... 9-3
SAMPLES ................................................................................................................................................. A-1
Sample UPCA Format Packet ................................................................................................................ A-1
Sample Batch Packet ......................................................................................................................... A-1
Sample MaxiCode Packets .................................................................................................................... A-1
Mode 0 (Obsolete) Sample ................................................................................................................. A-2
Mode 2 Sample ................................................................................................................................. A-3
Mode 3 Sample ................................................................................................................................. A-4
MaxiCode Compression Sample ......................................................................................................... A-5
Sample Data Matrix Packets .................................................................................................................. A-6
Square Data Matrix Packet ................................................................................................................. A-6
Rectangular Data Matrix Packet ......................................................................................................... A-6
Sample Data Matrix with Function 1 .................................................................................................... A-6
Sample Quick Response Packets ........................................................................................................... A-7
Sample QR Code Packet .................................................................................................................... A-7
Sample QR Code with URL Packet ..................................................................................................... A-7
Structured Append QR Code Packet ................................................................................................... A-7
Sample GS1 DataBar Packets ............................................................................................................... A-8
GS1 DataBar with Function 1 ............................................................................................................. A-8
GS1 DataBar EAN13 with Composite .................................................................................................. A-8
GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked Omni Directional .......................................................................................... A-8
GS1 DataBar Expanded ..................................................................................................................... A-8
GS1 DataBar Expanded (no composite) .............................................................................................. A-8
Sample Aztec Packet ............................................................................................................................ A-9
Sample Intelligent Mail® Packet ............................................................................................................ A-9
Sample Compliance Packet ................................................................................................................. A-10
Sample Batch Packet ....................................................................................................................... A-10
Sample Format Packet ........................................................................................................................ A-11
Sample Zero Batch Packet ............................................................................................................... A-11
Sample Data Entry Format Packet........................................................................................................ A-12
Sample RFID Data Fields .................................................................................................................... A-13
RFID Data Field with a Copy Option.................................................................................................. A-13
ASCII HEX ...................................................................................................................................... A-13
ASCII HEX Incrementing Field .......................................................................................................... A-13
SSCC96 ......................................................................................................................................... A-14
SGTIN 96 ....................................................................................................................................... A-15
Password Lock ................................................................................................................................ A-16
Permalock and Password Lock ......................................................................................................... A-16
FONTS ...................................................................................................................................................... B-1
PaxarSymbols Font 56 Characters ...................................................................................................... B-3
Table of Contents v
Paxar Font 70 and Font 71 Characters ................................................................................................ B-4
NAFTA Font 72 and Font 73 Characters .............................................................................................. B-5
Bitmap Font Information ........................................................................................................................ B-6
Monospaced Font Magnification ............................................................................................................. B-6
Proportional Font Magnification ............................................................................................................. B-7
Scalable Font Information ..................................................................................................................... B-7
TrueType Font Information .................................................................................................................... B-8
Downloading TrueType Fonts ............................................................................................................. B-8
Using International Fonts ...................................................................................................................... B-8
Selecting a Symbol Set ...................................................................................................................... B-8
International Font Sample .................................................................................................................. B-9
Arabic Font Sample ......................................................................................................................... B-10
Licensing Your Fonts .......................................................................................................................... B-10
Locating the Font Number in a Font Packet .......................................................................................... B-10
SYMBOL SETS/CODE PAGES .................................................................................................................... C-1
Supported Symbol Sets and Code Pages ................................................................................................ C-1
Selecting a Symbol Set or Code Page ................................................................................................. C-1
Using Code 128 Function Codes ............................................................................................................ C-1
Entering Extended Characters ............................................................................................................... C-2
Using International Character Sets/Code Pages ................................................................................... C-2
Internal Symbol Set ........................................................................................................................... C-2
ANSI Symbol Set ............................................................................................................................... C-3
Bold Character Set ............................................................................................................................ C-3
OCRA Character Set ......................................................................................................................... C-4
Code Page 100 (Macintosh) ............................................................................................................... C-4
Code Page 101 (Wingdings) ............................................................................................................... C-5
Code Page 437 (Latin U.S.) ............................................................................................................... C-5
Code Page 850 (Latin 1) .................................................................................................................... C-6
Code Page 852 (Latin 2) .................................................................................................................... C-6
Code Page 855 (Russian) .................................................................................................................. C-7
Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish) ............................................................................................................. C-7
Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese) ................................................................................................ C-8
Code Page 1250 (Latin 2) .................................................................................................................. C-8
Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic) .................................................................................................................. C-9
Code Page 1252 (Latin 1) .................................................................................................................. C-9
Code Page 1253 (Greek) ................................................................................................................. C-10
Code Page 1254 (Turkish) ............................................................................................................... C-10
Code Page 1255 (Hebrew) ............................................................................................................... C-11
Code Page 1256 (Arabic) ................................................................................................................. C-11
Code Page 1257 (Baltic) .................................................................................................................. C-12
Code Page 1258 (Vietnamese) ......................................................................................................... C-12
ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart ............................................................................................... C-13
Binary to Hex Conversion Chart ........................................................................................................... C-16
Dot to Run Length Encoding Chart ....................................................................................................... C-18
ON (Black) Dots .............................................................................................................................. C-18
vi Packet Reference Manual
Off (White Dots) .............................................................................................................................. C-18
FORMAT DESIGN TOOLS .......................................................................................................................... D-1
Online Configuration Worksheet ............................................................................................................. D-2
Batch Worksheet .................................................................................................................................. D-3
Check Digit Worksheet .......................................................................................................................... D-4
Supply Layout Grids (English) ............................................................................................................... D-4
Supply Layout Grids (Metric) ................................................................................................................. D-6
Supply Layout Grids (Dots).................................................................................................................... D-7
Format Worksheet ................................................................................................................................ D-9
Sample Format Worksheet................................................................................................................... D-10
PRINTER DIFFERENCES ........................................................................................................................... E-1
Printer Comparison ............................................................................................................................... E-1
Post-Print Options ................................................................................................................................ E-2
GLOSSARY ............................................................................................................................................... G-1
INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................ I-1
Table of Contents vii
viii Packet Reference Manual
G E T T I N G S TA R T E D
1
Before you read this manual, review the printer information in the Operator’s
Handbook. This manual provides the necessary information to design, write and print a Monarch®
Printer Control Language II (MPCLII) format. The following printers support this type of format:
♦
9825® (V. 1.0 or greater)
♦
9855® (V. 1.0 or greater)
See Appendix E, “Printer Differences” for a description of each printer’s features.
About This Manual
You do not need to be a programmer to use this manual, but you must be familiar with creating
text files and using basic MS-DOS® commands. This chapter describes how to
♦
create and download a sample MPCLII packet.
♦ use the Supply Layout Grid and Format Worksheet.
♦
categorize data into field types and select fonts to use in your format.
See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for a list of available fonts for your printer. See Chapter
4, “Defining Field Options,” for a list of available options for your printer.
Before You Begin
1.
Connect the printer to the host. Refer to the Quick Reference for more information.
2.
Load supplies in the printer. Refer to the Quick Reference for more information.
3.
Turn on the printer.
4.
Set the communication parameters and configure the printer. The communication parameters
at the printer must match those at the host. See Chapter 2, “Configuring the Printer,” for
more information.
5.
Design your format. See “Starting with a Design” for more information.
6.
Download your format to the printer. See Chapter 6, “Printing,” for more information.
Creating an MPCLII Format Packet
A format defines which fields appear and where the fields are printed on the label. The printer
requires this information in a special form, using Monarch® Printer Control Language II (MPCL).
This section describes how to create a sample MPCLII format packet.
Make sure supplies are loaded, the printer is connected to the host and is ready to receive data.
Refer to the Operator’s Handbook for more information.
For detailed information about the format header, text, constant text, and bar code fields, see
Chapter 3, "Defining Fields." For information about batch packets, see Chapter 6, “Printing.”
1.
Type the following format header in any text editor:
{F,25,A,R,E,200,200,"FMT-25" |
2.
Type the following constant text field:
C,140,40,0,1,2,1,W,C,0,0,"SAMPLE FORMAT",0 |
3.
Type the following bar code field:
B,1,12,F,85,40,1,2,40,5,L,0 |
4.
Type the following text field:
T,2,18,V,50,50,1,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,1 | }
Getting Started 1-1
You have created a format packet for your MPCLII printer. Now, a batch packet must be created
before you can print the format.
5.
Type the following batch header, after the text field line:
{B,25,N,1 |
6.
Type the following bar code data:
1,"02802811111" |
7.
Type the following text field data:
2,"TEXT FIELD" | }
8.
Save your file as SAMPLE.FMT.
9.
Type MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1 at the DOS prompt if you are using serial communications.
This sets the communication parameters at your host. These communication parameters
must match those at your printer. See “Setting Communication Parameters,” in Chapter 2, or
your hosts documentation for more information.
10. Type COPY SAMPLE.FMT COM1. The following 2 inch by 2 inch label prints:
{F,25,A,R,E,200,200,"Fmt 25" |
C,140,40,0,1,2,1,W,C,0,0,"SAMPLE FORMAT",0 |
B,1,12,F,85,40,1,2,40,5,L,0 |
T,2,18,V,50,50,1,3,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 | }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,25,N,1 |
1,"02802811111" |
2,"TEXT FIELD" | }
See “Starting with a Design” to design your format and Chapter 3,
"Defining Fields" to create text, bar code, and line fields.
Daily Startup Procedures
You may want to design a checklist for operators to follow each day. Here are a few suggested
items: Turn on the printer and host, make sure ribbon and supplies are loaded, make sure
communication parameters are set, and download packets from the host to the printer.
You may want to keep records of supplies that have been printed. A good way to do this is to
design a print log for operators to complete at the end of the day. Here are some suggestions for
types of information to include in a print log: date, operators name, format name, supply size,
quantity printed, evaluation of print quality, and problems/comments.
Keep backup copies of your format, batch data, check digit, and graphic packets.
Starting with a Design
Before you create a format packet, you must design your label. There are several steps to
designing a custom label:
1.
Decide which fields should appear on your label. See “Determining Format Contents” for
more information.
2.
Determine your label size. Labels are available from us in a wide variety of sizes. Your
application and the amount of data you need to print determines the supply size. Contact
your Account Manager or Technical Support for more information.
3.
Draw a rough sketch of your label. You may want to draw several variations to see what
works best. See “Drawing Rough Sketches” for more information.
1-2 Packet Reference Manual
4.
Identify the field types that appear on your label. See “Considering Field Types” for more
information.
5.
Decide which fonts you want to use. See “Considering Fonts” for more information.
6.
Fill out your Format Worksheet. See “Using the Format Worksheet” for more information.
At this point, you are ready to send your design to the printer. To do this:
7.
Create a format packet, based on how you filled out your worksheet. See Chapter 3,
“Defining Fields,” for more information.
8.
Download your format packet to the printer. See Chapter 6, “Printing,” for more information.
Determining Format Contents
Before you lay out your format, answer these questions. How large is your supply, which fonts
do you want to use, do you want to include a bar code, and do you want to include graphics?
Determining the Print Area
The “bottom” (or leading edge) is the edge that exits the printer first. The 0,0 point is at the
bottom left corner of the label. The print area is in the center of the label.
Printer
Unit of
Measure
Max. Supply
(Wid x Len)
Max. Print Area
(Wid x Len)
Min. Supply
(Wid x Len)
Min. Print Area
(Wid x Len)
9825
English
Metric
Dots
425 x 1750
1080 x 4445
863 x 3553
400 x 1600
1016 x 4064
812 x 3248
75 x 50
191 x 127
152 x 102
75 x 50
191 x 127
152 x 102
9855
English
Metric
Dots (203)
Dots (300)
425 x 1750
1080 x 4445
863 x 3553
1275 x 5250
400 x 1600
1016 x 4064
812 x 3248
1200 x 3900
75 x 32
191 x 81
152 x 65
225 x 96
75 x 32
191 x 81
152 x 65
225 x 96
Note:
You can create longer images if you reallocate memory to increase your image buffer.
See "Defining the Memory Packet" in Chapter 2 for more information.
The following non-print zones are recommended for the printers:
All Supplies
.050 inches on either edge of the label.
All Supplies
.020 inches at the end of the label.
If using the optional verifier, allow a minimum no-scan zone on the trailing edge of the label of
0.5 inch (13 mm). The trailing edge is the edge of the label that exists the printer last; regardless
of how the format is designed on the label.
Use the following formulas to convert inches to dots and metric:
Dots = inches x 203 (or 300 dots per inch)
Metric (1/10mm) = inches x 254
English (1/100 inch) = 100 x (dots/203) or (dots/300)
Dots = Metric (1/10 mm) x 799/1000 (or 1181/1000)
300 dpi depends on your printer.
Getting Started 1-3
Drawing Rough Sketches
After you decide what information you want to print, sketch how you want the
information to appear on the label. Note any areas that are preprinted on the
label, such as a logo.
As soon as you know what information to include on the label, and you have a
rough sketch, you can use a supply layout grid to help you layout and size your
label. If you do not want to use a grid, go to “Considering Field Types” to
choose what information you want on your label.
Using Supply Layout Grids
A supply layout grid contains measurement markers.
These markers help you accurately position information
on your label.
Decide whether you want to design formats using
English, Metric, or Dot measurements. Choose from the
following grids:
English
Metric
Graphic
The English grid is measured in 1/100 inches.
The Metric grid is measured in 1/10 millimeters (mm).
The printer uses dots to print images on a label.
The printhead has 203 dots per inch (dpi) or an
optional 300 dots per inch printhead.
Choose English or Metric units when designing formats
to use with different printers. English or Metric units
allow more direct use of formats on printers with
different density printheads.
If you want to use the supply layout grids, a copy of
each is in Appendix D, “Format Design Tools.”
1-4 Packet Reference Manual
Considering Field Types
After you select a supply size, the next step in designing a format is to decide what information
you want to print on the label. For example, you may want to print your company name, price of
an item, and a bar code that combines information from other places. Everything you want to
print falls into one of the following categories.
Field Type
Description
Examples
Text
Contains letters, numbers, or
symbols you want to print.
item number, item description,
department number, price, date
Non-Printable
Text
Holds data for use later, such as for city, state, and zip code to be included in
a bar code
merging into another field. The
printer does not print non-printable
text fields.
Bar Code
Used for printing bar codes that can item or serial numbers, zip codes,
be scanned.
information you do not want to have
visible to customers
Constant Text
Prints fixed characters that print
without changing.
company name, company address
Line or Box
Highlights or separates items.
line marking out the regular price, border
around the supply
Graphic
Contains a bitmap image or a
compliance label overlay.
logos
Verifier
Specifies a verifier configuration to
use for each format.
Mode 2, mode 19
RFID
Contains the RFID data to program
into the RFID tag.
Class 1 Gen1, Class 1 Gen2, EPC data
All of the above field types except graphics are discussed in Chapter 3. See Chapter 5,
“Creating Graphics” for information on including graphics in your format.
Considering Fonts
When working with fonts, you have three considerations: font appearance, font size (scalable or
bitmapped), and font spacing (monospaced or proportional).
The TrueType® scalable font, EFF Swiss Bold™ (font 50) is standard on the printers. See
Appendix B, “Fonts,” for samples of each font.
Interchanging Packets
You can use an MPCLII format that was designed for another MPCLII printer on a 9800 series
printer. However, the format may appear smaller (fields will be shorter), because most of the
9800 series printers use a 203 dpi printhead. The 9855 printer has an optional 300 dpi printhead.
Getting Started 1-5
Using the Format Worksheet
The Format Worksheet is divided into sections that list the field types. Each section has boxes to
fill in with parameters that define your format. A format worksheet is included in Appendix D,
“Format Design Tools.”
Filling in the Format Worksheet
Decide what type of field to use on your label.
1.
Make a copy of the Format Worksheet.
2.
Define the Format Header. See “Defining the Format Header” in Chapter 3 for more
information.
3.
Define all non-printable text fields before you define the ones you want to print. See
“Defining Non-Printable Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.
4.
Define options as you require them. See Chapter 4, “Defining Field Options” for more
information.
1-6 Packet Reference Manual
CONFIGURING THE PRINTER
2
This chapter discusses how to
♦
set communication parameters.
♦
upload the printers configuration or font information.
♦
configure the printer using online configuration packets.
♦
use immediate commands to control the printers operation at any time.
Setting Communication Parameters
Use the following information if you are using serial communications. See “Using Parallel
Communications” for information about parallel communications.
The communication parameters at the printer must match those at the host.
You can use the communication settings packet to set communication parameters for your
printer.
On MS-DOS computers, you can use the MODE command to set communication values on your
PC.
For example
MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1
This command sets your host to these communication values: 9600 baud, no parity, an 8 bit word
length, 1 stop bit.
Using Parallel Communications
If your printer supports parallel communications, the parallel port is IEEE-1284 or Centronics®
mode. You can set which mode to use through the control panel. Refer to the Operator’s
Handbook for control panel information. The communication settings are automatically configured
for you. There are no operator settings required.
We recommend waiting at least two seconds (or longer) when switching between the serial and
parallel ports to send data, because data may be lost. Be careful when using print spoolers,
because data transmission occurs in the background of the operating system. This makes data
transmission completion difficult to determine when switching between ports.
Configuring the Printer 2-1
Using MPCLII Conventions
Here are some guidelines to follow when using MPCLII.
MPCLII Punctuation
Use the following symbols when creating MPCLII packets:
Character
Decimal
Value
Description
{ (left bracket)
123
start of header
} (right bracket)
125
end of header
| (vertical bar)
124
field separator*
, (comma)
044
parameter separator
"ABC" (quotation
marks)
034
Quotation marks enclose character strings. Empty quotes (" ")
identify null strings or unused fields.
‘comment’
(single quotation
marks)
039
Grave accents enclose comments. Any data enclosed in grave
accents is ignored. Do not embed comments within a quoted
string. Grave accents are also used to reject mainframe data.
*
The field separator is the split vertical bar (|). The decimal value is 124. To enter this
character, use the Shift key plus the Split Vertical Bar key on your computer’s keyboard.
Depending on your text editor, it may appear as a solid vertical bar or as a split vertical bar.
Note:
These MPCL characters are the default.
Standard S yntax Guidelines
When creating MPCLII packets:
♦
Begin each packet with a start of header ({).
♦
End each packet with an end of header (}).
♦
Define no more than 1000 fields in a format. Each | indicates one field. However, options are
not counted as fields. The actual number of fields a format can have may be less, because the
number of fields is limited by the available memory.
♦
The field number (0 to 999) must be unique. We recommend starting at 1, instead of 0.
♦
Do not use a field number more than once per format.
♦ Define all fields in the order to image/print them. The printer does not print in field number
order.
♦
Separate all parameters with a Parameter Separator (,).
♦ End each field with a Field Separator (|).
♦
Enter all information in CAPITAL letters, except words or phrases within quotation marks.
♦
Include all parameters for a field unless documented as optional.
♦
Define non-printable text fields before the field to which they apply.
♦
Define options immediately after the field to which they apply.
♦
Multiple options can be used with most fields. Options can be used in any combination except
as noted with each definition. Options are processed in the order they are received.
♦
Keep in mind that proportionally spaced fonts need wider fields than monospaced fonts. For
variable field data, use a letter W to determine the maximum field size.
2-2 Packet Reference Manual
♦
Do not place a new line (return) or any other non-printing character within a field definition.
However, a carriage return or line break after each | makes your formats easier to read.
T,1,20,V,30,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 |
T,2,10,V,50,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 |
♦
Spaces are ignored, except within character strings.
♦
Indenting options improves readability of your formats.
T,1,18,V,30,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 |
R,42,1 |
♦
Use a tilde (~) followed by a 3-digit ASCII code in a quoted string to send function codes or
extended characters or send the 8-bit ASCII code.
You can modify formats and fields with the optional entry method. See “Optional Entry Method” in
Chapter 6 for more information.
Using Online Configuration Packets
Use online configuration packets to change the printer’s settings. You can send an individual
configuration packet or a single packet containing all the configuration packets. Supply all
parameters for each packet. Leave the parameters blank that you do not need to change. For
example,
{I,A,,,,1 | }
prints a slashed zero and uses the last sent online System Setup parameters.
Make a copy of the online configuration worksheet in Appendix D, “Format Design Tools,” and
save the original. Packets A-M are listed on the worksheet.
When you turn off the printer, all the information in the online configuration packets is saved and
used when the printer is turned back on. After you change the printer’s configuration, resend the
format, batch, or graphic to the printer before the changes take effect.
Configuration Packet Header
Always include an I, immediately after the left bracket { and before the packet identifier (A, B, C,
etc.). The I parameter identifies the data stream as a configuration packet.
Note:
Include the I parameter with each packet if you are sending them individually. Include it
only at the beginning of a data stream if you are sending multiple packets.
This is the syntax to use when you create online configuration packets:
Syntax
{
I,
1 - 9 optional records
A, parameter 1...parameter
B, parameter 1...parameter
C, parameter 1...parameter
D, parameter 1...parameter
E, parameter 1...parameter
F, parameter 1...parameter
G, parameter 1...parameter
M, parameter 1...parameter
X, parameter 1
parameter
}
Start of Header
Configuration Header
5
6
7
3
9
5
3
3
5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
System Setup
Supply Setup
Print Control
Monetary Formatting
Control Characters
Communication Settings
Backfeed Control
Memory Configuration
RFID Setup for UHF
End of Header
Configuring the Printer 2-3
Syntax for single packet
{
I,
A, parameter 1...parameter 5 |
}
Start of Header
Configuration Header
System Setup
End of Header
You can also add a configuration to RAM or specify units for supply, print, margin, and cut
positions. If you use the optional parameters with the I packet, any online configuration packets
following the split vertical bar (|) must specify distances using the selected units. However, the
test labels display the units in dots, even if you entered them in English or Metrics units.
Syntax
{header,ID#,action,device | }
1. header
2. ID#
Constant I.
ID. Use 0.
3. action
Action. Options:
A Add configuration.
U Upload User Configuration.
Storage Device. Use R (Volatile RAM).
4. device
5. units
Example
Units. (Optional parameter.) Options:
E English
M Metric
G Dots
{I,0,A,R,E |
C,0,25,0,0,0 | }
Adds a configuration to volatile RAM and specifies English units. It also uses the default contrast,
moves print 0.25 inches closer to the bottom of the supply and does not change the margin
adjustment, prints at the default print speed, and uses the default printhead width.
If you do not use the optional parameters, the syntax for the online configuration packets does
not change. For example,
{I,C,0,50,0,0,0 | }
uses the default contrast, moves print 50 dots (0.25) inches closer to the bottom of the supply
and does not change the margin adjustment, prints at the default print speed, and uses the
default printhead width.
Example
{I,0,U,R | }
Uploads the printer configuration from volatile RAM and returns the following to the host.
A,0,0,0,1,0 |
B,1,1,0,0,0 |
C,0,0,0,0,0,0 |
D,1,0,2 |
E,"~123~044~034~124~125~126","","~013~010" |
F,3,1,0,0,1 |
G,0,65,65 |
M,R,76365,45190,N,0,0 |
M,R,R,640 |
M,T,R,640 |
M,I,R,3300 |
M,D,R,640 |
M,F,R,1280 |
M,V,R,3840 |
X,0,5,12,12,6 |
2-4 Packet Reference Manual
The parameters for each packet (A-X) are displayed. In the first line that begins with M, 30715 is
the total volatile memory available, 24215 is the memory available in volatile RAM. There is no
non-volatile RAM available. The remaining lines beginning with M list the buffer sizes in 1/10K for
the Receive, Transmit, Image, Downloadable Fonts, Formats, and Scalable Fonts Buffers.
Configuration S yntax Guidelines
When creating a printer configuration packet:
♦
Follow the Standard Syntax Guidelines listed at the beginning of this manual.
♦
The first character after the start of header ({) is the configuration header (I).
♦
Download multiple configuration packets within one packet or download a single configuration
packet.
♦
If you change any of the online configuration packets, resend the format packet to the printer,
so the configuration changes take effect.
♦
Include the first five ANSI codes, at a minimum, in the control characters packet.
♦
Send configuration packets once per session (each time the printer is turned off and then back
on), not with every format or batch packet.
Making Print Adjustments
You can adjust where the printer prints on your supply by adjusting the supply, print, or margin
positions. However, keep in mind the following:
♦
Supply adjustments across the width of your supply, such as the margin position, are based in
dots- either 203 dpi or 300 dpi, depending on your printhead density.
♦
Supply adjustments for the length of your supply, such as supply position or print adjustment,
are always measured in 1/203 of an inch, regardless of your printhead density.
Defining the System Setup Packet
Use the system setup packet (A) to select the power up mode, display language, print separators
between batches, print a slashed zero, and select the symbol set.
Syntax
{I,A,powup_mode,language,sep_on,slash_zero,symbol_set | }
A1. A
System Setup Packet
A2. powup_mode Online Mode. 0 is the default. Options:
0 online mode
1 offline mode (9855)
A3. language
Display Language. 0 is the default. Options
0 English
1 French
7
Swedish
2 German
8
Spanish2 (MX)
3 Spanish (ES)
9
Danish
4 Japanese
10
Dutch
5 Portuguese
11
Finnish
6 Italian
12
Norwegian
A4. sep_on
Batch Separators. 0 is the default. Options:
0 Does not print a separator
1 Prints a separator
2 Double-length separator – print 2 tags (9855)
Note: Do not use batch separators with continuous (non-indexed) supply. If
using a stacker, the batch separator is 3.66 inches long.
A5. slash_zero
Slash Zero. 0 is the default. Options:
0 Print a standard zero
1 Print a zero with a slash through it
Configuring the Printer 2-5
A6. symbol_set
Symbol Set. 0 is the default. Options:
0
Internal
1
ANSI
2
Code Page 437 (Latin U.S.)
3
Code Page 850 (Latin 1)
4
Code Page 1250 (Latin 2)
5
Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)
6
Code Page 1252 (Latin 1)
7
Code Page 1253 (Greek)
8
Code Page 1254 (Turkish)
9
Code Page 1255 (Hebrew)
10
Code Page 1256 (Arabic)
11
Code Page 1257 (Baltic)
12
Code Page 1258 (Vietnamese)
13
DOS Code Page 852 (Latin 2)
14
DOS Code Page 855 (Russian)
15
DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)
16
DOS Code Page 860 (Portuguese)
17
W ingdings
18
Macintosh
19
Unicode
20
BIG5
21
GB2312
22
SJIS to SJIS (CP 932, Japanese)
23
GB2312 to GB2312 (CP 936, Simplified Chinese)
24
BIG5 to BIG5 (CP 950, Traditional Chinese)
25
KSC5601
26
Unicode UTF-8
Note: The Standard, Reduced, Bold, OCRA and HR fonts only support the
Internal Symbol Set (0). The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces only support the
ANSI (1) and DOS Code Page 437 (2) and 850 (3) Symbol Sets. The
scalable font (font#50) does not support Code Page 1256 Arabic (10).
Code pages 13-16 and 4-12 are for downloaded TrueType fonts or the
scalable font. Code pages 19-26 require a downloaded International
TrueType font. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific;
therefore, all code pages may not be supported in a given font. See
Appendix C, “Symbol Sets/ Code Pages” for more information.
Example
{I,A,0,0,1,1,0 | }
Powers up the printer in the online mode, displays prompts in English, prints a separator after
each batch, prints zeros with slashes through them, and uses the internal symbol set.
2-6 Packet Reference Manual
Defining the Supply Setup Packet
Use the supply setup packet (B) to select supply type, ribbon, feed mode, supply position, and
cut position.
Syntax
{I,B,supply_type,ribbon,feed_mode,supply_posn,cut_posn,
skip_index | }
B1. B
B2. supply_type
Supply Setup Packet
Supply Type. 1 is the default. Options:
0 Black mark supply
1 Die Cut/edge aperture supply
2 Continuous (non-indexed) supply
3 Center Aperture supply (9855)
4 Reserved
5 Tag Edge Aperture (9855 RFMP or for cutting tags with Version 7.0
greater firm ware)
or
Note: You must use continuous supply in continuous mode. Do not use
continuous supply with extended backfeed or 94x5 emulation.
If your supply has black marks, always use black mark sensing whether or
not the supply has attacher holes.
Use 1 for edge aperture supplies with printers prior to Version 7.0.
Use 5 for edge aperture RFID supplies.
Use 5 to cut edge aperture supplies with Version 7.0 or greater.
B3. ribbon
B4. feed_mode
B5. supply_posn
Ribbon. 1 is the default. Options:
0 Ribbon not installed
1 Ribbon installed
2 High Energy Ribbon (9855)
Use a print speed of 2.5 IPS with the high energy ribbon. Serial
bar codes cannot be printed using this ribbon. Settings for ribbon
and supply type must match the supplies loaded in the printer;
otherwise, an error occurs. To clear the error, turn off the printer
and change the configuration packet. Turn on the printer and
resend the packet.
Feed Mode. 0 is the default. Options:
0 Continuous operation
1 On-demand mode
Supply Position. Range: -300 to 300 in 1/203 inch. 0 is the default. Adjusts the
machine to print at the vertical 0,0 point on the supply. This adjustment accounts
for mechanical tolerances from machine to machine. The supply position
adjustment only needs to be made on the initial machine setup. Adjust the supply
position if formats do not start at the 0,0 point on the supply. Increase the supply
position to move print up, decrease to move print down on the label. To verify the
0,0 point, print a test label. See “Printing a Test Label” in Chapter 8 for more
information.
For the RFID printer, adjust the supply position according to the Monarch® RFID
Printer Setup Utility.
You can not change the s upply position while the printer is active. Changing the
supply position effects the print position, dispense position, and backfeed
distance. Once the supply position is set, use the print control packet and
backfeed control packet to adjust printing and the dispense position.
Configuring the Printer 2-7
B6. cut_posn
Cut position. Use 0 for the 9825. Adjusts where the tag is cut. The printer
adjusts the cut position according to the black marks on the supply. You may need
to adjust for aperture supplies. Increase to move the cut up, decrease to move the
cut down. .
Note: We do not recommend setting a positive cut position for any supply while
using extended backfeed. You may cut off the leading edge of the next
tag. Use 0.
B7. skip_index
Example
Skip index mode. 0 is the default. Options:
0 Disable skip index mode
1 Enable skip index mode. Allows the printer to skip (ignore) a sense
mark and print an image over multiple labels.
{I,B,0,0,1,10,50,1 | }
Indicates black mark and thermal direct stock has been loaded, causes the printer to operate in
on-demand mode, feeds the supply approximately .05 inches up before printing the format on
each label (10/203 inches), feeds the supply .25 inches (50/203 inches) before cutting, and
enables skip index mode.
Defining the Print Control Packet
Use the print control packet (C) to set the contrast, print, and margin adjustment, print speed,
and printhead width.
Syntax
{I,C,contrast,print_adj,margin_adj,speed_adj,ph_width | }
C1. C
C2. contrast
C3. print_adj
C4. margin_adj
C5. speed_adj
Print Control Packet
Print Contrast. Range: -699 to 699. 0 is the default. Using 399 or higher displays
a warning message on the 9855 printer and tracks high energy inches.
Solid black print cannot exceed 30% of any given s quare inch of the supply.
Print adjustment (position). Range: -99 to 99 (9825) or -450 to 450 (9855) in
1/203 inch for 203 dpi or 1/300 inch for 300 dpi. 0 is the default. Adjusts where
data prints vertically on the supply. Increase the print position to move print up,
decrease to move print down. For the RFID printer, adjust the print position
according to the Monarch® RFID Printer Setup Utility.
Margin adjustment (position). Range: -99 to 99 in 1/203 inch or 1/300 inch for 300
dpi printers). 0 is the default. Adjusts where data prints horizontally on the supply.
Increase the margin position to move print to the right, decrease to move print to
the left. Margin and print position are format adjustments. They do not effect the
supply position, dispense position, or backfeed distance.
Print Speed in inches per second (ips). 0 is the default. Options:
0
formats with serial bar codes automatically print at 2.5 ips
25
2.5 ips (default for serial bar codes)
40
4.0 ips (recommended for supply lengths less than 1.2 inches)
60
6.0 ips (default)
80
8.0 ips (9855)
100
10.0 ips (9855 with 203 dpi)
120
12.0 ips (9855 with 203 dpi and high speed option)
Note: Serial bar codes with an 8-dot narrow element do not automatically print at
2.5 ips. Serial bar codes printed at speeds greater than 2.5 ips may not
scan properly. However, the printer can print 203 dpi serial bar codes with
narrow elements of 3 dots (or greater) at 4.0 ips. You must use a print
speed of 2.5 ips with the high energy ribbon. See “Special 9855 Printing
Considerations,” in Chapter 6 for more information.
C6. ph_width
Example
W idth of the printhead in dots. Use 0.
{I,C,0,-20,-10,0,0 | }
Uses the default contrast, moves print 0.1 inch closer to the bottom of the supply (20/203 inches)
and .05 inch to the left on the supply (10/203 inches), prints at six inches per second, and uses
the default printhead width.
2-8 Packet Reference Manual
Defining the Monetary Formatting Packet
The monetary formatting packet (D) selects the monetary symbols to print for a price field. Use
the monetary formatting packet to select primary and secondary monetary symbols, and
designate the number of digits to appear at the right of a decimal.
Syntax
{I,D,cur_sym,secondary,decimals | }
D1. D
D2. cur_sym
Monetary Formatting Pac ket
Currency Symbol. 1 is the default. Options:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
No symbol
USA ($, Dollar)
UK (£, Pound)
Japan (¥, Yen)
Germany ( , Deutsche Mark)
France (F, Franc)
Spain (P, Peseta)
Italy (L., Lira)
Sweden (Kr, Krona)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Finland ( , Markka)
Austria ( , Shilling)
India (Rs, Rupee)
Russian ( , Ruble)
Korean ( , W on)
Thai ( , Baht)
Chinese (¥, Yuan)
Euro ( )
Note: To use these symbols, select the internal symbol set.
D3. secondary
D4. decimals
Example
Secondary Sign. Secondary s ymbols only print if you designate at least one
decimal place. 0 is the default. Options:
0 No secondary sign
1 Print secondary sign
Number of digits to the right of the decimal. 2 is the default. Options:
0 No digits
1 One digit
2 Two digits (default)
3 Three digits
{I,D,1,1,2 | }
Prints the dollar sign, uses a secondary symbol, and places two digits to the right of the decimal.
Configuring the Printer 2-9
Defining the Control Characters Packet
Use the control characters packet (E) to change the MPCLII control characters, enable and
disable the immediate commands, and change the default terminator character for job requests
and ENQs.
Changes take effect with the first character following the end of header character of the
configuration packet. Each control character must be unique and cannot appear anywhere else in
your packet, except within quotation marks. You can customize the trailer characters to work with
your host.
Note:
Wait two seconds for the new characters to take effect before sending packets using the
new characters.
If using symbol set 110 (Unicode UTF-8) to print International characters, set the MPCL control
characters (start of header, etc.) to decimal values between 0 and 128; otherwise, errors may
occur with the Unicode data entered.
Use the following syntax for the control characters packet. Notice all but the first parameter is
within quotation marks.
Syntax
{I,E,"ANSI_cd","string1","string2" | }
E1. E
E2. “ANSI_cd”
Control Characters Packet
~123
Start of header
{
(left bracket)
~044
Parameter separator
,
(comma)
~034
Quoted strings
“
(quotes)
~124
Field separator
|
(vertical bar)
The field separator is the split vertical bar (|). The decimal
value is 124. To enter this character, use the Shift key plus the
Split Vertical Bar key on the computers keyboard. Depending on
the text editor, it may appear as a solid vertical bar or as a split
vertical bar.
~125
End of header
}
(right bracket)
~126
Data escape character (optional)
~~ (double tilde)
defined character
Immediate command character (optional). Up to any 3
characters in the 0 to 255 decimal range. The character must be defined before
this command can be used. The caret (~094) is normally used.
Note: “ANSI_cd” includes seven separate parameters. The first five parameters
are required. The other parameters are optional.
E3. “string 1"
E4. “string 2"
Terminator for status requests and ENQ requests. Up to any 3 characters in the 0
to 255 decimal range. “013" is the default. Sending "" disables this sequence.
Terminator for job requests and data uploads. Up to any 3 characters in the 0 to
255 decimal range. None is the default. Sending "" disables this sequence.
After you change these parameters, all packets, including any future configuration packets, must
use the new control characters. We recommend using the tilde and ASCII character code
sequence when sending this packet multiple times. Also, set the packet delimiters to characters
within the 21 hex to 7E hex range.
You must send the control characters packet to enable the immediate commands. An immediate
command executes immediately, even if it is embedded within quotation marks, and all data
following the command in the string is ignored.
2-10 Packet Reference Manual
Example
{I,E,"~123~063~034~124~125~126~094" | }
Changes the parameter separator character from , to ?. The other control characters remain
unchanged. It also enables the immediate commands by defining the ^ symbol as the command
identifier.
Resetting Control Characters
You can change the characters in the previous example back to their original settings by
downloading this packet:
{I?E?"~123~044~034~124~125~126~094" | }
Notice that the parameter separator is ? in this packet. This is the parameter separator that was
set before this packet. Once the packet is received by the printer, the new parameter separator
(a comma, in this case) is valid.
Be careful when using this feature. If you forget what the control characters were changed to,
print a test label. (The test label lists the current control characters.) See “Printing a Test Label,”
in Chapter 8 for more information.
Using Immediate Commands
Immediate commands effect printer operation as soon as the printer receives them, even if they
are included within a packet or used inside quotation marks.
You can use immediate commands to change immediate command or status polling control
characters, reset the printer, or cancel and repeat batches.
Enabling Immediate Commands
When the printer is first turned on, these commands are not available. To use these commands,
you must first send the control characters packet and define the immediate command control
character. The immediate command control character is saved in non-volatile RAM so it is not
lost after you turn off the printer. Once the immediate command control character is defined, the
immediate commands are enabled.
Sending Immediate Commands
Immediate commands consist of a three- or four-character sequence you can send in a packet or
embed in your application. Each command must be sent separately.
Syntax
control character_immediate command
The printer can accept only one immediate command at a time. Sending a command before the
previous one is completed can result in an error.
Example
^CB
Immediately cancels the batch currently printing unless an error exists in the printer. This
example assumes that the defined immediate command control character is the caret (^).
Note:
To use the immediate command control character or the status polling character within
your data, use the tilde sequence.
Configuring the Printer 2-11
The table represents the defined immediate command control character as ^ and the defined
status polling control character as d. You may define these characters to suit your needs.
Command
Parameter
^CA
Cancels all the batches in the printer's queue unless an error exists on the
printer.
Note: This does not cancel batches in the printer's receive buffer.
^CB
Cancels only the current batch being printed unless an error exists.
^DD or
^DCd
Disables the MPCL data escape character (the tilde) and inhibits MPCL from
acting on ANY data escape sequence from the host. Sets the MPCL data
escape character to the ASCII value given by the d parameter. The value can
be any ASCII character.
^EA
Aborts an error condition. This command is the same as pressing
ESCAPE/CLEAR to clear an error. May need to be sent multiple times. Use
^RB to reprint batch.
CAUTION: This command causes the current batch to stop and the condition
that caused the error to remain uncorrected.
^ER
Resets the error. This command is the same as pressing FEED/CUT to
acknowledge an error. Normal operation resumes.
^FD
Feeds a label when printer is idle. Simulates the operation of pressing
FEED/CUT and dispenses the next label if printer is in the on-demand mode.
Note: Printer ignores this command if printing.
^FF1
Formats flash memory
^FF2
Returns the amount (in bytes) of the available flash memory.
^GD
Disables the conversion of formats designed in 203 dpi dot units to 300 dpi.
^GE
Enables the conversion of formats designed in 203 dpi dot units (not English
or Metric) to 300 dpi.
^ID or
^ICd
Disables the Immediate Command feature by turning off the Immediate
Command escape character. Sets the Immediate Command escape character
to the ASCII value given by the d parameter. The value can be any ASCII
character. Use ^IE to enable immediate commands.
^LE
Uploads the last successful EPC encoded data in ASCII Hex format to the lastused communication port/channel. (^).
^MC
Returns the customer ID or RPQ version to the host. (00 to 99)
^MD
Returns the printhead dot density to the host. 00 = 203 dpi 01 = 300 dpi
^MI
Returns the customer ID or RPQ revision level to the host. (00 to 99)
^MM
Returns the model number to the host. M17 = 9825
^MP
Returns the prototype number to the host. (00 to 99)
^MR
Returns the revision number to the host. (00 to 99)
^MV
Returns the version number to the host. (00 to 99)
^PR
Resets the printer. This command takes five seconds to complete and then the
printer is ready to receive data. It has the same effect as turning off and then
turning on the printer.
Note: Command should be used only when the printer is not printing.
^RB
Repeats the last printed batch, printing the same number of labels as
specified in the original batch. This command does not work if using batch
separators.
Note: Printer ignores this command if printing.
2-12 Packet Reference Manual
M18 = 9855
Command
Parameter
^RM
Checks the RFID hardware version.
^RS
Resynchronizes supply when supply roll is changed.
Note: Printer ignores this command if printing.
^SD or
^SCd
Disables the status polling feature by turning off the status polling control
character. Sets the status polling control character to the ASCII value given by
the d parameter. The value of d can be any ASCII character.
^SFa
Loads script with host response.
^SFb
Loads script without host response.
^SFc
Enables script.
^SFd
Disables script.
^SFe
Uploads script version information.
^SFf
Deletes script.
^SFg
Turns on ENQ status polling before it reaches the script.
^SFh
Turns off ENQ status polling before it reaches the script.
^SFi
Turns on immediate commands before it reaches the script.
^SFj
Turns off immediate commands before it reaches the script.
^TP
Prints a test label.
Note: Printer ignores this command if printing.
^VLC
Only clears the data that has been uploaded, not all the logged data. Data is
cleared with this command after a successful upload. W e recommend clearing
the log file after uploading.
^VLD
Disables verifier data logging (default when the printer is reset).
^VLE
Enables verifier data logging.
^VLU
Uploads the log file to the last port that received host data (serial, parallel,
USB, or Ethernet). Repeat this command until data is successfully uploaded.
Data can be cleared after it has been uploaded.
Configuring the Printer 2-13
Defining the Communication Settings Packet
Use the communication settings packet (F) to set the baud rate, word length, stop bits, parity,
and flow control for serial communications. To set parallel communications, see “Using Parallel
Communications.”
Changing the communication settings takes approximately two seconds. Communications sent
during this interval will be lost. Make sure the host communication values match the values on
the printer and the host is capable of communicating at the speed you select for the printer.
Do not add any characters, such as a carriage return/line feed, in your communication settings
packet or communications errors may occur.
Syntax
{I,F,baud,word_length,stop_bits,parity,flow_control | }
F1. F
F2. baud
F3. word_length
F4. stop_bits
F5. parity
F6. flow_control
Communication Settings Packet
Baud Rate. 3 is the default. Options:
0 1200
1 2400
2 4800
3 9600
4 19200
5 38400
6 57600
7 115200
W ord Length. 1 is the default. Options:
0 7-bit word length
1 8-bit word length
Stop Bits. 0 is the default. Options:
0 1-stop bit
1 2-stop bits
Parity. 0 is the default. Options:
0 None
1 ODD parity
2 EVEN parity
Flow Control. 1 is the default Options:
0 None
2 (CTS)
1 DTR
3 XON/XOFF
Note: If you use the DOS COPY command to download your formats, set Flow
Control to DTR (not XON/XOFF).
Example
{I,F,3,1,0,0,1 | }
Uses 9600 baud, an 8-bit word length, one stop bit, no parity, and the DTR mode.
2-14 Packet Reference Manual
Defining the Backfeed Control Packet
Use the backfeed control packet (G) to enable or disable the backfeed option, set the dispense
position and the backfeed distance. Backfeed works by advancing each printed label to the
desired dispense position. Once that label is removed, the next label to be printed is backed up
underneath the printhead. In continuous mode, only the last label in the batch is advanced to the
dispense position. You may need to adjust the dispense position to allow labels to be removed,
die cut labels to be removed easily, or to prevent them from falling off.
Extended backfeed is available on the 9855 printer with a knife installed. Extended backfeed
feeds a tag far enough out to be cut and backfeeds the next tag to the printhead line. You can
not change the backfeed distance while the printer is active.
Extended backfeed eliminates printed tags being left between the printhead and knife. Extended
backfeed does not work with non-indexed (continuous) supply/mode. We do not recommend
using extended backfeed when sensing on attacher-hole supplies.
Do not use backfeed (normal or extended) with supplies less than 0.75 inches. We recommend
using 0.5-inch gap supplies in peel mode when backfeed is disabled.
The dispense position and backfeed distance are optional parameters and do not have to be
specified. However, they allow for greater precision when positioning the supply.
Syntax
{I,G,action,dis_pos,bkfd_dis | }
G1. G
G2. action
Backfeed Control Packet
Action. If using one-inch RFID supplies, do not use backfeed.
0 is the default. Options:
0 disable backfeed
1 enable backfeed (use on any printer without a knife)
2 enable extended backfeed (use on any printer with a knife)
Note: We do not recommend setting a positive cut position for any supply while
using extended backfeed. You may cut off the leading edge of the next
tag.
G3. dis_pos
G4. bkfd_dis
Example
Dispense Position. Adjusts the stopping point of the label. Range: 50 to 200 dots.
65 dots is the default.
Backfeed Distance. Amount to move label backwards. 20 to 200 dots. 65 dots is
the default. This distance can not be greater than the dispense position.
The backfeed distance should equal the dispense position. An exception is if you
are tearing instead of peeling. Then, the backfeed distance must be 30 dots (.150
inches) less than the dispense position. However, you will have a 30 dot non-print
zone on your supply. The 30-dot difference accounts for improper tearing of butt
cut supplies, because you do not want any exposed adhesive under the printhead.
{I,G,2 | }
Enables extended backfeed and cuts any tags remaining between the knife and printhead and
moves the supply backwards so the next tag is underneath the printhead. Using cut mode 4, you
do not have to press FEED/CUT to cut the last tag.
Example
{I,G,1,50,20 | }
Enables backfeed and sets the dispense position to 0.25 inches (50/203) and the backfeed
distance to 0.10 inches (20/203).
Configuring the Printer 2-15
Special Considerations When Using Backfeed
Make a note of the following items:
♦
Be careful when tearing supplies, because the adhesive can adhere to the printhead or platen
roller.
♦
Backfeed affects each label in the on-demand mode or the first and last label of the batch in
continuous mode.
♦
When backfeed is enabled and multiple batches are sent, the printer may not backfeed
between each batch.
♦
Backfeed should only be used when you need to advance labels to the desired dispense point.
♦
Backfeed does not interfere with the supply, print, or margin positions you have set.
♦ If the supply inter-label gap is not between .07 inch to .15 inch (14 to 30 dots), you must
adjust the dispense position and backfeed distance accordingly.
See the following graphic for a representation of the following adjustments: dispense position,
backfeed distance, supply position, print position, and margin position.
2-16 Packet Reference Manual
Defining the Memory Configuration Packet
Use the memory configuration packet (M) to customize the size of the printer’s buffers, which
allows greater flexibility in your formats.
Memory must be allocated in 1/2K increments. The memory configuration packet does not accept
decimals, so enter whole numbers. Multiply the amount to reallocate (in K) by 10. For example,
To reallocate (in K)
Enter this amount
1
10
1.5
15
2
20
2.5
25
153
1530
229.5
2295
Each buffer’s allocated memory remains in effect until that buffer is reallocated. For this reason,
reallocate all the buffers when reallocating any buffer. Reallocating more memory than what is
available causes an error.
Syntax
{I,M,buffer,device,buffer_size | }
M1. M
M2. buffer
Memory Configuration Packet
Buffer type. Options:
D Downloadable Fonts
F Format
I Image
R Receive
T Transmit
V Scalable (vector) fonts
M3. device
Storage type. Options:
F Flash Memory
R Volatile RAM. Packets stored in volatile RAM are deleted when the printer is
turned off.
Note: You cannot reallocate flash memory.
M4. buffer si ze
Buffer size in 1/10K ranges. The following table lis ts the configured buffer sizes
and min-max values for the printer. The printer’s c onfiguration is stored in nonvolatile RAM and saved when the printer is turned off. The maximum value for
each buffer is listed; however, the sum of all the buffers cannot exceed the
maximum available memory of the printer.
Buffer
Type
9825 (1 Meg Volatile RAM)
9855 (8 Meg Volatile RAM)
Transmit
Volatile
2K (.5K- 4K)
64K (.5K- 128K)
Receive
Volatile
8K (2K- 64K)
64K (2K- 128K)
Image
Volatile
330K (41.5K- 640K)
330K (41.5K- 6144K)
Downloadable Fonts
Volatile
64K (8K- 640K)
64K (8K- 8192K)
Scalable Fonts
Volatile
64K (32K-640K)
384K (32K-8192K)
Formats
Volatile
64K (16K- 640K)
128K (16K- 1024K)
Internal
NA
cannot reallocate
cannot reallocate
Note:
The 9825 and 9855 printers do not have non-volatile RAM; however, you can store
formats, fonts, and graphics in flash memory. Change the storage device of your packets
to “F” instead of “N.” The 9855 printer has an optional flash memory expansion (approx.
13 Meg) for fonts, formats, or ADK scripts. However, it cannot be reallocated.
Configuring the Printer 2-17
Example
{I,M,I,R,1530 | }
Stores the image buffer in volatile RAM and allocates 153K for it.
Checking Current Buffer Sizes
Send a configuration upload packet to check the sizes of the buffers. See “Configuration Packet
Header” for more information. After checking the current buffer sizes, begin reallocating memory.
To increase the image buffer and not use downloaded fonts, add that memory into the image
buffer.
Example
{I,M,R,R,20 |
M,T,R,10 |
D,R,80 |
M,V,R,160 |
M,I,R,3200 |}
Receive buffer
Transmit buffer
Downloadable fonts buffer
Scalable fonts buffer
Image buffer
2K
1 K
8K
16K
320K
Make sure memory is available before adding memory to a buffer. In the above example, if the
image buffer (M,I,R,3200) was defined before the downloadable fonts (M,D,R,80) and scalable
fonts buffers (M,V,R,160) were defined, an error would have occurred.
About Memory Buffers
Transmit Buffer
Receive Buffer
Image Buffer
Used to send ENQ, job, and upload responses. This buffer must
be allocated as volatile (R) RAM.
Used to save data received from the host before it is processed
by the printer. Changing this buffer size affects the amount of
data the printer can receive without using flow control. This
buffer must be allocated as volatile (R) RAM.
Used to image the current format. The printers support two 4inch by 8-inch buffers. Images up to 16 inches long can be
defined without reallocating memory. The image buffer is cleared
after a printer reset.
Use the formula below to calculate the approximate image buffer
size.
21K x Length (for 203 dpi) OR
46K x Length (for 300 dpi)
Length is the length of your label in inches.
203 DPI Example
21K x 25 = 525
(Multiply by 10 and round up to the next whole number if
necessary)
525K x 10 = 5250
Enter 5250 for the Image buffer.
300 DPI Example
46K x 26.75 = 1230.5
(Multiply by 10 and round up to the next whole number if
necessary)
1230.5 x 10 = 12305
Enter 12305 for the Image buffer.
2-18 Packet Reference Manual
Format Buffer
Used to store formats, batch data, and graphics. Use the
following formula to calculate the required format buffer size:
Linecount x 50/1024
Linecount is the number of lines in the format packet including
the format header and all the options.
The result of the above calculation is in kilobytes. Formats
remain in memory when you turn off the printer.
Downloadable Fonts Buffer
Used to store downloaded (bitmapped or TrueType) fonts. To
determine the size of your downloadable fonts, send a font
packet. For TrueType fonts, the file size, in bytes, is the
minimum amount needed in this buffer. See “Using the Font
Packet” for more information. Fonts stored in this buffer are
deleted when the printer is turned off. We recommend storing
downloaded fonts into flash memory.
Scalable (Vector)Fonts Buffer Used to image the scalable or downloaded (TrueType or
bitmapped) font characters. Increasing this buffer size allows
more characters to be saved in cache memory, so the characters
do not have to be re-built the next time they are printed. Use 0 if
you are not using scalable/TrueType fonts. This buffer must be
allocated as volatile (R) RAM.
The printer does not print the fonts if there is not enough memory
in this buffer to image them.
Buffer Worksheet
Make copies of this page to use as a buffer worksheet.
Configuring the Printer 2-19
Buffer Allocation Considerations
Keep these items in mind when allocating memory.
♦
Do not allocate more memory than what is available.
♦
Free memory from one buffer before you add it to another buffer.
♦
Reallocate all the buffers if reallocating any buffer.
♦ Send all buffer (re)allocations in one packet. The printer evaluates each individual buffer
allocation separately. If one buffer allocation is invalid, the entire packet is invalid. If a
defined buffer size exceeds the maximum value, an error occurs. However, no information is
lost.
♦
Whenever the printer accepts a memory configuration packet, it takes effect immediately,
causing a printer reset. Any information contained in the buffers is lost. Resend your formats,
batches, graphics, or fonts to the printer.
♦
When remapping the image buffer, make sure the length and width specified in the format
header are not too large for the current image buffer. For example, remapping for a
4 x 4 inch label and then printing a 4 x 6 inch label causes an error, until the format header is
changed or the image buffer is increased.
Memory Considerations w ith Dow nloaded TrueType Fonts
♦
The size of the TrueType font file, in bytes, is the minimum amount of memory that must be
available in the downloadable fonts buffer.
♦
The scalable (vector) fonts buffer is used to image the downloaded fonts (TrueType). To use
several downloaded TrueType fonts may require 100K or more in this buffer. The printer does
not print the fonts if there is not enough memory in the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.
♦
To use large point sizes (greater than 60 point), reconfigure memory to increase the size of
the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.
♦
Font storage is limited on the 9825 printer, because there is no extended memory available.
2-20 Packet Reference Manual
About Flash Memory
Items stored in flash memory are saved when the printer is turned off. Flash memory cannot be
reallocated.
Flash memory can contain formats, fonts, graphics, ADK scripts, and check digits. Store formats
in flash to use the printer offline (not connected to a host). When formats, graphics, and check
digits are saved in flash (a copy is automatically placed in RAM). Any of these packets saved in
flash cannot exceed the memory available in RAM. For this reason, we recommend only
storing fonts or ADK scripts in flash memory. (Fonts and ADK scripts saved in flash are not
copied into RAM.)
Before sending packets to flash memory, it must be formatted.
Formatting Flash Memory
Formatting flash memory is required once during initial printer setup. From the Main Menu,
select Setup, Flash Memory, then Format Flash. The process takes a few minutes.
Note:
When formatting flash memory, all packets (formats, fonts, graphics, etc.) stored in flash
memory are deleted and must be resent to the printer.
Checking Available Flash Memor y
To check the amount of available flash memory in the printer, from the Main Menu, Select Setup,
Flash Memory, then Unused Flash. The number (in bytes) of available flash memory is shown.
Divide this number by 1024 to get the number of available kilobytes and make sure the font or
ADK script files do not exceed this amount. For example, if your printer displays “Unused Flash
1048576,” there is 1024K (1 Meg) of available flash memory for fonts or ADK script files. If the
printer displays “Unused Flash 13631488,” the memory expansion option (approx. 13 Meg) is
installed.
Flash Memory Guidelines
Use these basic guidelines for storing files in the printer’s flash memory. The printer has volatile
RAM (packets deleted when the printer is off) and flash memory (packets saved when the printer
is off). Flash memory cannot be reallocated.
♦
Flash memory must be formatted before any packets can be saved. See “Formatting Flash
Memory” for more information.
♦
Formats, graphics, and check digits can be saved in flash (a copy is automatically placed in
RAM). Any of these packets saved in flash cannot exceed the memory available in RAM.
♦
Packets with the same number should not be added to flash memory. If two packets with the
same number are stored in flash, only the last packet sent can be used. For example, if you
send the following packets to flash memory, only the Textiles format can be used.
{F,10,A,F,E,300,200,"UPC" | }
{F,10,A,F,E,300,200,"Textiles" | }
♦
Fonts are stored differently in flash. For example, the 9825 printer has very limited flash font
memory and one TrueType font may exceed that limit. For TrueType or double-byte fonts, use
a 9855 printer with the memory expansion option.
♦
There is not a 1-to-1 ratio between the RAM memory (formats, graphics, and check digits) in
the printer and the memory in the PC. For example, a file that is 5K in W indows may require
15-20K to store in your printer.
♦
When using graphics, use the lowest-resolution graphic possible. If the printer uses a 203 dpi
printhead, the graphics resolution should be 150 to 200 dpi. In fact, 96 dpi may work. Try to
create the smallest file size possible.
Configuring the Printer 2-21
♦
Use temporary storage for graphics that are only used once or twice. However, for a logo that
is used on multiple formats, save the graphic in flash. Try to create the smallest file size
possible.
♦
Each line in a packet requires the same amount of memory. The smaller the format, the less
memory required to save it.
Clearing Packets from Memory
You may want to remove packets from the printer to increase memory storage capacity or if the
formats/fonts are no longer needed. In some cases, turning the printer off may clear the packets
from memory. If not, send a format clear packet.
Syntax
{header,packet#,action,device | }
1. header
2. packet#
3. action
4. device
Example
Identifies the packet. Options:
A Check Digit Scheme
F Format
G Graphic
W Font
Identification number of the packet to clear (1 to 999) or font number (0 to 9999).
0 is for all fonts (default).
Action. Enter C to clear the packet.
Storage device. R is the default. Options:
F Flash
R Volatile RAM
{F,1,C,R | }
Clears Format #1 from volatile RAM.
2-22 Packet Reference Manual
Using the Font Packet
Use a font packet to add or clear downloaded fonts from memory, upload the font buffer, or
upload the cell size information for a particular font. The font packet is useful when downloading
fonts. If using downloaded fonts, the font number and the number of bytes each downloaded font
uses is listed.
This packet does not list the number of bytes the standard printer fonts use.
Use the MONARCH® MPCL Toolbox Font Utility (available on our Web site) to create the font
header and data. Refer to the online help for more information.
Syntax
{W,font#,action,device,data_length,data_record | }
W1. W
W2. font#
W ritable Font Header.
The font identifier from 0 to 9999. 0 is for all fonts (default). 1 - 5 digits is the font
number.
Example: 3 is the standard printer font, Bold.
Action. Options:
A Adds the specified font.
C Clears all or specified fonts, except ones in flash.
H Uploads font size information.
M Uploads font memory usage information.
W3. action
Note: C does not clear (erase) fonts saved in the printer’s flash memory. To
erase ALL fonts from the printer’s flash memory, format flash.
W4. device
W5. data_length
W6. data_record
Example
Device. R is the default. Options:
F Flash
R Volatile RAM
Z All devices (use for upload).
The length of the font data. The range is 68 to 16384. This is optional.
If you are creating fonts, include the font data with this packet..
Multiple data records define the font. The first character is either an H (hex) or an
R (run-length), referring to the algorithm. The rest of the record is up to 2710
characters of font data in double quotes. Separate the algorithm and the data with
a comma, and end the record with |. This is optional.
{W,0,M,R | }
Selects all fonts and checks the memory usage in RAM. The printer returns the following to the
host:
{W,0,M,R |
Number of bytes free, Number of bytes used | }
Configuring the Printer 2-23
Example
{W,0,H,Z | }
Selects all fonts and uploads the font size information for any downloaded fonts.
The 9855 printer returns the following to the host:
{W,0,H,Z|
Font St yl e/Number
0,1,0,"Standard",0,0,0,14,22,14,22,3|
0,1,1,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0|
S ymbol Set
0,1,437,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0|
0,1,850,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0|
Font Name
0,10,0,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0|
0,10,1,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0|
Spacing
0,10,437,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0|
0,10,850,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0|
T yp e
0,2,0,"Reduced",0,0,0,7,14,7,14,1|
0,2,1,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0|
Baseline
0,2,437,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0|
0,2,850,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0|
CellW idth
0,11,0,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0|
0,11,1,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0|
Cell Height
0,11,437,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0|
0,11,850,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0|
0,3,0,"Bold",0,0,0,24,34,24,34,3|
0,4,0,"OCRA",0,0,0,13,24,13,24,3|
0,5,0,"HR1",0,0,0,12,20,12,20,2|
Nominal W idth
0,6,0,"HR2",0,0,0,10,16,10,16,1|
0,15,0,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0|
Nominal Height
0,15,1,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0|
0,15,437,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0|
0,15,850,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0|
Inter-Chara cter Gap
0,510,0,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0|
0,510,1,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0|
0,510,437,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,22,28,9,14,0|
0,510,850,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,22,28,9,14,0|
0,16,0,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0|
0,16,1,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0|
0,16,437,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0|
0,16,850,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0|
0,511,0,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0|
0,511,1,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0|
0,511,437,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,29,35,12,18,0|
0,511,850,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,29,35,12,18,0|
0,17,0,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0|
0,17,1,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0|
0,17,437,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0|
0,17,850,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0|
0,512,0,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0|
0,512,1,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0|
0,512,437,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0|
0,512,850,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0|
0,18,0,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0|
0,18,1,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0|
0,18,437,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0|
0,18,850,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0|
0,513,0,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0|
0,513,1,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0|
0,513,437,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,49,59,20,31,0|
2-24 Packet Reference Manual
0,513,850,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,49,59,20,31,0|
0,70,0,"Paxar15",1,0,7,32,42,22,42,0|
0,71,0,"Paxar18",1,0,9,34,51,27,51,0|
0,72,0,"Nafta15",1,0,6,32,42,32,41,0|
0,73,0,"Nafta18",1,0,8,48,51,46,50,0|
0,21,0,"ZIAFont",0,0,0,5,9,5,9,1 |
0,22,0,"ZIBFont",0,0,0,7,11,7,11,2 |
0,23,0,"ZICFont",0,0,0,10,18,10,18,2 |
0,24,0,"ZIDFont",0,0,0,10,18,10,18,2 |
0,25,0,"ZIEFont",0,0,0,15,28,15,28,5 |
0,26,0,"ZIFFont",0,0,0,13,26,13,26,3 |
0,27,0,"ZIGFont",0,0,0,40,60,40,60,8 |
0,50,0,"EffSwissBold",1,1,92248 |
0,56,0,"PaxSymbols",1,1,12260 | }
Note:
The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc.
Fonts 21-27 are only for the 9855 MLI™ printer.
Fonts 510, 511, 512, and 513 are the same as fonts 15, 16, 17, and 18.
Spacing
Monospaced (0) or proportional (1).
Type
Bitmapped (0) or scalable (1).
Baseline
Cell Width
Bottom of the font.
Horizontal number of dots to contain the widest character.
Cell Height
Vertical number of dots to contain the tallest character.
Nominal Width
Average width for lower-case letters.
Nominal Height
Inter-Character Gap
Average height for lower-case letters.
Default spacing between characters in monospaced fonts.
Printhead Density
Displays whether a 203 (0) dpi or 300 (1) dpi printhead is used. The
scalable font (font 50) does not display which printhead (203 dpi or
300 dpi) is used.
Uploading Format Header Information
Upload format header information from the formats in memory to check the supply length and
width for each format. Formats stored in flash memory are loaded into RAM when the 9855
printer boots. However, the formats remain in flash memory when you turn off the printer.
Syntax
Example
{header,format#,action,device | }
F1. header
F2. format#
Format Header
Format number from 0 to 999. 0 is for all formats in memory (default).
F3. action
Action. Options:
A Adds the specified format
C Clears the specified format
H Uploads format header information
F4. device
Device. Options:
F Flash
R Volatile RAM
Z All devices (use for upload)
{F,0,H,Z | }
Selects all formats in memory and returns the following:
Configuring the Printer 2-25
Example
{F,0,H,Z |
Fmt_1,406,406 |
Fmt_10,324,406 |
Fmt_15,812,812 |
Fmt_20,305,609 |
Fmt_25,1218,406 | }
Displays the format number, supply length and supply width (in dots) for each format in memory.
Example
{F,1,H,Z | }
Selects format1 and returns the following to the host:
{F,1,H,Z |
Fmt_1,406,406 | }
Displays the supply length and supply width (in dots) for format1.
Defining a Network Console Packet
Use the network console packet to send console commands directly to the network card via the
printer’s serial port. If the network card does not appear to be communicating with the printer,
you can use the network console packet to change the SSID, IP Address, etc. of the network
card.
Syntax
{N,number,action,device,"name" |
C,"con_comds" | }
N1.
N2.
N3.
N4.
N
number
action
device
Network Console Packet.
Number from 0 to 999 to identify the network console packet.
Action. Enter A to add a network console packet.
Storage device. Enter T to pass the packet through the printer and store the
packet in the network card.
N5. “name”
Packet name, 0 to 8 characters, enclose within quotation marks.
C1. C
Command field.
C2. “con_comds” Console commands. Must be enclosed within quotation marks. Each command
must be on a separate line. The maximum number of characters per command is
100. Refer to the list of c onsole commands in the MonarchNet2 Operating
Instructions for more information.
Note: The maximum number of commands per packet is twenty five (25).
Example
{N,1,A,T,"mystore" |
C,"set ip me static" |
C,"init" |
C,"exit" | }
Sends the network console packet 1 my store directly to the network card (T) and sets the IP
method to static for determining the IP Addresses. The Init and Exit commands must be used to
save changes and initialize the network card.
2-26 Packet Reference Manual
Defining a Verifier Configuration Packet
Use the verifier configuration packet to customize the verifier for each format. Select which bar
codes to scan, the acceptable ANSI grade levels, quiet zone, X-dimension range, etc.
Syntax
V,format#,action,device,"name" |
D,"vfr_comds" |
V1. V
V2. format#
Verifier Configuration Pac ket.
Number from 0 to 999 to identify the format number that corresponds to this
particular verifier configuration packet. Assign a verifier configuration packet to
any format even if the format number is not changed. See “Defining Verifier
Fields” in Chapter 3 for m ore information.
Note: Specify up to 50 different verifier configurations for the formats.
V3. action
Action. Enter A to add a verifier configuration.
V4. device
Storage device. Options:
F Flash. Stores the verifier configuration in the printer. Packets
stored in flash memory are saved when the power is turned off.
T Temporary. Passes the packet through the printer and stores the
packet in the verifier. Packets stored in temporary memory are lost
when the power is turned off.
Packet name, 0 to 8 characters, enclose within quotation marks. The name
entered here is shown as a custom configuration on the menu for MODE. Refer to
your verifier’s Operating Instructions (available on our W eb site) for more
information.
Non-Printable Text/Data Field.
Verifier commands. Must be enclosed within quotation marks. Refer to the SV
Series Operators Guide for the complete list of verifier commands.
V5. “name”
D1. D
D2. “vfr_comds ”
Example
V,1,A,T,"BEAMON" | D,"~LV02" |
The verifiers configuration packet ID is “1" and named “BEAMON." The verifier packet is added to
temporary memory. It uses Mode 2.
Configuring the Printer 2-27
Defining the RFID Setup Packet (9855 RFMP Printer Only)
This packet is only valid on 9855 RFMP printers. Use the RFID setup packet (X) to set the
protocol, write attempts, read power, write power, signal adjust, verify the programmed data,
retry printing, and check for multiple RFID inlays in the printer’s programmable RF field. RFID
hardware version 00000003 using version 8.0 or greater firmware includes retry print, and mutlitag check parameters.
Use the Monarch® RFID Printer Setup Utility to calculate the settings for your RFID supplies.
Note:
If using version 7.0 or earlier firmware with a Sirit RFID module, call Technical Support.
Syntax
{I,X,protocol,write_attem,read_power,write_power,signal_adjust,
verify_write,retry_print,RF_inly_pos,singulate, mult_tg_ck | }
X1.
X2.
X3.
X4.
X5.
X
protocol
write_attem
read_power
write_power
X6. signal_adj
RFID Setup Packet.
Select the UHF protocol. Use 0.
Number of times the interrogator tries to program the RFID tag. Use 3.
Not used – enter -7.
Amount of power to write/program an RFID tag. The range is -7 to 27. -7 is the
default.
The strength of the RF Field emitted by the printer’s antenna. Use 2.
X7. verify_write
The printer confirms the read data matches the programmed data after writing the
RFID. 0 is the default. Options:
0 Disabled. The printer does not verify the programmed data.
1 Enabled. The printer verifies the programmed value.
X8. retry_print
The printer tries to reprint and program a label where a supply error occurred.
The printer uses the same EPC data from the errored label on the next label. 0 is
the default. Options:
0 Enabled. The printer reprints and re-programs the EPC
data from a label when a supply error occurs.
1 Disabled. The printer does not reprint/re-program the EPC data.
Note: Retry_print must be used with incrementing batches. If disabled, the
printer does not reprint a label using the EPC data from the label with a
supply error. For example, printing a batch of 100 labels prints 99 labels
(or less) if a supply error occurs. If multiple 728 errors occur, disable
retry_print.
Example
X9. RF_inly_pos
X10. singulate
Not used – enter 0.
Not used – enter 0.
X11. mult_tg_ck
Before printing, the printer checks for more than one RFID tag within the
programmable RF Field’s range. 0 is the default. Options:
0 Check the first tag. The printer checks for multiple RFID
tags in the field.
1 Check each tag. The printer checks for multiple RFID tags in the field before
each tag in the batch.
{I,X,0,3,10,10,2,1,0,0,0,1 | }
This example is for hardware version 00000003 using version 8.0 or greater firmware. Uses the
default protocol (Class 1 Gen 2) and write attempts (3), sets the read and write power to 10, uses
the default signal adjustment (2), the printer verifies the read value matches the programmed
value, does not reprint a label if a supply error occurs, and checks for multiple RFID tags in the
programmable field before each tag is printed.
Example
{I,X,0,3,10,10,6 | }
Uses the default protocol (Class 1 Gen 2), sets the number of write attempts to 3, sets the read
and write power to 10 and the signal adjustment to 6.
2-28 Packet Reference Manual
DEFINING FIELDS
3
This chapter provides a reference for defining
♦
the format header
♦
text and constant text fields
♦
bar code fields
♦
line and box fields
♦
verifier fields
♦
RFID fields.
Defining the Format Header
A Format Header begins a format file.
Syntax
{F,format#,action,device,measure,length,width,"name" |
F1.
F2.
F3.
F4.
F
format#
action
device
F5. measure
Format Header.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify the format. 1 is the default.
Action. Enter A to add the format to the printer.
Format storage device. R is the default. Options:
F Flash (saved when the printer is turned off.) Format flash before
use. See “Formatting Flash” and “Flash Memory Guidelines” in
Chapter 2 for more information.
R Volatile RAM (deleted when the printer is turned off).
Unit of measure. G (dots) is the default. See the following table.
Printer
Unit of Measure
Length
Width
9825
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
50-1600
127-4064
102-3248
75-400
191-1016
152-812
9855 (203 dpi)
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
32-1600
81-4064
65-3248
75-400
191-1016
152-812
9855 (300 dpi)
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
32-1200
81-3048
96-3600
75-400
191-1016
225-1200
F6. length
Printable length of the supply in selected units. 600 is the default. Use the table
above for values.
Note: The length may require adjustment for RFID supplies. Refer to the RFID
Application Notes for more information.
You can create longer images if you reallocate memory to increase your
image buffer. See "Defining the Memory Packet" in Chapter 2 for more
information.
F7. width
F8. “name”
Example
Print width, from left to right, in selected units. 400 is the default. Use the table
above for values.
Format name (optional), 0 to 8 characters, enclose within quotation marks. “” is
the default. The range is 1 to 256 characters for the 9855 XML-enabled printer.
{F,1,A,R,E,300,200,"TEXTILES" |
Adds Format 1 (“TEXTILES”) to the printer. It uses a three inch long by two inch wide label.
Defining Fields 3-1
Defining Text Fields
Create a separate definition for each text field. If text falls on two lines, each line of text requires
a separate definition.
Syntax
T,field#,# of char,fix/var,row,column,gap,font,hgt mag,wid
mag,color,alignment,char rot,field rot,sym set |
T1.
T2.
T3.
T4.
T
field#
# of char
fix/var
T5. row
Text Field.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify this field. 1 is the default.
Maximum number of printed characters (0 to 2710) in the field. 30 is the default.
Fixed or variable length field. V is the default. Options:
F Fixed length
V Variable length
Row location – distance from the bottom of print area to the pivot point.
10 is the default. See the following table. For monospaced fonts, distance from
bottom of print area to the pivot point. The pivot point varies depending on how
text is justified.
For proportionally spaced fonts, distance from bottom of print area to baseline of
characters in field.
Printer
Unit of
Measure
9825
9855 (203 dpi)
9855 (300 dpi)
T6. column
3-2 Packet Reference Manual
Row or
End Row
Column or
End
Column
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-399
0-1013
0-810
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
Column location - distance from the left edge of the print
area to the pivot point to find the column location. 10 is
the default. Use the previous table for values.
T7. gap
Number of dots between characters in 203 dpi (or 300 dpi for 9855 printer).
Range: 0 to 99. 0 is the default.
Note: For monospaced fonts, the additional spacing is added to the existing
inter-character gap. This is also true for proportionally spaced fonts, but
remember that the inter-character gap varies with character combinations.
T8. font
T9. hgt mag
T10. wid mag
T11. color
Any number other than 0 or the default number affects the field width. Default
spacing:
Standard 3 dots
Reduced 1 dot
Bold
3 dots
OCRA-like
3 dots
CG Triumvirate™ Typefac e Bold varies with each letter
CG Triumvirate™ Typefac e
varies with each letter
Style of font. 1 is the default. Options:
1 Standard
10
CG Triumvirate™ Typefac e Bold
2 Reduced
11
CG Triumvirate™ Typefac e
3 Bold
15
7 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
4 OCRA-like
16
9 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
5 HR1
17
11 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
6 HR2
18
15 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
50
EFF Swiss Bold (TrueType® Scalable)
56
PaxarSymbols
Or a valid downloaded font selector number.
Fonts 5 and 6 are for numeric data only. The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces support
only the ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets. The scalable font
does not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic). See Appendix C for more information.
Height magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for scalable/downloaded TrueType
fonts). 1 is the default. Use a magnifier of 1 with proportionally spaced fonts,
because characters lose smoothness at higher magnifications. See Appendix B,
“Fonts,” for more information about fonts.
W idth magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for scalable/downloaded TrueType
fonts). 1 is the default. Proportionally spaced fonts do not have a set width. To
estimate the size of the field, use the letter “W ” for the widest field or an “L” for an
average width field. Find the selected font and the desired width in Appendix B,
“Fonts.”
Field color overlay attributes. B is the default.
Transparent
The overlay field (text or constant text) does not block
out (or “erase”) existing fields.
Opaque
The overlay field blocks out (or “erases”) existing fields.
Options for standard printer fonts:
B
Opaque, Normal, Black, Normal
D/R/W
Opaque, Normal, W hite, Normal
O
Transparent, Normal, Black, Normal
Options for scalable fonts:
A
Opaque, Normal, Black, Bold
B
Opaque, Normal, Black, Normal
E
Opaque, Italics, Black, Bold
F
Opaque, Italics, Black, Normal
N
Transparent, Normal, Black, Bold
O
Transparent, Normal, Black, Normal
S
Transparent, Italics, Black, Bold
T
Transparent, Italics, Black, Normal
Note: Solid black print should not exceed 30% on a given square inch of the
label, or the printhead life may be decreased.
Line field
blocked out
b y opaqu e
field using
attribu te B
Line field
not blocked
out b y
transp aren t
field using
attribu te O
Defining Fields 3-3
T12. alignment
Field placement in the packet is an important consideration when using field color
attributes. If a line field is defined before the overlay (text or constant text) field,
the line field is blocked out by the overlay field, depending on the overlay field’s
color attribute. If a line field is defined after the overlay field, the line field is not
blocked out by the overlay field, regardless of the overlay field’s color attribute.
Alignment of text in the field. L is the default. Options:
L Align on left side of field.
C Center text within field (monospaced fonts only)
R Align on right side of field (monospaced fonts only)
B Align at midpoint of field
E Align at endpoint of the field
Use L, B, or E for any font.
The red dot indicates the field origin and the line indicates the column position for
each field in the following graphic.
T13. char rot
Character rotation. 0 is the default. The field or supply does not rotate, only the
characters do. Options:
0 Top of character points to top of field
1 Top of character points to left of field
2 Top of character points to bottom of field
3 Top of character points to right of field
T14. field rot
Field rotation. 0 is the default. Field rotation rotates the whole field, not just the
characters. Rotation is affected by the pivot point, which varies depending on
how text is justified. Lower left corner of field is the pivot point. Options:
0 Top of field points to top of supply
1 Top of field points to left of supply
2 Top of field points to bottom of supply
3 Top of field points to right of supply
3-4 Packet Reference Manual
T15. sym set
Symbol set. Use 0 for the Internal Symbol Set.
For scalable or TrueType® fonts, use:
1
ANSI Symbol Set
100
Macintosh
101
W ingdings
102
Unicode (user input) for particular mapping
103
BIG5 (user input) for Unicode mapping
104
GB2312 (user input) for Unicode mapping
105
SJIS (user input) for Unicode mapping (CP 932, Japanese)
106
GB2312 (user input) for GB2312 mapping (CP 936, Simplified
Chinese)
107
BIG5 (user input) for BIG5 mapping (CP 950, Traditional Chinese)
110
Unicode UTF-8
437
DOS Code Page 437 (Domestic)
850
DOS Code Page 850 (International)
852
DOS Code Page 852 (Latin 2)
855
DOS Code Page 855 (Russian)
857
DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)
860
DOS Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese)
1250
Code Page 1250 (Latin 2)
1251
Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)
1252
Code Page 1252 (Latin 1)
1253
Code Page 1253 (Greek)
1254
Code Page 1254 (Turkish)
1255
Code Page 1255 (Hebrew)
1256
Code Page 1256 (Arabic)
1257
Code Page 1257 (Baltic)
1258
Code Page 1258 (Vietnam)
Note: The Standard, Reduced, Bold, OCRA and HR fonts only support the
Internal Symbol Set (0). The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces only support the
ANSI (1) and DOS Code Page 437 (2) and 850 (3) Symbol Sets. The
scalable font (font#50) does not support Code Page 1256 Arabic (10).
Code pages 852-860 and 1250-1258 are for downloaded TrueType fonts
or the scalable font. Code pages 102-110 require a downloaded
International TrueType font. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally
specific; therefore, all code pages may not be supported in a given font.
See Appendix C, “Symbol Sets/ Code Pages” for more information.
If using symbol set 110 (Unicode UTF-8), set the MPCL control characters
(start of header, etc.) to decimal values between 0 and 128; otherwise,
errors may occur with the Unicode data entered. See Chapter 2,
"Configuring the Printer" for more information about the MPCL control
characters.
Example
T,2,10,V,250,80,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 |
Defines a text field (field #2) with a variable length of up to 10 characters. The field begins at
row 250, column 80. There is no additional gap between characters, and the Standard font is
used without any additional magnification. The printing is black on white and centered. No field
or character rotation is used. The internal symbol set is used.
Defining Fields 3-5
Defining Bar Code Fields
Each bar code field requires a separate definition.
Syntax
B,field#,# of char,fix/var,row,column,font,density,height,
text,alignment,field rot,type,sep_height,segment |
B1. B
B2. field#
B3. # of char
Bar Code Field.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify this field. 1 is the default.
Maximum number of characters. If the bar code uses a check digit, allow an extra
character for the check digit. The actual maximum number of characters is limited
by the size of the label and bar code density. Range: 0 to 2710. 30 is the
default.
Bar Code
Number of Characters
Aztec
0 - 2710
Codabar (NW7)
0 – 2710
Code 16K
0 – 2710
Code 39 (w/ or w/o CD) or MOD43
0 – 2710
Code 93
0 – 2710
Code 128
0 – 2710
Data Matrix
0 – 2710 numeric
0 – 2335 alphanumeric
EAN8
EAN8+2
EAN8+5
EAN13
EAN13+2
EAN13+5
EAN13+Price CD
8
10
13
13
15
18
13
GS1 DataBar Bar Code Type (B13)
1 - GS1 DataBar 14
2 - GS1 DataBar 14 Truncated
3 - GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked
4 - GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked Omni
directional
5 - GS1 DataBar Limited
6 - GS1 DataBar Expanded
7 - UPCA
8 - UPCE
9 - EAN13
10 - EAN8
11 - UCC/EAN128 and CC A/B
12 - UCC/EAN128 and CC C
13
13
13
13
-
no
no
no
no
check
check
check
check
digit
digit
digit
digit
input
input
input
input
13 - no check digit input
*
11 - no check digit input
10 - no check digit input
12 - no check digit input
7 - no check digit input
If not enough characters are entered, the bar
code pads to the left with zeros. If too many
characters are entered, unpredictable results may
occur.
If FNC1 (function 1) is supported, use the pound sign (#) in the batch data to invoke it.
Refer to the GS1 General Specification for more information.
3-6 Packet Reference Manual
Bar Code
Number of Characters
Intelligent Mail
31
Refer to the USPS® Intelligent Mail® Specification for more information. This bar code is only
available on the 9855 printer using version 7.1 or greater firm ware.
Interleaved 2 of 5 or
Interleaved I 2 of 5 with Barrier Bar
0 - 2710
MaxiCode*
0 to 93 (alphanumeric)
0 to 128 (numeric)
MSI
0 – 14
PDF 417
0 – 2710
POSTNET™
9 or 11
Quick Response (QR) Code Data T ype
Model 1
Model 2
Numeric Data
1167
2710
Alphanumeric data
707
2710
8-byte data
486
2710
Kanji data
299
1817
Note:
The maximum number of characters depends on the selected level of error
correction. W hen increasing the error correction level, the maximum number of
characters decreases.
See “Entering Batch Data for QR Code” in Chapter 6 to enter data for the QR Code.
UPCA
12
UPCA+2
14
UPCA+5
17
UPCA+Price CD
12
UPCE
7
UPCE+2
9
UPCE+5
12
Note:
For more information about two-dimensional bar codes, see Appendix A, "Samples."
Defining Fields 3-7
B4. fix/var
*
Fixed (F) or variable (V) length field.
Bar Code
Fixed or Variable
Aztec*
Fixed or Variable
Codabar (NW7)
Fixed or Variable
Code 16K
Variable
Code 39 (w/ or w/o CD) or MOD43
Fixed or Variable
Code 93
Variable
Code 128
Fixed or Variable
Data Matrix*
Variable
EAN8
Fixed
EAN8+2
Fixed
EAN8+5
Fixed
EAN13
Fixed
EAN13+2
Fixed
EAN13+5
Fixed
EAN13+Price CD
Fixed
GS1 DataBar
Fixed or Variable
Intelligent Mail®*
Fixed
Interleaved 2 of 5 or
Interleaved I 2 of 5 with Barrier Bar
Fixed or Variable
MaxiCode*
Fixed or Variable
MSI
Fixed or Variable
PDF 417
Fixed or Variable
POSTNET™
Fixed
Quick Response*
Variable
UPCA
Fixed
UPCA+2
Fixed
UPCA+5
Fixed
UPCA+Price CD
Fixed
UPCE
Fixed
UPCE+2
Fixed
UPCE+5
Fixed
For more information about the two-dimensional bar codes, see Appendix A,
“Samples.”
3-8 Packet Reference Manual
B5. row
Row location - distance from bottom of the print area to the pivot point of the field.
The pivot point varies, depending on how the field is justified. 10 is the default.
See the following table. Pivot points:
Remember to include text or numbers that may appear with the bar code for the
row measurement.
Left/Cente r/Right-Jus tified Fields
Balanced Fields
Printer
Unit of
Measure
9825
9855 (203 dpi)
9855 (300 dpi)
B6. column
B7. font
B8. density
End-Justifi ed Fields
Row or
End Row
Column or
End
Column
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-399
0-1013
0-810
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
Column location - distance from the lower left edge
of the print area to the pivot point. 10 is the
default. Use the previous table for values.
Allow a minimum of 1/10 inch between the scan
edge of bar code and label edges or other data.
If using the optional verifier, allow a minimum of 1.3 inches
(33 mm) between the bar code and the top of the label.
See “Determining the Print Area” in Chapter 1 for more information.
Bar code. 4 is the default. Options:
1
UPCA
17
EAN13 +5
2
UPCE
22
POSTNET
3
Interleaved 2 of 5
23
Code 93
4
Code 39 (no cd)
24
Intelligent Mail (9855 printer version 7.1)
5
Codabar
31
Code 16K
6
EAN8
32
PDF417
7
EAN13
37
Aztec
8
Code 128
38
GS1 DataBar
9
MSI
40
Code 39 (MOD 43 cd)
10 UPCA +2
36
Quick Response
11 UPCA +5
33
MaxiCode
12 UPCE +2
35
Data Matrix (ECC-200)
13 UPCE +5
41
UPCA & Price CD
14 EAN8 +2
44
EAN13 & Price CD
15 EAN8 +5
50
Interleaved 2 of 5 with Barrier Bar
16 EAN13 +2
Bar code density. Use the following tables.
Defining Fields 3-9
203 DPI Bar Code Densities
Bar Code
Type
Density Density
Selector (% or cpi)
Narrow
Narrow to
Element
Wide
(dots/mils) Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance Char
Codes
Set
UPCA
+2/+5
Price CD
2
4
76%
114%
2/9.9
3/14.8
N/A
11 or 12
14/17
1, 5, 6, 7 or
8
0 to 9
UPCE+2/+5
2
4
76%
114%
2/9.9
3/14.8
N/A
6 or 7
9/12
1, 5, 6, 7 or
8
0 to 9
EAN8+2/+5
2
4
76%
114%
2/9.9
3/14.8
N/A
7 or 8
10/13
1, 5, 6, 7 or
8
0 to 9
EAN13+2/+
5
Price CD
2
4
76%
114%
2/9.9
3/14.8
N/A
12 or 13
15/18
1, 5, 6, 7 or
8
0 to 9
Interleaved
2 of 5or
I2of5with
Barrier Bar
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1.1
2.1
3.2
4.2
5.6
6.3
7.5
8.8
9.6
11.2
11.0
12.7
14.5
21/103.4
12/59.1
7/34.5
6/29.6
4/19.7
4/19.7
3/14.8
3/14.8
3/14.8
2/9.9
2/9.9
2/9.9
2/9.9
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.3
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
0 to 2710
8
0 to 9
(Code 39 or
MOD43
(Extended
Code 39)
1
2
3
4
6
7
11
12
20
1.4
1.7
3.5
4.2
6.3
7.0
3.9
12.7
3.0
10/49.3
8/39.4
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
2/9.9
4/19.7
1/4.9
5/24.6
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.2
0 to 2710
8
SPACE
$%*+-./
0 to 9
A to Z
Codabar
(NW 7)
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
2.1
3.0
4.6
5.1
8.4
9.2
10.1
8/39.4
6/29.6
4/19.7
4/19.7
2/9.9
2/9.9
2/9.9
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
0 to 26
8
$+-./
0 to 9
a to d
Code 128
or Code
16K
20
4
6
8
3.5/7.0
4.4/8.7
5.8/11.7
8.7/17.5
5/24.6
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
N/A
0 to 2710
8
00H to
7FH
Note: The start (*) and stop (+) characters are automatically added for Code 39.
Code 93, density 12, produces a one-dot narrow bar. This density is
intended for special U.S.P.S. ACT-tag applications only. Synthetic
supplies are recommended to produce scannable bar codes.
3-10 Packet Reference Manual
Bar Code
Type
Density
Selector
Density
Narrow
Narrow
(% or cpi) Element
to Wide
(dots/mils) Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance Char
Codes
Set
CODE 93
3
4
5
7
10
3.7
4.5
5.6
7.5
11.2
6/29.6
5/24.6
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
N/A
0 to
2710
8
00H to7FH
MSI
4
5
7
4.2
5.6
7.2
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
1:2.0
1:2.0
1:2.5
0 to 14
8
0 to 9
POSTNET 0 (fixed at 24/118.2
4.3 cpi)
10/49.3
4/19.7
(5 dot
gap)
0,5,6,9
or 11
8
0 to 9
Intelligent
Mail
0 (fixed at 24/118.2
4.3 cpi)
10/49.3
4/19.7
(5 dot
gap)
0,5,6,9
or 11
8
0 to 9
MaxiCode
7
N/A
N/A
N/A
99
8
00H to
FFH
Bar Code
Type
Density
Selector
Element
Row
Aspect
Width
Height
Ratio
(dot/mils) (dots/mils)
Data
Length
Appearance Char Set
Codes
PDF417
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2/9.8
2/9.8
2/9.8
3/14.8
3/14.8
3/14.8
4/19.7
4/19.7
4/19.7
0 to
2709
8
2/9.8
4/19.7
6/29.6
3/14.8
6/29.6
9/44.3
4/19.7
8/39.4
12/59.1
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
00H toFFH
203/300 DPI Bar Code Densities
Bar Code Type
Density
Selector
Data Length
Quick Response
(QR Code) Models 1
and 2
0
Model 1: 0 - 1167 Numeric;0 - 707 Alphanumeric; 0 - 486 (8-bit);
0 - 299 (Kanji)
Model 2: 0 - 2710 Numeric, Alphanumeric and 8-bit; 0 - 1817 Kanji
Note: Values in bold indicate the default.
Defining Fields 3-11
203/300 DPI Bar Code Densities
Bar Code
Size
Row x Col.
Density
Selector
Max. Data Length
Num. X Alphanum.
Appearance
Codes
Char
Set
Data Matrix
Square
symbols
10 x 10
12 x 12
14 x 14
16 x 16
18 x 18
20 x 20
22 x 22
24 x 24
26 x 26
32 x 32
36 x 36
40 x 40
44 x 44
48 x 48
52 x 52
64 x 64
72 x 72
80 x 80
88 x 88
96 x 96
104 x 104
120 x 120
132 x 132
144 x 144
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
6 x 3
10 x 6
16 x 10
24 x 16
36 x 25
44 x 31
60 x 43
72 x 52
88 x 64
124 x 91
172 x 127
228 x 169
288 x 214
348 x 259
408 x 304
560 x 418
736 x 550
912 x 682
1152 x 862
1392 x 1042
1632 x 1222
2100 x 1573
2608 x 1954
2710 x 2335
8
OOH to FFH
0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)
Bar Code
Size
Row x Col.
Density
Selector
Max. Data Length
Num. X Alphanum.
Appearance
Codes
Char
Set
Data Matrix
Rectangular
symbols
8 x 18
8 x 32
12 x 26
12 x 36
16 x 36
16 x 48
25
26
27
28
29
30
10
20
32
44
64
98
8
00H to FFH
x
x
x
x
x
x
6
13
22
31
46
72
0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)
Note: The printers support printing a Data Matrix symbol with an X-dimension of
13 mils or greater (3 dots @203 dpi). Ifusing a denser bar code, make
sure the bar code scans in that particular application. Our “premium”
supplies and increasing the print contrast are recommended for denser
bar codes. Depending on your application, additional densities are
available.
3-12 Packet Reference Manual
203 DPI Bar Code Densities
Bar Code T ype
Density
Selector
Narrow Element
(dots/mils)
Data Length
Char Set
GS1 DataBar
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2/9.9
3/14.8
4/19.7
5/24.6
6/29.6
7/34.5
8/39.4
0 to 2710
00H to FFH
Aztec
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0.0099
0.0148
0.0197
0.0247
0.0296
0.0345
0.0394
0.0444
0.0493
0.0542
0.0592
0.0641
0.0690
0.0740
0 to 2710
00H to FFH
Note: Values in bold indicate the default.
Defining Fields 3-13
300 DPI Bar Code Densities
Bar Code
Type
Density
Selector
Density
(% or cpi)
Narrow
Element
(dots/mils)
Narrow to
Wide Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Char
Set
UPCA +2/+5
Price CD
2
4
77%
103%
3/10
4/13.3
N/A
11 or 12
14/17
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8
0 to 9
UPCE+2/+5
2
4
77%
103%
3/10
4/13.3
N/A
6 or 7
9/12
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8
0 to 9
EAN8+2/+5
2
4
77%
103%
3/10
4/13.3
N/A
7 or 8
10/13
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8
0 to 9
EAN13+2/+5
Price CD
2
4
77%
103%
3/10
4/13.3
N/A
12 or 13
15/18
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8
0 to 9
Interleaved2
of 5 or I2of5
with Barrier
Bar
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1.1
2.1
3.3
4.2
5.6
6.2
8.3
9.4
9.9
11.1
11.1
13.0
14.3
31/103.4
18/60.1
10/33.4
9/30.0
6/20.0
6/20.0
4/13.3
4/13.3
4/13.3
3/10
3/10
3/10
3/10
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.4
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.3
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.3
1:2.0
0 to 2710
8
0 to 9
(Code 39 or
MOD43
(Extended
Code 39)
1
2
3
4
6
7
11
12
20
1.4
1.7
3.4
4.7
6.2
7.1
3.8
11.5
3.1
15/50.0
12/40.0
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
3/10.0
6/20.0
2/6.7
7/23.4
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.2
0 to 2710
8
SPACE$%*
+-./
0 to 9
A to Z
Codabar
(NW7)
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
2.3
3.4
5.0
5.6
9.1
10.4
11.1
12/40.0
9/30.0
6/20.0
6/20.0
3/10.0
3/10.0
3/10.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
0 to 26
8
$+-./
0 to 9
a to d
Code 128 or
Code 16K
4
6
8
20
4.5
6.8
9.1
3.9
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
7/23.4
N/A
0 to 2710
8
00H to 7FH
Note: The start (*) and stop (+) characters are automatically added for Code 39.
Code 93, density 12, produces a one-dot narrow bar. This density is
intended for special U.S.P.S. ACT-tag applications only. Synthetic
supplies are recommended to produce scannable bar codes.
3-14 Packet Reference Manual
300 DPI Bar Code Densities
Bar Code
Type
Density
Selector
Density
Narrow
Narrow to
(% or cpi) Element
Wide Ratio
(dots/mils)
Data
Length
Appearance Char Set
Codes
CODE 93
3
4
5
7
10
3.7
4.8
5.6
8.3
11.1
9/30.0
7/23.4
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
N/A
0 to 2710
8
00H to 7FH
MSI
4
5
7
4.2
6.2
7.5
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
1:2.0
1:2.0
1:2.3
0 to 2710
8
0 to 9
POSTNET 0 (fixed at 24/118.2
4.3 cpi)
10/49.3
6/20.0
(5 dot gap)
0, 5, 6, 9
or 11
8
0 to 9
Intelligent 0 (fixed at 24/118.2
4.3 cpi)
Mail
10/49.3
4/19.7
(5 dot gap)
0,5,6,9 or
11
8
0 to 9
MaxiCode 7
N/A
N/A
N/A
99
8
00H to FFH
Bar Code
Type
Density
Selector
Element
Row
Aspect
Width
Height
Ratio
(dot/mils) (dots/mils)
Data
Length
Appearance Char Set
Codes
PDF417
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3/10.0
3/10.0
3/10.0
4/13.3
4/13.3
4/13.3
6/20.0
6/20.0
6/20.0
0 to 2709
8
3/10.0
6/20.0
9/30.0
4/13.3
9/30.0
12/40.0
6/20.0
12/40.0
18/60.0
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
00H to FFH
300 DPI Bar Code Densities
Bar Code T ype
Density
Selector
Narrow Element
(dots/mils)
Data Length
Char Set
GS1 DataBar
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3/9.8
4/13.1
5/16.4
7/23
8/26.2
10/32.8
11/36.1
0 to 2710
00H to FFH
Aztec
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0.0100
0.0133
0.0167
0.0233
0.0266
0.0333
0.0366
0.0433
0.0466
0.0533
0.0566
0.0633
0.0666
0.0733
0 to 2710
00H to FFH
Note: Values in bold indicate the default.
Defining Fields 3-15
B9. height
Bar code
English
Metric
203 Dots
300 Dots
height, in 1/100 inches, 1/10 mm, or dots. Minimum values:
19
48
38
57
Height
Bar Code T ype
Description
0
Aztec
Intelligent Mail
PDF 417
PostNet
MaxiCode
These bar codes have a fixed height. Use 0.
0
Data Matrix
QR Code
The printer determines the size of the symbol, but the user’s scanner
determines the functional size (minimum height) of the symbol.
Small Data Matrix and QR Codes may not be scannable. The Data
Matrix and QR Code’s height depends on the number entered for this
parameter. For example, 80 means the symbol could be smaller than
0.80," but it will not be greater than the amount specified in this
parameter. The symbol arranges the data according to rows and
columns within the specified height.
0
GS1 DataBar
This height is only for the linear bar code used with UCC/EAN family
types listed in B13. Use 0 for all other GS1 DataBar types.
20
Code 93
20 is the default for Code 93.
40
UPCA/UPCE/EAN
I 2of5
Codabar
Code 39
Code 128
MSI
40 is the default for UPCA/UPCE/EAN, I 2of5, Codabar, Code 39,
Code 128, and MSI.
B10. text
Appearance of text with bar code. Options:
Appear.
Bar Code T ype
Description
0
MaxiCode
QR Code
MaxiCode Mode 0 (obsolete)
QR Code Model 2
1
UPC/EAN
QR Code
No check digit or number system
QR Code Model 1
2
MaxiCode
QR Code
MaxiCode Mode 2 (Numeric Postal Code)
QR Code Model 2
3
MaxiCode
MaxiCode Mode 3 (Alphanumeric Postal Code)
5
UPC/EAN
Number system at bottom, no check digit
6
UPC/EAN
Check digit at bottom, no number system
7
UPC/EAN
Check digit and number system at bottom (default)
8
MaxiCode
All other bar
codes
MaxiCode (auto detect modes 0, 2, 3, or for compressed data)
default
No text, bar code only (default)
3-16 Packet Reference Manual
B11. alignment
Choose L, R, C, B or E to align the bar code data correctly in the field. L is the
default.
Alignment
Bar Code T ype
Description
L
All
Aztec, Data Matrix,
GS1 DataBar, Intelligent Mail,
MaxiCode,
QR Code (Quick Respons e)
Align on left side of field.
Must use L for these bar codes.
C
Code 39, Codabar, I 2of5,
MSI
Center within field.
R
Code 39, Codabar, I 2of5,
MSI
Align on right side of field.
B
All except where noted.
Align at midpoint of field; centers variable width bar
codes, which may not allow pad-character
centering.
E
All except where noted.
Align at endpoint of the field; right justifies
variable-width bar codes.
The red dot indicates the field origin and the line indicates the column position for
each field in the following graphic.
Defining Fields 3-17
B12. field rot
Field rotation. Field rotation rotates the whole field, not just the characters.
Rotation is affected by the pivot point, which varies depending on how text is
justified. Lower left corner of field is the pivot point. Options:
0 Top of field points to top of supply (use for MaxiCode)
1 Top of field points to left of supply
2 Top of field points to bottom of supply
3 Top of field points to right of supply
Note: Serial bar codes with an 8-dot narrow element do not automatically print at
2.5 IPS. Serial bar codes printed at speeds greater than 2.5 IPS may not
scan properly.
B13. type
B14. sep_height
B15. segment
Example
Select from the bar code family. This parameter only applies to the GS1 DataBar
bar code. 1 is the default. For other bar codes, do not include this parameter.
Options:
1 GS1 DataBar 14 (default)
2 GS1 DataBar 14 Truncated
3 GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked
4 GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked Omni directional
5 GS1 DataBar Limited
6 GS1 DataBar Expanded
7 UPCA
8 UPCE
9 EAN13
10 EAN8
11 UCC/EAN128 and CC A/B
12 UCC/EAN128 and CC C
Height of the separator between the linear bar code and 2D bar code. This
parameter only applies to the GS1 DataBar bar code. For other bar codes, do not
include this parameter. The value is 1 or 2. 1 is the default.
W idth of the segment. This parameter only applies to the GS1 DataBar bar code.
For other bar codes, do not include this parameter. The range is even numbers
from 2 to 22. 22 is the default.
B,3,12,V,50,40,1,2,80,7,L,0 |
Defines a bar code field (field #3) with 12 characters of variable length starting at row 150,
column 40. A UPCA bar code with a density of 2 and a height of 80 is used. The check digit and
number system are shown at the bottom. The bar code is left aligned without any field rotation.
Example
B,1,30,V,5,5,38,4,0,0,L,0,1,2,22 |
Defines a bar code field (field #3) with up to 30 characters of variable length starting at row 5,
column 5. The GS1 DataBar uses a density of 4. No text is shown with the bar code. The bar
code is left-aligned with no field rotation.
3-18 Packet Reference Manual
Defining Non-Printable Text Fields
Non-printable text fields hold entered data without printing it in its entered form. Typically, nonprintable fields hold data that later combines with other fields to form a merged field. Define nonprintable text fields before defining the field where the information prints.
When copying this field into another field, the maximum number of characters for the final field is
2710. Allow only as many characters as needed, because extra characters use up space. Also,
if copying into a bar code field, the maximum number of characters in the destination bar code is
determined by the bar code specification (UPCA-12, EAN-13, etc.). Apply field options to
manipulate the text entered in this field. Copying data from this field into another field is an
example. See “Using Option 4 Copy Data” in Chapter 4 for more information.
In the following example, data is entered into four non-printable fields and merged to form field 5,
and is then printed as a bar code. See “Merging Fields” in Chapter 4 for more information.
Field
1
2
3
4
5
Data
20374
339
8
15
20374339815
Field Type
Non-printable
Non-printable
Non-printable
Non-printable
Bar Code
Each non-printable text field requires a separate definition.
Syntax
D,field#,# of char |
D1. D
D2. field#
D3. # of char
Example
Non-Printable Text Field.
Unique number from 0 to 999 assigned to this field. 1 is the default.
Maximum number of characters in this field: 0 to 2710. 30 is the default.
D,4,20 |
Defines a non-printable text field (field #4) with a maximum of 20 characters.
Defining Fields 3-19
Defining Constant Text Fields
A constant text field is a set of fixed characters that prints on all labels. Define each constant
text field separately. This field is not assigned a field number, but is counted as a field (keep this
in mind, as the printer allows a maximum of 1000 fields per format). The characters in this field
cannot be changed by batch data. Field options do not apply to constant text fields. Mark the
pivot point of the field, which varies depending on the fields’ justification.
Syntax
C,row,column,gap,font,hgt mag,wid mag,color,alignment,
char rot,field rot,"fixed char",sym set |
C1. C
C2. row
Constant Text Field.
Row location – distance from the bottom of print area to
the pivot point. 10 is the default. See the following
table.
For monospaced fonts, distance from bottom of print
area to the pivot point.
For proportionally spaced fonts, distance from bottom of
print area to baseline of characters in the field. (Bottom
exits the printer first.)
Printer
Unit of
Measure
9825
9855 (203 dpi)
9855 (300 dpi)
C3. column
C4. gap
C5. font
C6. hgt mag
3-20 Packet Reference Manual
Row or
End Row
Column or
End
Column
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-399
0-1013
0-810
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
Column location - distance from the left edge of the print area to the pivot point to
find the column location. 10 is the default. Use the previous table for values.
Number of dots between characters (203 dots per inch). Range: 0 to 99. 0 is the
default.
Any number other than 0 or the default number affects the field width. Default
spacing:
Standard
3 dots
Reduced
1 dot
Bold
3 dots
OCRA-like
3 dots
CG Triumvirate™ Typefac e Bold varies with each letter
CG Triumvirate™ Typefac e
varies with each letter
Style of font. 1 is the default. Options:
1 Standard
10 CG Triumvirate™ Typefac e Bold
2 Reduced
11 CG Triumvirate™ Typefac e
3 Bold
15 7 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
4 OCRA-like
16 9 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
5 HR1
17 11 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
6 HR2
18 15 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
50 EFF Swiss Bold (TrueType® Scalable)
56 PaxarSymbols
Or a valid downloaded font selector number.
Fonts 5 and 6 are for numeric data only. The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces support
only the ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets. The scalable font
does not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic). See Appendix C for more information.
Height magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for scalable/downloaded TrueType
fonts). 1 is the default. Use a magnifier of 1 with proportionally spaced fonts,
because characters lose smoothness at higher magnifications. See Appendix B,
“Fonts,” for more information about fonts.
C7. wid mag
C8. color
W idth magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for scalable/downloaded TrueType
fonts). 1 is the default. Proportionally spaced fonts do not have a set width. To
estimate the size of the field, use the letter “W ” for the widest field or an “L” for an
average width field. Find the selected font and the desired width in Appendix B,
“Fonts,”
There are two types of field color overlay attributes :
Transparent The overlay field (text or constant text) does not block out
(or “erase”) existing fields.
Opaque
The overlay field blocks out (or “erases”) existing fields.
Options for standard printer fonts:
B
Opaque, Normal, Black, Normal (default)
D/R/W Opaque, Normal, W hite, Norma
O
Transparent, Normal, Black, Normal
Options
A
B
E
F
N
O
S
T
for scalable fonts:
Opaque, Normal, Black, Bold
Opaque, Normal, Black, Normal
Opaque, Italics, Black, Bold
Opaque, Italics, Black, Normal
Transparent, Normal, Black, Bold
Transparent, Normal, Black, Normal
Transparent, Italics, Black, Bold
Transparent, Italics, Black, Normal
Note: Solid black print should not exceed 30% on a given square inch of the
label, or the printhead life may be decreased.
Line field
blocked out
b y opaqu e
field using
attribu te B
Line field
not blocked
out b y
transp aren t
field using
attribu te O
Field placement in the packet is an important consideration when using field color
attributes. If a line field is defined before the overlay (text or constant text) field,
the line field is blocked out by the overlay field, depending on the overlay field’s
color attribute. If a line field is defined after the overlay field, the line field is not
blocked out by the overlay field, regardless of the overlay field’s color attribute.
Defining Fields 3-21
C9. alignment
Alignment of constant text in the field. L is the default. Options:
L Align on left side of field
C Center text within field (monospaced fonts only)
R Align on right side of field (monospaced fonts only)
B Align at midpoint of field
E Align at endpoint of the field
Use L, B, or E for any font.
The red dot indicates the field origin and the line indicates the column position for
each field in the following graphic.
C10. char rot
Character rotation. 0 is the default. The field or supply does not rotate, only the
characters do. Options:
0 Top of character points to top of field
1 Top of character points to left of field
2 Top of character points to bottom of field
3 Top of character points to right of field
C11. field rot
Field rotation. 0 is the default. Field rotation rotates the whole field, not just the
characters. Rotation is affected by the pivot point, which varies depending on
how text is justified. Lower left corner of field is the pivot point. Options:
0 Top of field points to top of supply
1 Top of field points to left of supply
2 Top of field points to bottom of supply
3 Top of field points to right of supply
3-22 Packet Reference Manual
C12. “fixed char” Fixed characters to appear in the field. Maximum 2710 characters.
“” is the default. Enclose in quotation marks.
C13. sym set
Symbol set. Use 0 for the Internal Symbol Set. 0 is the default.
For scalable or TrueType® fonts, use:
1
ANSI Symbol Set
100
Macintosh
101
W ingdings
102
Unicode (user input) for particular mapping
103
BIG5 (user input) for Unicode mapping
104
GB2312 (user input) for Unicode mapping
105
SJIS (user input) for Unicode mapping (CP 932, Japanese)
106
GB2312 (user input) for GB2312 mapping (CP 936, Simplified
Chinese)
107
BIG5 (user input) for BIG5 mapping (CP 950, Traditional
Chinese)
110
Unicode UTF-8
437
DOS Code Page 437 (Domestic)
850
DOS Code Page 850 (International)
852
DOS Code Page 852 (Latin 2)
855
DOS Code Page 855 (Russian)
857
DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)
860
DOS Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese)
1250
Code Page 1250 (Latin 2)
1251
Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)
1252
Code Page 1252 (Latin 1)
1253
Code Page 1253 (Greek)
1254
Code Page 1254 (Turkish)
1255
Code Page 1255 (Hebrew)
1256
Code Page 1256 (Arabic)
1257
Code Page 1257 (Baltic)
1258
Code Page 1258 (Vietnam)
Note: The Standard, Reduced, Bold, OCRA and HR fonts only support the
Internal Symbol Set (0). The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces only support the
ANSI (1) and DOS Code Page 437 (2) and 850 (3) Symbol Sets. The
scalable font (font#50) does not support Code Page 1256 Arabic (10).
Code pages 852-860 and
1250-1258 are for downloaded TrueType fonts or the scalable font. Code
pages 102-110 require a downloaded International TrueType font.
TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all code
pages may not be supported in a given font. See Appendix C, “Symbol
Sets/ Code Pages” for more information.
If using symbol set 110 (Unicode UTF-8), set the MPCL control characters
(start of header, etc.) to decimal values between 0 and 128; otherwise,
errors may occur with the Unicode data entered. See Chapter 2,
"Configuring the Printer" for more information about the MPCL control
characters.
Example
C,30,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MADE IN USA",0 |
Defines a constant text field starting at row 30, column 10. It does not have any additional intercharacter gap. The Standard font is used without any additional magnification. The printing is
black on white and left justified. No field or character rotation is used. “MADE IN USA” is printed
in this field. The internal symbol set is used.
Defining Fields 3-23
Defining Line Fields
Use lines to form borders and mark out original prices. Define each line separately. This field is
not assigned a field number, but is counted as a field (keep this in mind, as the printer allows a
maximum of 1000 fields per format). Define any line length and a thickness up to 99 dots, as
long as the solid black print does not exceed 30 percent of any given square inch of the label.
Line Types
Create horizontal and vertical lines. There are two ways to define lines.
Segments
Select the starting point and ending point.
Vectors
Select the starting point, the angle, and the length of the line.
Syntax
L,type,row,column,angle/end row,length/end col,thickness,
"pattern" |
L1. L
L2. type
L3. row
Line Field.
Type of line. Only vertical and horizontal lines are supported. S is the default.
Options:
S Segment. Select the starting point and ending point.
V Vector. Select the starting point, angle, and length.
Row location - distance from bottom of print area to the starting point. 10 is the
default. See the following table.
Printer
Unit of
Measure
Row or
End Row
Column or
End Column
9825
9855 (203 dpi)
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-399
0-1013
0-810
9855 (300 dpi)
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
L4. column
Column location - distance from left edge of the
print area to line origin. 10 is the default.
Use the previous table for values.
L5. angle
/end row
If Using Segments:
Row location of ending point. Measure from
bottom of print area. On horizontal lines, this
value must match item L3. 100 is the default.
If Using Vectors:
Angle of line. Options: 0, 90, 180, or 270.
0 is the default.
L6. length/ end
col
If Using Segments:
Column location of end point. Measure from
left edge of print area. On vertical lines, this
value must match parameter L4. 100 is the
default.
If Using Vectors:
Length of the line in selected units. 10 is the
default.
3-24 Packet Reference Manual
Example
L7. thickness
Using the chart below for reference, write the line thickness (1 to 99) in box L7. 2
is the default. Line thickness fills upward on horizontal lines, or to the right on
vertical lines. Measured in dots.
L8. “pattern”
Line pattern. Enter "".
L,S,110,30,110,150,10,"" |
Defines a horizontal line field as a segment starting at row 110, column 30 and ending at row
110, column 150. The line thickness is 10 dots.
Defining Fields 3-25
Defining Box Fields
Use boxes to form borders or highlight items of interest. Define each box field separately. This
field is not assigned a field number, but is counted as a field (keep this in mind, as the printer
allows a maximum of 1000 fields per format). Define any line length and a thickness up to 99
dots, as long as the solid black print does not exceed 30 percent of any given square inch of the
label.
Syntax
Q,row,column,end row,end col,thickness,"pattern" |
Q1. Q
Q2. row
Box (Quadrilateral) Field.
Row location - distance from bottom of print area to
lower left corner of box.
10 is the default. See the following table.
Printer
Unit of
Measure
Row or
End Row
Column or
End
Column
9825
9855 (203 dpi)
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-399
0-1013
0-810
9855 (300 dpi)
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
Q3. column
Column location - distance from left edge of print area to
lower left corner of box. 10 is the default. Use the
previous table for values.
Q4. end row
Distance from bottom of print area to upper right corner
of box. 100 is the default. Use the previous table for
values.
Q5. end col
Distance from left edge of print area to upper right corner
of box. 100 is the default. Use the previous table for
values. Ranges same as column.
3-26 Packet Reference Manual
Example
Q6. thickness
Using the chart below for reference, write the desired line thickness
(1 to 99) in box Q6. 2 is the default. Boxes fill inward, so make sure boxes do
not overwrite other fields. Measured in dots.
Q7. “pattern”
Line pattern. Enter "".
Q,240,30,270,150,3,"" |
Defines a box field starting at row 240, column 30. It ends at row 270, column 150. It has a
thickness of 3 dots.
Defining Verifier Fields
The verifier field in a format references the verifier configuration packet ID to use for this
particular format. Every format can have a specific verifier configuration packet. See “Defining a
Verifier Configuration Packet,” in Chapter 2 for more information.
If a particular verifier configuration packet is not specified, the last sent verifier configuration
packet is used.
Note:
Include the verifier field after the format header in the format packet.
Syntax
V,vfrID |
V1. V
V2. vfrID
Example
Verifier Field.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify the verifier configuration packet to use
with this format.
{F,25,A,R,M,508,508,"FMT-25" |
V,3 |
B,1,12,F,110,115,1,2,120,5,L,0 |}
Specifies verifier configuration packet #3 starting with format 25 until another verifier
configuration packet is specified.
Defining Fields 3-27
Defining the RFID Data Field (9855 RFID Printer Only)
The RFID Data Field contains the information you want programmed into the RFID tag. The
syntax of the RFID Data Field is similar to the standard non-printable text field format. RFID is
only supported on the 9855 printer.
Printing over the RFID tag (or transponder) causes printing irregularity.
Note:
If using version 7.0 or earlier firmware with a Sirit RFID module, call Technical Support.
Syntax
X,field#,# of char,data_type |
X1. X
X2. field#
X3. # of char
RFID Data Field.
Unique number from 0 to 999 assigned to this field. 1 is the default.
This number must be equal to or greater than the total number of characters in the
RFID Data Field. Range: 0 to 2710. 30 is the default. The amount varies
according to your RFID data, protocol, and module type. For example, C1Gen2
can be up to 496 bits, plus the access password, lock code, etc.
Note: An error 715 occurs if the printer does not receive the correct amount of
data. Pad data to ensure the correct amount of bits. See “Using Option
30,” in Chapter 4 for more information.
X4. data_type
Data type. Use 0 (ASCII Hex - ASCII representation of Hex), which uses
characters A to F and 0 to 9. For example, the letter A in ASCII Hex has a value
of 41 and is represented in MPCL batch data as “414141414141414141414141".
Note: Do not use the ASCII file separator character (1C) in RFID batch data.
Example
X,5,24,0 |
Defines an RFID Data Field (field #5) with exactly 24 ASCII Hex characters for a 96-bit RFID tag.
3-28 Packet Reference Manual
DEFINING FIELD OPTIONS
4
This chapter provides a reference for defining
♦
field options in formats
♦
check digit packets.
Note: When using multiple options on the printer, options are processed in the order they are
received.
Applying Field Options
Field options further define text, bar code, and non-printable text fields. The text, constant text,
or bar code field must be previously defined before applying any field option to it.
Note:
Define field options immediately after the field to which they apply.
Combining Field Options
Multiple options can be used with most fields. Options can be used in any combination except as
noted with each definition. Options are processed in the order they are received.
For example, use Option 4 to copy data from another field, and then use Option 30 to pad the
field. When using multiple options for the same field, place the options in the order to apply them
in the format.
Restrictions
Some options cannot be used together. For example, incrementing (Option 60) and price field
(Option 42) options cannot be applied to the same field. See each Option’s section for specific
combinations to avoid.
Option 4 (copy a field) is the only option that can be repeated for a single field.
Syntax
R,option#,parameter...parameter |
R1. R
R2. option#
Indicates field option header.
Option number:
1
Define fixed characters
2
Data type restrictions
3
Data entry template
4
Copy data from previous field
5
Define data entry sources
6
Upload field data
20 Define data entry prompts
21 Define extended field names (XML-enabled printer)
30 Pad data to left or right with specified character
31 Generate check digit
42 Format as a price field
50 Define bar code densities
51 Define security and trunc ation of PDF417 bar codes
52 Define width or length of PDF417 bar codes
53 Define optional settings for Aztec bar codes
60 Define incrementing or decrementing field
61 Reimage fields
62 Do not scan/verify a particular bar code
64 Program the AFI Field for UHF RFID tags
R3. parameter(s) Varies per option. See the following option descriptions.
Defining Field Options 4-1
Using Option 1 (Fixed Data)
Fixed data is information (a company name or store number) to print on all labels. Define fixed
characters for an entire field or for part of a field.
Syntax
R,1,"fixed char" |
R1. R
R2. 1
R3. “fixed char”
Option Header.
Option 1.
Characters to insert. Enclose in quotation marks. If defining fixed characters for
part of a field, place underscores(_) in non-fixed positions. Any spaces in the
phrase are fixed characters. Range: 0 to 2710.
Note: Underscore characters are stripped out and the data is compressed if no
data is supplied by the batch and the field length is variable.
Example
R,1,"_ _ _%$_ _ _ _ _" |
Uses fixed characters (%$) in positions 4 and 5. The other positions are variable.
Example
R,1,"MONARCH" |
“MONARCH” appears as a fixed field in this example.
To fill in the non-fixed portion of the field, see “Defining Batch Data Fields” in Chapter 6. As an
alternative, apply Option 4 to copy data into the non-fixed character positions.
Using Option 2 (Data Type Restrictions)
This option restricts the data type for a particular field. You can use Options 2 or 3 only once per
field. Do not use with Option 3 (Data Entry Templates). If batch data is entered in the batch
packet, do not apply Options 2 and 3. Only use these options for offline batch entry.
Note:
Option 2 is only available on the 9855 printer. Use the Monarch® 939™ keyboard for
offline data entry. We do not recommend entering more than 100 characters in offline
mode.
Syntax
R,2,char_code |
R1. R
R2. 2
R3. char code
Option Header.
Option 2.
Character type for the field. 1 is the default. Options:
1 Numeric only (0..9)
2 Letters only (A..Z,a..z)
3 Symbols only (printable characters other than letters or numbers)
4 Letters and numbers only
5 Numbers and symbols only
6 Letters and symbols only
Spaces are permitted in all categories. Use a combination of any two (letter,
numbers, or symbols) character types.
Note: A use for this option is a quantity field, where the operator could enter
only numeric data.
Example
R,2,2 |
Restricts the field data to letters only (A-Z or a-z).
4-2 Packet Reference Manual
Using Option 3 (Data Entry Templates)
This option provides more specific restrictions than Option 2. This option can be used to select
certain letters (such as A through F or the numbers 1 through 4) from a character set. Use this
option to create a template of allowable characters for a field. Do not use with Option 2 (Data
Type Restrictions).
Use this option only for offline batch entry. Define a template up to 30 characters long, but the
printer only displays 16 characters at a time. The character template must contain the same
number of characters as the field.
Note:
Option 3 is only available on the 9855 printer. Use the Monarch® 939™ keyboard for
offline data entry. We do not recommend entering more than 100 characters in offline
mode.
Syntax
R,3,code,chars |
R1. R
R2. 3
R3. code
Option Header.
Option 3.
Data types. T is the default. Options
S Defines a specific set of characters for the entire field. The string
length does not have to match the field length. Maximum is 30
characters.
T Creates a template of allowable data types by placing character
indicators in each character position. The number of characters in
the string must match the length of the field.
Note: A sample use for this option is a field on a patient record containing blood
type. Acceptable characters would be A, B, O, +, or -.
R4. chars
Example
Characters to include in a field or a specific template. “” is the default. Must be
enclosed within quotation marks. Indicators can be
* any printable character
# any digit 0-9
@ any letter a-z, A-Z
- no user input for this position (for fixed data or copied data)
R,3,S,"ABC1234567890" |
Restricts the field data to letters A, B, and C, and all digits.
Example
R,3,T,"***#_ _ _ _" |
Creates a template that allows any printable character in positions 1, 2, and 3; digits in position
4; and reserves positions 5 through 8 for fixed or copied data.
Defining Field Options 4-3
Using Option 4 (Copy Data)
Use option 4 to create a field that uses data from another field. This is useful for creating merged
fields or sub-fields. Copy the information from multiple fields into one field by applying the copy
procedure more than once. Copy data is the only option that can be applied to a field more than
once.
The maximum number of characters defined in T3 (# of char) or B3 (# of char) must allow
for the number of characters that will be placed in the field, including any price, check digit, or
fixed characters inserted by the printer. The maximum number of characters in the field into
which data is copied cannot exceed 2710 or the maximum number of characters permitted by the
bar code.
Note:
When copying from more than one field, copy into the destination field from left to right.
Option 4 can be applied to an RFID Data Field.
Syntax
R,4,src fld,src start,# to copy,dest start,copy code |
R1.
R2.
R3.
R4.
R
4
src fld
src start
R5. # to copy
R6. dest start
R7. copy code
Example
Option Header.
Option 4.
Field number from which data is copied. Range: 0 to 999. 1 is the default.
Position number in the source field of the first character to be copied. Character
positions are numbered 1 to 2710, starting from the left. 1 is the default.
Number of characters to copy. Range: 1 to 2710. 1 is the default.
Position number where copied characters are to begin printing in the destination
field. Range: 1 to 2710. 1 is the default.
Copy Method. 1 is the default.
1 Copy field as is (including price symbols, pad characters, check
digits, etc.).
2 Copy unformatted data (without price characters, pad characters,
etc.).
R,4,3,1,3,1,1|
Copies data from field #3, starting at the first position and copying three characters. In the
destination field, the information is placed in position 1 and copied as formatted data.
4-4 Packet Reference Manual
Merging Fields
Copy data to merge the contents of fields. Use the copy data option as many times as necessary
to copy all the appropriate fields into the merged field. RFID Data Fields can be merged.
In the following example, two text and two non-printable fields are shown. Data from these fields
is merged to form field 5, and is then printed as a bar code.
Field
1
2
3
4
5
Data
203
339
8
BLUE
2033398BLUE
Field Type
Non-printable
Non-printable
Text
Text
Bar Code
To create this sequence:
1.
Define fields 1, 2, 3, and 4.
2.
Define field 5 as a bar code. Allow enough characters in the bar code field to hold all the
copied characters.
3.
Apply Option 4 to field 5 once for every source field.
Sub-Fields
Copy a segment of data from one field into a new location, called a sub-field. For example,
extract part of the data in a bar code and display it in text form in a sub-field. Then, use the copy
data option.
Using Option 5 (Define Data Entry Sources)
Defines how data is entered into a field. Option 5 is required for offline data entry. If the field
holds all fixed characters or copied data only, eliminate the operator prompt. Use Option 5 only
once per field. You must use the 939 keyboard for offline data entry.
Use this option to read pre-programmed data in the RFID chip embedded within the supply. Using
Option 5 stops the printer while reading each label; regardless of the print speed. If using a batch
quantity greater than one, the data is read from each label.
Note:
The EM4122 protocol requires Option 5 to read the pre-programmed data.
When reading data, make sure the maximum number of characters in the field is equal to or
greater than the number of characters being read. If not, the data may be incomplete.
Use option 6 (Upload Field Data) with Option 5 to upload the data from the RFID chip to a host.
Syntax
R,5,code |
R1. R
R2. 5
R3. code
Note:
Example
Option Header.
Option 5.
Input code for the data in the field. Options:
K Keypad
R RFID (read data from the RFID chip). This is ignored on non-RFID
printers.
Option 5 re-images each label in the batch.
R,5,K |
Allows data to be entered from a keyboard.
Example
T,2,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 |
R,5,R |
Reads the pre-programmed data from the RFID chip and saves that data into the text field.
Defining Field Options 4-5
Using Option 6 (Upload Field Data)
Upload data from any field using Option 6. When uploading multiple fields of data, the data is
comma separated.
Data is uploaded to the last port that received host data (serial, parallel, USB, or Ethernet) at the
end of the batch or label, depending on the other options used as follows:
♦
When using a batch quantity of one without Option 60, data is uploaded at the end of the
batch.
♦
When using a batch quantity greater than one with Option 60, data is uploaded after each
label.
Note:
To upload data on a field that did not change, apply Option 60 to that field.
Syntax
R,6,device |
R1. R
R2. 6
R3. device
Example
Option Header.
Option 6.
Last port that received host data. Use H (host).
T,2,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 |
R,6,H |
Uploads the text field’s data to a file.
Example
B,3,12,F,50,50,1,2,60,7,L,0 |
R,6,H |
R,60,I,0 |
Uploads the UPCA bar code field’s data to a file and uploads data for each label in the batch.
Example
T,150,V,230,130,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
R,5,R |
R,6,H |
Reads the RFID data from the RFID chip embedded in the supply. Uploads the data to the lastused port.
Example
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"RDCI" |
X,5,24,0 |
T,6,20,V,415,270,0,50,15,15,B,L,0,2 |
R,4,5,1,16,1,0 |
R,6,H | }
Copies data from field 5 (RFID Data Field) to field 6 (Text field). Uploads the data to the lastused port.
Sample Upload Packet
Example
R,5,R |
R,6,H |
Returns the following pre-programmed data in the RFID chip in the upload packet:
313233343536373839303132
Example
B,3,12,F,50,50,1,2,60,7,L,0 |
R,6,H |
Returns the following UPCA bar code data entered from the batch in the upload packet:
123456789012
4-6 Packet Reference Manual
Using Option 20 (Define Data Entry Prompts)
This option defines the operator prompt and it is not recommended on fields filled entirely by
fixed characters or copied data. This option must be defined before Option 5, or the prompt does
not display during data entry. Use the 939 keyboard for offline data entry.
Note:
Option 20 is only available on the 9855 printer.
Syntax
R,20,"prompt" |
R1. R
R2. 20
R3. “prompt”
Example
Option Header.
Option 20.
Displays the exact phrase you want to prompt the operator. Must be enclosed
within quotations. The prompt must be 15 characters or less.
R,20,"Order Number" |
Displays the prompt Order Number for the operator when this field is imaged.
Using Option 21 (Define Extended Field Names)
This option defines names for each field in a format, which can be longer than eight characters.
This option is only available on the 9855 XML-enabled printer.
Syntax
R,21,"field_name" |
R1. R
Option Header.
R2. 21
Option 21.
R3. “field_name” Specifies the field name. Must be enclosed within quotations. The name can be
1 to 256 characters, excluding non-printable control characters and the quotation
mark (“). “” is the default. This name must match the one specified in the
variable name attribute.
Example
T,2,10,v,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 |
R,21,"SALEPRICE_FIELD" |
Defines the name for text field 2 as “SALEPRICE_FIELD.”
Defining Field Options 4-7
Using Option 30 (Pad Data)
Add characters to one side of a field to “pad” the field. Padding fills in the remaining spaces when
the entered data does not fill an entire field. If a variable length field is not completely filled with
batch data, this option fills the remaining positions in the field with the character designated by
Option 30.
Note:
Option 30 can be applied to an RFID Data Field.
Syntax
R,30,L/R,"character" |
R1. R
R2. 30
R3. L/R
R4. “character”
Example
Option Header.
Option 30.
Indicates type of padding. R is the default.
L Pad field on left side
R Pad field on right side
Pad character must be within the 0 to 255 decimal range and enclosed inside
quotation marks. The pad character must be in ASCII Hex format. Do not use on
fixed length fields.
R,30,L,"X" |
Pads data with an “X” on the left side of the field.
Example
X,2,24,0 |
R,30,R,"0" |
Pads the data in the RFID Data Field with a “0” on the right side of the data. This example uses
a 96-bit RFID tag.
Sample Use for Padding
Use pad characters to make a variable length bar code occupy a fixed amount of space on the
supply. If the maximum number of characters in the bar code is 15, but the batch packet only has
10 characters, the padding option fills the remainder of the field with pad characters.
Using Option 31 (Calculate Check Digit)
The printer generates a check digit when Option 31 is applied to the field. Do not use this option
if the field contains a UPC, EAN, or Code 39 (with the MOD43 check digit) bar code.
Syntax
R,31,gen/ver,check digit # |
R1.
R2.
R3.
R4.
Example
R
31
gen/ver
check digit #
Option Header.
Option 31.
Enter G to generate a check digit.
Specifies a check digit scheme. Enter a number that identifies a check digit
scheme that has been defined. For more information, see “Using Check Digits.”
Range: 1 to 10. 1 is the default.
R,31,G,5 |
Generates a check digit using the previously defined check digit scheme 5.
4-8 Packet Reference Manual
Using Option 42 (Price Field)
Apply options to automatically insert monetary symbols. Do not use this option with Option 31
(define a check digit) or Option 60 (increment or decrement a field). This option is not
recommended for bar codes. When determining the maximum number of characters, add the
maximum number of digits and the monetary symbols.
Syntax
R,42,appear_code |
R1. R
R2. 42
R3. appear_code
Example
Option Header.
Option 42.
Enter 1 to print the price field in standard notation, as defined by the country
setting.
Use the monetary formatting packet to select monetary notations and symbols by
country setting. See “Defining the Monetary Formatting Packet” for more
information. See Appendix C, “Symbol Sets/Code Pages,” to make sure the
monetary symbol is printable in the font selected for this field. For monetary
symbols other than the dollar sign, use the internal symbol set.
R,42,1 |
Uses a price field that prints the monetary symbol and notations as defined in the monetary
formatting packet.
Using Option 50 (Bar Code Density)
Apply this option to bar code fields to create custom densities. This option overrides the density
value in the bar code field. When using this option, set the density parameter in the bar code field
to the default value. Only use this option once for each bar code field.
Bar codes produced using Option 50 may not be scannable. Code 39, density 12, produces a
one-dot narrow bar. This density is intended for special U.S.P.S. ACT-tag applications only.
Synthetic supplies are recommended to produce scannable bar codes.
The additional character gap, narrow space, and wide space parameters are valid only with Code
39 and Codabar. If these parameters are specified for any other bar codes, they will be ignored
by the printer. Do not use Option 50 with fixed density bar codes.
Option 50 can be used with PDF417 bar codes for specific customer ratios. With PDF417 bar
codes, use only the narrow and wide parameters. The narrow parameter defines the individual
bar width in dots and the wide parameter is used to define the height of each individual stacked
bar code. Option 50 can also be used with Option 52 to further customize the dimensions of a
PDF417 bar code. Option 52 allows customization of the number of columns or number of rows
for the bar code.
Syntax
R,50,narrow,wide,gap,nar_space,wide_space |
R1.
R2.
R3.
R4.
R5.
R
50
narrow
wide
gap
R6. nar_space
R7. wide_space
Field Option Header.
Option 50.
Dot width of the narrow element. Range: 1 to 99. 1 is the default.
Dot width of the wide element. Range: 1 to 99. 1 is the default.
Additional dot space between characters. Enter a value of 1 to 99. (Code 39 and
Codabar only.) 1 is the default.
Additional dot width of the narrow bar code space. (Code 39 and Codabar only).
Range: 1 to 99. 1 is the default.
Additional dot width of the wide bar code space. (Code 39 and Codabar only).
Range: 1 to 99. 1 is the default.
Defining Field Options 4-9
Example
R,50,4,8,4,4,8 |
Creates a custom bar code density with a narrow element of 4 dots, a wide element of 8 dots, a
gap of 4 dots, 4 additional dot widths for the narrow bar code space, and 8 additional dot widths
for the wide bar code space (if this is a Code 39 or Codabar bar code).
Example
B,1,40,V,100,100,32,1,0,8,L,0 |
R,50,2,10 |
Creates a custom PDF417 bar code density for 203 dpi printers. The narrow element width is 2
dots and the height is 10 dots.
Example
B,1,40,V,100,100,32,1,0,8,L,0 |
50,3,15 |
Creates a custom PDF417 bar code density for 300 dpi printers. The narrow element width is 3
dots and the height is 15 dots.
Using Option 51 (PDF417 Security/Truncation)
Define a security level and choose whether or not to truncate a PDF417 bar code. Higher security
levels add data to a bar code, improving scan reliability. Some damaged bar codes may still be
scannable if the security level is high enough. You can use this option to create standard PDF417
bar codes or use the truncated option to create a narrower bar code. This option can appear only
once per PDF417 field, in any order, following the bar code field.
As the security level is increased, so is the size of the PDF417 bar code. For each level
increased, the bar code doubles in size.
Syntax
Example
R,51,security,stand/default |
R1. R
R2. 51
R3. security
Option Header.
Indicates Option 51.
Security level ranges from 0 to 8. 0 is the default.
R4. stand/def
Higher security levels add data to a bar code, improving scan reliability. Som e
damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the security level is high enough.
Truncation selector. S is the default. Valid values:
S (default) a standard PDF417 bar code
T truncated
R,51,2,S |
Defines a security level of 2 for a standard PDF417 bar code.
4-10 Packet Reference Manual
Using Option 52 (PDF417 Width/Length)
This option defines the image width or length of a PDF417 bar code. If defining a fixed number of
columns (width), the bar code expands in length. If defining a fixed number of rows (length), the
bar code expands in width. Column value does not include start/stop or left/right indicator
columns. If this option does not immediately follow the PDF417 bar code field, the default
settings are used. You can only use this option once per PDF417 bar code field.
Syntax
R,52,row/column,dimension |
R1. R
R2. 52
R3. row/column
R4. dimension
Example
Option Header.
Indicates Option 52.
Indicates the number of rows or columns. If rows are specified, the bar code
expands in columns, or vice versa.
R Row
C Column
The number of rows or columns defined for the bar code. The default is 4. Valid
values:
3-90 for rows. 3 is the default for rows.
1-30 for columns. 1 is the default for columns.
R,52,C,10 |
Defines the column width of 10, which expands the PDF417 bar code length by 10.
Using Option 53 (Optional Settings for Aztec)
Use Option 53 to set the error control level, enable ECI data, enable a menu symbol, and add
appended data to an Aztec bar code.
Note:
Typically, these settings are not used. When using Option 53, the printer may take longer
to image the bar code and require more time to print the format.
Syntax
R,53,error_ctrl,ECI,menu_sym,str_append,"string" |
R1. R
R2. 53
R3. error_ctrl
R4. ECI
R5. menu_sym
R6. str_append
R7. “string”
Example
Option Header.
Option 53.
Error control level. Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the error
control level is high enough. 0 is the default. Options:
0 Default level
1-99
101-104
201-232
300
Sets the ECI Data flag. 0 is the default. Options:
0 Disable
1 Enable
Sets the Menu Symbol flag. 0 is the default. Options:
0 Disable
1 Enable
Structured append information. Range: 1 to 26. 1 is the default.
String to append. Range: 0 to 24. “” is the default. Must be enclosed in
quotation marks.
R,53,0,0,0,1,"" |
Uses option 53 to set the error control to 0, disables the ECI data and menu symbol flags, and
does not append any data to the bar code.
Defining Field Options 4-11
Using Option 60 (Incrementing/Decrementing Fields)
Applications such as serial numbers require a numeric field to increment (increase in value) or
decrement (decrease in value) on successive labels within a single batch. Incrementing or
decrementing can be applied to numeric data only. If a field includes letters and digits, apply
incrementing or decrementing to only the portion of the field that contains digits. Do not use with
Option 42 (price field).
When using Option 60 with RFID Data Fields or EPC data:
♦ Use caution when incrementing an RFID field if data is coming directly from a host because
the field must be incremented in ASCII Hex.
♦ The data increments by one as follows: 0 to F (0123456789ABCDEF), then back to 0.
♦ Parameters R3 and R4 are ignored for RFID and EPC data fields.
♦
Using version 7.1 or greater firmware, the printer increments EPC data.
Syntax
R,60,I/D,amount,l pos,r pos |
R1. R
R2. 60
R3. I/D
R4. amount
R5. l pos
R6. r pos
Example
Option Header.
Option 60.
Increment or decrement. I is the default.
I incrementing field
D decrementing field (not valid for RFID)
Amount to increase or decrease. Range: 0 to 999. 1 is the default.
Leftmost position in inc/dec portion of field. If this value is not entered, the default
value 1 is used. Range: 0 to 2710. 1 is the default. Using version 8.8 or greater,
l pos is supported for RFID and EPC data fields.
Rightmost position in inc/dec portion of field. If this value is not used, the entire
field length is used as the default. Range: 0 to 2710. 2710 is the default. Using
version 8.8 or greater, r pos is supported for RFID and EPC data fields.
R,60,I,5,1,6 |
Increments a field by 5 each time the field is printed. The field increments beginning with the first
left position and ending with the sixth position.
Incrementing EPC Data Example
{F,1,A,R,E,400,400,""|
T,1,30,V,50,70,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0|
R,60,I,1|
B,2,12,F,10,130,1,4,50,8,L,0|
R,60,I,1|
X,3,100,0|
R,60| }
RFID Da ta Field
Incrementing Option
RFID Da ta Field Bat ch
{B,1,N,3|
Dat a in ASCII He x w ith
1,"001"|
EPC Data included
2,"123456789012"|
3,"12345678123456781234561B~028~028~02812345678~02812345678~02800000~028"
| }
This example uses option 60 to increment the EPC RFID data by one.
Fixing the First Number in the Incrementing Sequence
There are two ways to enter the first number in the incrementing sequence. You can use batch
data or use Option 1 to define the first number as a fixed character. The first number in the
sequence must contain the same amount of digits as the highest number to be counted. For
example, to count the numbers 1 to 999, the first number in the sequence must be entered as
001.
4-12 Packet Reference Manual
Using Option 61 (Re-image Field)
This option redraws (reimages) a constant field when you have a constant field next to a variable
field on your label. It can be used on text, constant text, bar code, line, or box fields.
These printers do not redraw an area if the field data does not change. When a field changes,
that area is cleared and the new field data is imaged. However, the new field data may require a
larger area than the previous field did. In some cases, neighboring fields that do not change
(constant fields) may be covered with white space from the changing field’s (variable fields) area.
Use this option to reimage the constant field, or it may appear broken.
Note:
The most common use for this option is with incrementing fields on your label, because
they may cover a constant field.
Syntax
R,61 |
R1. R
R2. 61
Example
Option Header.
Option 61.
R,61 |
Reimages the constant field that appears next to a variable field.
In this example, Option 61 is applied to the bar code field to keep the incrementing field (Box #)
from blocking out the bar code field.
Re-Image ON
Re-Image OFF
Defining Field Options 4-13
Using Option 62 (Bypass Bar Code)
This option allows the optional verifier to bypass (skip) bar code(s) on a format. The verifier does
not scan any bar code with Option 62 applied to it.
Syntax
R,62 |
R1. R
R2. 62
Option Header.
Option 62. The verifier does not scan the bar code associated with this option.
Note: Adjacent bar codes on a format need to start and end on the same row (be
the same height). Also, both adjacent bar codes (or neither bar code) must
be scanned. However, do not apply Option 62 to all bar codes on a format
or 764 errors appear.
The verifier’s beam scans the entire width of the label. It cannot scan half
the labels width. The verifier errors if Option 62 is applied to only ONE of
the adjacent bar codes.
Option 62 can be applied t o an y ba r code
on this format.
Example
Option 62 must be applied to BO TH ad ja cent
bar codes.
B,1,12,F,110,115,1,2,120,5,L,0 | R,62 |
The verifier does not scan or verify this UPCA bar code on the format.
4-14 Packet Reference Manual
Verifier Information
♦
There is a 0.50-inch no scan zone on the trailing edge of each label.
♦
You cannot verify adjacent bar codes that do not start and end on the same print row. See the
following graphic.
B,3,13,V,310,28,8,4,50,8,L,0|
B,4,13,V,355,200,8,4,50,8,L,0 |
Postal Code Bar code
Tracking Number Bar code
Bar code begins
at row 310
Bar code begins
at row 355
The v erifier cannot v erif y the “postal code” and
“tracking number” bar cod es, becaus e the y do
not star t and end on the s a me row .
Defining Field Options 4-15
Using Option 64 (Program AFI Field for UHF RFID)
Use Option 64 to program the AFI memory in the EPC memory bank (field) for UHF RFID tags.
Note:
Do not apply a lock to the EPC memory bank since the AFI memory is part of the EPC
memory bank. If the EPC memory bank is locked, the AFI memory cannot be
programmed (the printer errors).
Syntax
R,64,field,"code",lock |
R1.
R2.
R3.
R4.
R
64
field
“code”
R5. lock
Example
Option Header.
Option 64.
Memory field to program. Use A (AFI).
Byte code. This is an 8-bit (1 byte) character to program, enclosed within
quotation marks. Range: 0 to 255. “” is the default. Use the ASCII character or
the tilde followed by the equivalent three-character decimal value. For example,
the letter A can be entered as A or ~041.
Lock code. Use 0 (no lock).
X,5,16,0,0 |
R,64,A,"A",0 |
Programs the character A into the AFI memory field. The data is not locked (0).
Example
X,5,16,0,0 |
R,64,A,"~046",0 |
Programs the character F into the AFI memory field. The data is not locked (0).
Using Check Digits
Check digits are typically used to ensure that a text or bar code field scans correctly. If you apply
Option 31, the printer calculates a check digit. A check digit scheme determines how the printer
calculates a check digit. When you define a check digit scheme, you assign a number to identify
it. This number is later entered in R4 (check digit #) when you apply Option 31 to a field. You
can use check digits with text or bar code fields. Check digit calculations are performed on
numeric data only.
Do not use check digits with price fields. Do not define a check digit scheme for UPC, EAN, Code
39 (with the MOD43 check digit), and Code 93 bar codes, because they have predefined check
digits.
Syntax
{A,selector,action,device,modulus,fld_length, D/P,
"weights" | }
A1.
A2.
A3.
A4.
A
selector
action
device
Check Digit Header.
Assign a number from 1 to 10 to this check digit formula. 1 is the default.
The action to perform. Enter A to add the check digit scheme.
Format storage device. R is the default. Options:
F Flash (must be formatted first. See “Formatting Flash” and
“Flash Memory Guidelines” in Chapter 2 for more information.)
R Volatile RAM
Note: Check digits stored in flash are saved when the printer is turned off.
A5. modulus
A6. fld_length
4-16 Packet Reference Manual
Number from 2 to 11. The modulus is used to divide the sum of products or the
sum of digits.
The maximum number of characters the field will contain. Range: 0 to 2710. 2710
is the default.
Example
A7. D/P
Algorithm. The algorithm determines how the check digit is calculated. Options:
D sum of digits
P sum of products
A8. “weights ”
String of digits used for calculation. A weight string is a group of two or more
numbers that is applied to a field. The number of digits in this string should equal
the number in fld_length. Enclose in quotation marks. Range: 0 to 2710. “” is the
default.
{A,1,A,R,10,5,P,"65432" | }
Adds check digit scheme number 1 to the printer’s memory. The modulus is 10, the maximum
number of characters in the field is 5. The check digit is calculated by using the Sum of Products
and the string of digits used in the calculation is “65432.”
Sum of Products Calculation
This is an example of how the printer uses Sum of Products to calculate a check digit for this
data:
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
1.
Weights are applied to each digit, starting with the last digit in the weight string. They are
applied right to left, beginning at the right-most position of the field. Remember, a weight
string must contain at least two different numbers. This example has a weight string of
1,2,3,4:
field:
weight string:
2.
2
1
3
2
2
3
4
4
5
1
2
2
1
3
9
4
Each digit in the field is multiplied by the weight assigned to it:
field:
weight string:
products:
3.
5
4
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
20 2 6 6 16 5 4 3 36
Next, the product of each digit is added together. This is the sum of the products.
20 + 2 + 6 + 6 + 16 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 36 = 98
4.
Divide the sum of the products by the modulus (10 in this case), only to the whole number.
The balance is called the remainder.
9
10 98
90
8
5.
Subtract the remainder from the modulus.
The result becomes the check digit. In this case, the check digit is 2.
10 - 8 = 2
Defining Field Options 4-17
Sum of Digits Calculation
This is an example of how the printer uses Sum of Digits to calculate a check digit for this data:
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
1.
Weights are applied to each digit, starting with the last digit in the weight string. They are
applied right to left, beginning at the right-most position of the field. Remember, a weight
string must contain at least two different numbers. This example has a weight string of
1,2,3,4:
field:
weight string:
2.
2
1
3
2
2
3
4
4
5
1
2
2
1
3
9
4
Each digit in the field is multiplied by the weight assigned to it:
field:
weight string:
products:
3.
5
4
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
20 2 6 6 16 5 4 3 36
Next, the digits of the products are added together. Two-digit products are treated as two
separate digits. This is the sum of the digits.
2 + 0 + 2 + 6 + 6 + 1 + 6 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 3 + 6 = 44
4.
Divide the sum of the digits by the modulus (10 in this case), only to the whole number. The
balance is called the remainder.
4
10 44
40
4
5.
Subtract the remainder from the modulus. The result becomes the check digit. In this case,
the check digit is 6.
10 - 4 = 6
4-18 Packet Reference Manual
C R E AT I N G G R A P H I C S
5
This chapter provides information on how to
♦
map out the graphic image using the hexadecimal (hex) or run length method.
♦
create a graphic packet using a graphic header, bitmap, duplicate, next-bitmap, text, constant
text, line, and box fields.
♦
place a graphic image into a format.
♦
use the compressed graphics packet.
You can use graphic packets to create bitmapped images. To include a graphic packet within
your format, your format must contain a graphic field. See “Placing the Graphic in a Format” for
more information.
Overview of Compliance Labels
You can create compliance labels by using a graphic packet for the fixed fields and a format
packet for the variable fields of your compliance label. The fixed fields of a compliance label are
composed of text, lines, or boxes, which are repeated on each label. The variable fields are
composed of text, bar codes, and order information, which changes with each label. Using a
graphic packet for the fixed fields saves time, because the printer does not have to image all the
lines or boxes each time the compliance label is printed.
Also, using a graphic packet for a compliance label reduces the number of fields in your format.
Formats have a maximum number of fields per packet (0 to 999). However, you can bypass that
requirement by placing your compliance layout in a graphic packet. When you process your
formats, you only need one line in the format packet to reference the graphic packet.
The following example shows how to reference a graphic packet from within a format packet.
{
F,1,A,R,E,400,400,"RDCI" |
G,57,0,0,0,0 |
C,40,10,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"To:",0 |
B,2,13,V,310,30,8,4,50,8,L,0 |
}
start of header
format header
reference to graphic packet
constant text field
bar code field
end of header
Once you have your compliance label format set, all you need to do is add the variable sections
(bar codes, addresses, and order information) to the format packet.
To see a sample compliance label graphic packet, see “Sample Compliance Graphic Packet.” To
see a sample compliance label using a graphic packet within a format, see “Sample Compliance
Label.”
Creating Graphics 5-1
Overview of Bitmapped Images
A printed image is formed through a series of dots. Each square on the
grid below represents a dot on the printhead. The graphic image is
created by blackening dots in a specific pattern. You can print varying
shades of gray according to the concentration of dots on the image.
When the dots are printed together, the end result is a graphic image.
Determining a Method
You can use one of two methods to map out your graphic image:
Hex Method
The dot sequences are segmented into binary numbers and then converted
to hex numbers. A graphic using gray-scaling, several slanted lines, or
several vertical lines typically translates more efficiently with hex
representation.
Run Length
Encoding Method
The dot sequences are segmented into black and white strings within a
row. The total count of each white string is converted to a lower-case
letter, corresponding to numeric value. The total count of each black string
is converted to an uppercase letter, corresponding to numeric value. This
method can reduce imaging time for graphics that contain repetitive rows
of dots. A graphic with horizontal lines or very few white-to-black borders
typically translates more efficiently with run length encoding.
The most efficient encoding method depends on how complicated your graphic image is and
whether or not imaging time is a concern. You may want to experiment with both encoding
methods to get optimal performance.
Designing Compliance Labels
To use a graphic packet to design your compliance label:
1.
Decide which fields are fixed (constant text, lines, boxes) and which fields are variable
(addresses and shipping information).
2.
Design your compliance label as you would any other format.
Designing Bitmapped Images
Once you determine the encoding method to use, you can begin
mapping out your graphic image.
Note:
The image that you map must be an upside down mirror
image of the final result.
5-2 Packet Reference Manual
Special Considerations
Solid black print cannot exceed 30% of any given square inch of the supply. If the black print
exceeds this limit, you may lose data or damage the printhead.
In the first label, the large “M” logo and thick black line exceed the allowed black to white print
ratio. In the second label, the large “M” logo does not exceed the black to white print ratio.
2 inches
Exceeds
limit
Exceeds
limit
2 inches
Does not
exce ed
limit
0.5”
Does not
exce ed
limit
Using the Hex Method
The following steps explain how to derive a hex character string from a bitmapped graphic.
Each square on the grid represents a dot. A black square indicates the dot is ON, and a white
square indicates the dot is OFF. A sequence of binary numbers, called a bit pattern or bitmap,
determines what dots are on and off. The numbers “0" and ”1" are used for this purpose. The
number “1" turns a dot on and ”0" turns a dot off.
All hex numbers must be two digits. For example, write hex 0 as 00, or hex E as 0E.
1.
Assign 1 to every black square and 0 to every white square.
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111110000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111000000000000000000000000001111111110000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000001111110000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000011110000000000000000111111111111111111111111110000000000000001111000000000
00000000000000000000000001111100001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111110000
00000000000000000000000110000011111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111000001100
00000000000000000000000110001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110
00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110
00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111111111000000000000000000011111111111111111111111111111110
00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111111111100
00000000000000000000000001111111100000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000011111111110000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000010000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000011000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000001111000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000111000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000111111000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000001111000000
00000000111111100000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110001111000000
Creating Graphics 5-3
2.
Section off the grid in columns of eight. If any rows are not divisible by 8, add enough 0’s to
complete a column.
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000011
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
3.
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
11100000
11100000
11111100
11111110
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000001
00000001
00000001
00000001
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
01111100
10000011
10001111
11111111
11111111
11111111
01111111
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011100
00000000
00000000
00000001
00111110
11000000
00111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
10000000
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
00000011
00111111
00000000
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
11111111
11111111
00111111
11000000
00000000
00111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111000
00000000
00000111
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00001111
00000000
11110000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111000
00000111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
01111111
00000000
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
11111110
11111111
00000000
00000000
11100000
00011110
11100001
11111110
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00111111
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00000011
11100011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
11110000
00001100
11111110
11111110
11111110
11111100
11110000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
One row at a time, convert each group of eight binary digits to hex.
starting at position 49 ...
00111111
11111111
11111111
11110000
4.
=
=
=
=
3F
FF
FF
F0
Write the hex values for each row as a continuous string.
row 1, position 49 = 03FFFFFF00000
5.
Repeat steps 3 through 4 for each row on the grid.
6.
Insert the hex values in syntax format.
Using the Run Length Encoding Method
The following steps explain how to derive a run length character string from a bitmapped graphic.
Each square on the grid represents a dot. A black square indicates the dot is ON, and a white
square indicates the dot is OFF.
Note:
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
00000011
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
The following example shows “1" to indicate when a square is ON, and ”0" to indicate
when a square is OFF. You do not have to convert your dots when using the run length
method.
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
11100000
11100000
11111100
11111110
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000001
00000001
00000001
00000001
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000011
01111100
10000011
10001111
11111111
11111111
11111111
01111111
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011111
00011100
00000000
00000011
00011100
00000000
00000000
00000001
00111110
11000000
00111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
10000000
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
11000000
00000011
00111111
11111111
00000011
00111111
5-4 Packet Reference Manual
00000000
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
11111111
11111111
00111111
11000000
00000000
00111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111000
00000000
00000111
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11110000
00001111
00000000
11110000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
11111000
00001111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
01111111
00000000
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
00000000
11111110
11111111
01111111
11111110
11111111
00000000
00000000
11000000
00011110
11100001
11111110
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111111
00111111
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00011111
00000001
11100001
11111110
00000011
11100011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
11110000
00001100
11111110
11111110
11111110
11111100
11110000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
11000000
00000000
11000000
11000000
1.
Count the number of consecutive OFF or ON dots in a row. Write the number of consecutive
dots in sequence for the first row on the grid. Write “ON” or “OFF” after each number to
indicate ON or OFF dots.
(row 1, position 50) 26 on
(row 2, position 39) 11 on, 26 off, 9 on
(row 3, position 34) 5 on, 45 off, 6 on
2.
Replace each number you have written with its corresponding code from the Dot to Run
Length Encoding Chart provided in Appendix C, “Symbol Sets/Code Pages.” Be sure to use
CAPITAL letters for black dots and lower-case letters for white dots.
26 on (Z)11 on (K), 26 off (z), 9 on (I)..
If the number is greater than 26, write z, followed by the letter corresponding to the
amount over 26. For example, to represent 45 off dots, write zs.
5 on (E), 45 off (zs), 6 on (F)..
3.
Write the letter codes in sequence, uninterrupted, for each row.
(row
(row
(row
(row
Note:
1,position
2,position
3,position
4,position
50)
39)
34)
30)
Z
KzI
EzsF
DpZoD..
If the end of the line specifies OFF dots (lower-case letters), the ending lower-case
letters can be omitted. For example, uZFu can be written as uZF.
4.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each row on the grid.
5.
Insert the code values in syntax format.
Determining How to Store the Image
Once you have mapped out your graphic image, determine how to store it.
♦
Flash
♦
Volatile RAM
♦
Temporary Storage
Using Flash
Use flash memory when the graphic image is used by several formats, because the graphic only
has to be sent once. This eliminates the need to send the graphic image repeatedly. See “Placing
the Graphic in a Format,” for more information about using the graphic packet in a format.
Format flash memory before you can use it. From the Main Menu, select Setup, Flash Memory,
then, Format Flash. The process takes a few minutes. Graphics stored in flash memory are
saved when the printer is turned off. You may need to clear flash memory, refer to your
Operator’s Handbook.
Using Volatile RAM
You should use RAM when the graphic image is used by several formats, because you only have
to send the graphic image once. This eliminates the need to send the graphic image repeatedly.
See “Placing the Graphic in a Format,” for more information about using the graphic packet in a
format. Store graphics smaller than approximately 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch in printer RAM and
reference by the graphic ID number.
Note:
Graphics are stored in the format buffer and remain there until another graphic packet is
sent or the printer is turned off.
Creating Graphics 5-5
Using Temporary Storage
You should use temporary storage when the graphic image is used only in one format or your
graphic image is very large. Graphic data in temporary storage is held in the image buffer until
the graphic is printed and then it is cleared from memory. Temporary graphics are also cleared
from memory when you send a new batch or update batch. You can use the same graphic image
multiple times on a format. Send the graphic image to the printer after the format to which it
applies.
If a graphic is stored in temporary storage, do not place a graphic field in the format. This will
cause an error. Instead, position the graphic image by using the row and column locations in the
graphic packet header. Image memory (temporary storage) will accept a graphic packet 1218
rows long with 811 dots per row.
Creating a Graphic Packet
Your graphic packet can contain
♦
bitmapped fields (for bitmapped images)
♦ constant text fields
♦
lines
♦
boxes
Images using hex representation or run length encoding are bitmapped images. See “Designing
Bitmapped Images” to design your bitmapped image.
Once you design your graphic image, you are ready to define a graphic packet. This packet
generates the graphic image you use in a format.
Positioning the Graphic Image
This section explains how to position the graphic image within a graphic packet header, a field of
a graphic packet, or within a format.
Within the Graphic Packet Header
When you are using RAM, the row and column parameters in the graphic header are usually 0,0,
because placement is controlled by the graphic field in your format. This is especially true when
designing a compliance label overlay.
When you are using temporary storage, these parameters control the
placement of the graphic image on the supply.
The area enclosed within the dotted lines represents the graphic image
starting at 0,0 (as defined in the graphic header).
If you want a fixed amount of white space around your graphic image, use
something other than 0 for row and/or column. The area enclosed within
the dotted lines represents the graphic image starting at 0,0 with a fixed
amount of white space (10,10) around the graphic image.
Within the Field
In a bitmap, constant text, line, or box field, the row and column parameters
control where an individual field or bitmapped row begins in relation to the
coordinates defined in the graphic header.
The bottom of the triangle in this example represents the first field of
the graphic packet starting at 10,0.
5-6 Packet Reference Manual
Within a Format
When you define the graphic field within your format, the row and column parameters represent
where on the format to place the graphic image.
If you are doing a compliance label, these numbers are usually
0,0, because your compliance label covers the entire supply.
See “Placing the Graphic in a Format,” for a sample compliance
label.
If you are placing a graphic (a logo, for example) within a certain
area on your supply, enter the starting position (bottom left corner)
of the graphic image.
This label shows the triangle “logo” beginning (the bottom left
corner) at 400, 75 as defined in the graphic field.
Defining the Graphic Header
Every graphic packet must contain a graphic header. This is the first thing you enter. It identifies
and provides important measurement and formatting information for the graphic. Bitmap,
duplicate, next-bitmap, constant text, line, and box fields follow the graphic header, if they are
used.
Syntax
{G,graphID,action,device,units,row,col, mode,"name" |
G1.
G2.
G3.
G4.
G
graphID
action
device
G5. units
G6. row
Graphic Header.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify the graphic image. 1 is the default.
Use A to add the graphic to the printer.
Graphic storage device. R is the default.
F Flash (saved when the printer is turned off)
R Volatile RAM
T Temporary storage
Unit of measure. For bitmapped graphics, G (dots) is the default.
Distance between the bottom of the graphic image area and the first bitmap line.
This is usually 0, unless you want a fixed amount of white space around the
graphic image. 10 is the default. See “Positioning the Graphic Image,” for more
information.
Printer
Unit of
Measure
9825
9855 (203 dpi)
9855 (300 dpi)
G7. col
G8. mode
G9. “name”
Row or
End Row
Column or
End
Column
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-399
0-1013
0-810
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
Distance between the left edge of the graphic image area and the left edge of first
bitmap line. This is usually 0, unless you want a fixed amount of white space
around the graphic image. 10 is the default. See “Positioning the Graphic
Image,” for more information. Use the previous table for values.
Imaging mode. Enter 0.
Graphic name (optional), 0 to 8 characters, enclose within quotation marks. “” is
the default.
Creating Graphics 5-7
Example
{G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99Wire" |
Adds a graphic image identified by number 99 to volatile RAM. The graphic uses dot
measurement. The image will be placed according to the row and column parameters in the
graphic field. The imaging mode is 0 and the image is called 99Wire.
Creating Bitmap Fields
This defines one row of dots, starting at a specific row and column within the graphic image.
Each unique row of dots requires a bitmap field. Repeat a bitmap field using a duplicate field.
Syntax
B,row,col,algorithm,"data" |
B1. B
B2. row
Printer
Unit of
Measure
9825
9855 (203 dpi)
9855 (300 dpi)
B3. col
B4. algorithm
B5. “data”
Example
Bitmap Field.
Distance (in dots) from the graphic image’s bottom margin to the bitmap line.
10 is the default. See the following table:
Row or
End Row
Column or End
Column
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-399
0-1013
0-810
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
Distance (in dots) from the graphic image’s left edge to the bitmap line. 10 is the
default. Use the previous table for values.
Coding method for bitmap data:
H Hex Representation
R Run Length Encoding
Character string made up of hex or run length encoding. Do not put spaces or any
other character between the numbers. Range: 0 to 2710. 2710 is the default.
B,39,56,H,"3FFFFFF0" |
Defines a bitmapped graphic field. The image begins 39 dots from the bottom and 56 dots from
the left edge of the graphic area. Hex representation is used.
Creating Next-Bitmap Fields
This field uses the previous field’s row and column locations. It allows you to use the bitmap or
duplicate field data without having to recalculate row and column locations. This field represents
one row of dots on the image.
Syntax
N,adjdir,adjamt,algorithm,"data" |
N1. N
N2. adjdir
N3. adjamt
N4. algorithm
5-8 Packet Reference Manual
Next-Bitmap Field.
Increments or decrements the row count. Inserts the duplicate line after or before
the current row. 0 is the default.
0 Increments (inserts after)
1 Decrements (inserts before)
For example:
B,50,35,R,"GsSsG" |
N,0,1,R,"DpZoD" |
prints a next-bitmap field on row 51 at column 35.
Amount of row adjustment in dot rows. Using 0 overwrites the sameline.
Range: 0 to 999.
Coding method for bitmap data:
H Hex Representation
R Run Length Encoding
N5. “data”
Example
Character string made up of hex or run length encoding. Do not put spaces or any
other character between the hex numbers or run length code letters.
Range: 0 to 2710. 2710 is the default.
B,39,56,H,"3FFFFFF0" |
N,0,1,H,"000000E00000" |
Defines a next-bitmap graphic field beginning on row 40. The row count increments by 1. Hex
representation is used.
Creating Duplicate Fields
If a line of data is identical to a previous bitmap or next-bitmap field, the duplicate field allows
you to repeat the dot sequence without retyping the data. A duplicate field represents one row of
dots on the image.
Note:
Duplicate fields are useful when you have a graphic with a lot of repetition.
Syntax
D,adjdir,adjamt,count |
D1. D
D2. adjdir
D3. adjamt
D4. count
Example
Duplicate Field.
Increments or decrements the row count. Inserts the duplicate line after or before
the current row. 0 is the default.
0 Increments (inserts after)
1 Decrements (inserts before)
For example:
B,50,35,R,"GsSsG" |
D,0,20,2 |
inserts row 50 again at row 70 and row 90. Rows 70 and 90 do not have to be
defined later.
Amount of row adjustment in dot rows. Range: 0 to 999. 1 is the default. The
above example adjusts the duplicate field to image on row 70 and 90 (adding 20
to the current row count).
Number of times to duplicate the line. Range: 0 to 999.
B,117,24,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" |
D,0,1,2 |
Defines a duplicate field that is imaged after the bitmap line. This field duplicates the preceding
bitmap line twice (at row 118 and 119).
You can use constant text, line, or box fields in a graphic packet to create a compliance label
overlay. See Chapter 3, “Defining Fields,” for more information about these fields.
Creating Graphics 5-9
Sample Compliance Graphic Packet
A sample compliance graphic packet is shown below.
{G,57,A,R,E,0,0,0,"OVERLAY" |
L,V,500,155,90,85,3 |
L,V,298,245,90,102,3 |
L,V,500,2,0,390,3 |
L,V,400,2,0,390,3 |
L,V,298,2,0,390,3 |
L,V,200,2,0,390,5 |
C,560,10,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"FROM:",0 |
C,560,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"CARRIER:",0 |
C,529,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"PRO NUMBER:",0 |
C,511,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"B/L NUMBER:",0 |
C,472,10,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"TO:",0 |
C,387,10,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"SHIP TO POSTAL CODE",0 |
C,391,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"APPOINTMENT NUMBER:",0 |
C,358,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ORDER TYPE:",0 |
C,327,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ITEM:",0 |
C,190,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"UPC SHIPPING CONTAINER CODE",0 |
C,548,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MONARCH PRINTERS",0 |
C,538,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"170 MONARCH LANE",0 |
C,528,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"P.O. BOX 608",0 |
C,518,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"DAYTON, OHIO 45401",0 |
C,462,313,0,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,"#",0 | }
The sample compliance label overlay was created with this packet, using the format provided in
“Placing the Graphic in a Format.”
Sample Hex Graphic Packet
{G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99WIRE" |
B,39,48,H,"3FFFFFF0" |
B,40,32,H,"01FFC000000FF8" |
B,41,32,H,"3E00000000000FC0" |
B,42,24,H,"03C0003FFFFFF0000F" |
B,43,24,H,"7C3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1F0 |
B,44,16,H,"0183FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF06" |
B,45,16,H,"018FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE" |
B,46,16,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE" |
B,47,16,H,"01FFFFFF80001FFFFFFFFE" |
B,48,16,H,"01FFFFF0000000007FFFFC" |
B,49,24,H,"7F800007FFFF00003FF0" |
B,50,24,H,"1FC00007FFFF00001FC0" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,51,24,H,"1C03FFFFFFFFFFFE01C0" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,52,32,H,"3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1C0" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,53,24,H,"03FFF0000000007FFE" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,70,0,H,"0400001FC00007FFFF00001FC0" |
B,71,0,H,"0600001C03FFFFFFFFFFFE01C0" |
B,72,0,H,"030000003FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1C0" |
B,73,0,H,"01000003FFF0000000007FFE" |
B,74,8,H,"FC001C03FFFFFFFFFFFE00C0" |
B,75,8,H,"FE00003FFFFFFFFFFFFFE0C0" |
B,76,8,H,"1FF803FFF0000000007FFE" |
B,77,8,H,"0FFFCFFC00000000000001C0" |
B,78,16,H,"FFDF000FFFFFFFFF8003C0" |
B,79,16,H,"7FFFC00007FFFF00001FC0" |
B,80,24,H,"1C03FFFFFFFFFFFE01C0" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,81,32,H,"3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1C0" |
D,0,4,4 |
5-10 Packet Reference Manual
B,82,24,H,"03FFF0000000007FFE" |
D,0,4,3 |
B,83,24,H,"1FC00007FFFF00001FC0" |
D,0,4,3 |
B,98,24,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0" |
B,99,24,H,"07FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" |
B,100,24,H,"1FF9FFFFFFFFFFFFFF" |
B,101,24,H,"3FFE0007FFFF8000FF80" |
B,102,24,H,"391E0027FFFF803FFFC0" |
B,103,24,H,"1C7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0" |
B,104,24,H,"1FC1FFFFFFFFFFFF1FC0" |
B,105,24,H,"0FFDFFFFFFFFFFE0FF" |
B,106,24,H,"FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8" |
B,107,32,H,"3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE0" |
B,108,32,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFF" |
B,109,48,H,"07FFFF80" |
D,0,1,2 |
B,111,48,H,"FFFFFFFF" |
B,112,32,H,"FFFF00000000FFE0" |
B,113,24,H,"078000FFFFFFFF001F" |
B,114,24,H,"78FFFFFFFFFFFFFFE060" |
B,115,16,H,"0187FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC18"
B,116,16,H,"027FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2"
B,117,16,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC"
D,0,1,2 |
B,120,16,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8"
B,121,24,H,"FEFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE0" |
B,122,24,H,"07FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" |
B,123,32,H,"FFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0" |
B,124,32,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFF8" | }
|
|
|
|
Sample Run Length Graphic Packet
{G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99WIRE" |
B,39,50,R,"Z" |
B,40,39,R,"KzI" |
B,41,34,R,"EzsF" |
B,42,30,R,"DpZoD" |
B,43,25,R,"EdZZEdE" |
B,44,23,R,"BeZZMeB" |
B,45,23,R,"BcZZW" |
B,46,23,R,"ZZZA" |
B,47,23,R,"ZDsZE" |
B,48,24,R,"TzkU" |
B,49,25,R,"HtRqJ" |
B,50,27,R,"GsSsG" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,51,27,R,"ChZWgC" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,52,34,R,"ZZEdC" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,53,30,R,"NzkN" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,70,5,R,"AuGsSsG" |
B,71,5,R,"BtChZWgC" |
B,72,6,R,"DxZZEdC" |
B,73,7,R,"CtNzkN" |
B,74,8,R,"FmChZWhC" |
B,75,8,R,"GsZZEdC" |
B,76,11,R,"JiNzkN" |
B,77,12,R,"NbJzzeC" |
B,78,16,R,"JaElZKmD" |
B,79,17,R,"QsSsG" |
B,80,27,R,"ChZWgC" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,81,34,R,"ZZEdC" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,82,30,R,"NzkN" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,83,27,R,"GsSsG" |
D,0,4,4 |
B,98,30,R,"ZZJ" |
B,99,29,R,"ZZM" |
B,100,27,R,"JbZZE" |
B,101,26,R,"MnToI" |
B,102,26,R,"CbHnTiP" |
B,103,27,R,"CcZZC" |
B,104,27,R,"GeZWcG" |
B,105,28,R,"JaZReH" |
B,106,32,R,"ZZI" |
B,107,34,R,"ZZE" |
B,108,38,R,"ZQ" |
B,109,53,R,"T" |
D,0,1,2 |
B,111,48,R,"ZF" |
B,112,33,R,"PzfK" |
B,113,29,R,"CpZBoE" |
B,114,25,R,"DcZZGfB" |
B,115,23,R,"BdZZMeB" |
B,116,22,R,"AbZZVbA" |
B,117,22,R,"ZZZB" |
D,0,1,2 |
B,120,23,R,"ZZZ" |
B,121,25,R,"ZZV" |
B,122,29,R,"ZZM" |
B,123,32,R,"ZZF" |
B,124,39,R,"ZT" | }
Creating Graphics 5-11
Placing the Graphic in a Format
To include a graphic within a format:
1.
Design the graphic image as shown in “Designing Bitmapped Images.”
2.
If you are using RAM, place a graphic field in the format file to reference the graphic. See the
following section, “Defining the Graphic Field,” for more information.
Note:
If you are using temporary storage, you do not need a graphic field in your format to
reference the graphic image.
3.
Download all the necessary packets (check digit, format, etc.).
4.
Send the graphic file to the printer, if you have not already done so. See “Creating a Graphic
Packet” for more information.
Defining the Graphic Field
The graphic field in a format references the graphic image by the graphID in the graphic header.
This field is required only if the graphic will be stored in RAM.
Syntax
G,graphID,row,col,mode,rotation |
G1. G
G2. graphID
G3. row
Printer
Unit of
Measure
9825
9855 (203 dpi)
9855 (300 dpi)
G4. column
G5. mode
G6. rotation
Example
Graphic Field.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify the graphic image. 1 is the default.
Distance between the bottom of the print area on the supply to the bottom of the
graphic image. 10 is the default. Measured in selected units. See the following
table.
Row or
End Row
Column or
End Column
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-399
0-1013
0-810
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
The row specified in the constant text, bitmap, line, or box field is added to the
row value above to determine the actual position in the format.
Distance between the left edge of the print area on the supply and the left edge of
the graphic. Measured in selected units. 10 is the default. Use the previous
table for values. The column specified in the constant text, bitmap, line, or box
field is added to the col value above to determine the actual position in the
format.
Imaging mode. Enter 0.
The orientation of the graphic on the supply. Enter 0.
G,57,0,0,0,0 |
Defines a graphic field that is identified by the number 57. The image begins at 0,0. The imaging
mode is 0 and there is no rotation.
5-12 Packet Reference Manual
Sample Compliance Label
This sample format packet uses the graphic packet in “Creating a Graphic Packet.”
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"RDCI" |
G,57,0,0,0,0 |
T,1,15,V,529,252,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,2,15,V,511,252,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
B,3,13,V,311,28,8,4,50,8,L,0 |
B,4,14,V,17,60,50,5,110,8,L,0 |
T,5,30,V,161,080,0,3,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,6,15,V,467,40,4,1,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,7,10,V,462,330,6,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,8,20,V,545,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,9,30,V,446,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,10,30,V,426,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,11,30,V,406,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,12,20,V,368,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,13,5,V,335,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,14,15,V,304,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,15,15,V,366,65,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
R,1,"(420)" | }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,1,N,1 |
1,"123456789" |
2,"987654321" |
3,"42032678" |
4,"10028028662854" |
5,"1 00 28028 66285 4" |
6,"RODGER DIST CTR" |
7,"8292" |
8,"BROADWAY" |
9,"555 WEST OAK AVE." |
10,"DAYTON, OH 45401-0608" |
11," " |
12,"999991-001" |
13,"AR" |
14,"999-999999-99" |
15,"32678" | }
Creating Graphics 5-13
Sample Bitmap Graphic Image
The following format shows the graphic packets (hex and run length) in a sample format.
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"FMT2" |
G,99,227,35,0,0 |
Q,240,15,300,125,10," " |
T,1,5,V,285,137,0,10,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,2,5,V,255,137,0,10,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,3,15,V,180,25,0,10,1,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,4,15,V,121,35,0,1,3,1,B,L,0,0,0 |
L,S,94,15,94,235,10,"" |
B,5,12,F,50,65,1,2,40,1,L,0 | }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,2,N,1 |
1,"Pat’s" |
2,"Parts" |
3,"3/8 inch Wire" |
4,"3.55/8 Pack" |
5,"345911871209" | }
5-14 Packet Reference Manual
PRINTING
6
This chapter describes how to
♦
download files to the printer
♦
define the batch header, batch control, and batch data files
♦
create DOS batch files.
This chapter also lists some special printing considerations.
Turn on the printer and make sure it is ready to receive data before you download. See your
host’s documentation, system administrator, or “Downloading Methods” for information on ways to
download.
When downloading, send your packets in this order:
1.
Memory configuration packet (M)
2.
Configuration packets (A-X)
3.
Any of the following:
♦ Check digit packets (see Chapter 4)
♦ Format packets (see Chapter 3)
♦ Graphic packets (see Chapter 5)
4.
Batch data (see “Defining the Batch Header”)
Downloading Files
To download from a PC:
1.
Check that the PC and the printer are connected.
2.
Check that communications have been established between the PC and the printer.
3.
Send the communication settings packet to select the printer’s communication settings. See
“Defining the Communication Settings Packet” in Chapter 2 for more information (only used
for serial communication). If you change the printer’s communication settings, make sure they
match those at the host before sending any packets to the printer.
4.
Type this command at the DOS prompt:
COPY LABEL1.FMT COM1 Transmits a file called “LABEL1.FMT” to COM1.
COPY LABEL1.BCH COM1 Transmits a batch called “LABEL1.BCH” to COM1.
If you use the COPY command to download your formats, set flow control to DTR (not
XON/XOFF). Also, do not use the MS-DOS prompt from inside W indows, because you will get a
framing error.
Refer to the Operator’s Handbook or keyboard’s Operating Instructions for offline data entry and
more printing information. We do not recommend entering more than 100 characters in offline
mode.
Printing 6-1
About Batch Packets (Print Jobs)
A batch packet containing batch data is required for all print jobs.
Batch data is the actual information printed on the supply. Batch data fills in the format’s text, bar
code, and non-printable text fields.
A batch packet consists of the following:
batch header
identifies the format and how many labels to print. For example:
batch control
defines the print job. For example:
batch data
(optional)
defines the information printed on the label. For example:
{B,1,N,1|
E,0,1,1,1,3,0,0,0,1|
1,”Size 5” | }
Label Design software may create this packet for you.
To record batch data, make a copy of the worksheet in Appendix D, “Format Design Tools.”
Defining the Batch Header
The batch header specifies which format the batch uses and how many labels to print.
Syntax
{B,format#,N/U,quantity |
B1. B
B2. format#
B3. N/U
B4. quantity
Example
Batch Header.
Format number (1 to 999) to use. 1 is the default.
Controls how image is generated. N is the default.
N New. Erase image and re-image all fields using online data. Any
missing fields will be blank.
U Update last image with one or more fields. All other fields remain
the same
as the last queued batch.
Quantity to print (0 to 32000). 1 is the default. Using 0 pre-images the field to
reduce the imaging time for labels. See “Batch Quantity Zero Method” for more
information.
{B,1,N,1 |
Defines a batch header that uses format #1 and reimages all fields using the online data. One
label is printed with this batch.
6-2 Packet Reference Manual
Defining the Batch Control Field
The batch header must precede this field. The batch control field defines the print job and applies
only to the batch that immediately follows.
Syntax
E,feed_mode,batch_sep,print_mult,multi_part,cut_type,
cut_mult,ver_mode,cable_det |
E1. E
E2. feed_mode
Batch Control Field.
Feed Mode. 0 is the default. Options:
0 Continuous Feed
1 On-Demand
Batch Separator (striped label in between batches). 0 is the default. Options:
0 Does not print a separator
1 Prints a separator
2 Double-length separator – prints 2 tags (9855)
E3. batch_sep
Note: Do not use batch separators with continuous (non-indexed) supply. If
using a stacker, the batch separator is always 3.66 inches long.
E4. print_mult
E5. multi_part
E6. cut_type
Number of tags (1 to 999) with the same image. 1 is the default.
Number of identical parts on one tag (1 to 5). 1 is the default.
Enables or disables the knife. Not all the printers s upport a knife. See the
following chart for more information. 0 (does not cut) is the default. Options:
0 Does not cut (default)
1 Cuts before, during, and after last tag - printed tag(s) left between
printhead & knife.
2 Cuts in strips, not each tag - printed tag(s) left between printhead & knife.
3 Cuts before, during, and after last tag - no printed tags left
between printhead & knife.
4 Does not cut before first tag, cuts each tag and after the last tag - printed
tag(s) left between printhead & knife.
5 Cuts in strips, not each tag - no printed tags left between printhead & knife.
Recommended Settings for optimal
performanc e w ith:
Desc ription of cut mode o peration
Cut Cut Be fore
M ode first tag in
Bat ch?
*
Cut Be tw een
Tag s?
Cut Af ter
Batch?
Straight Edge Tags
Edge Ape rtur e Tags
Extended
Verifier
backfeed Overs trike
Extended
Verifier
backfeed Overs trike
0
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
1
Yes
Yes
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Yes
No
(Feeds strips)
Yes*
Yes
Yes
No
No
3
Yes
Yes
Yes**
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
4
No
Yes
Yes*
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
5
Yes
No
(Feeds strips)
Yes**
Yes
Yes
No
No
The last tag in the batch is queued to be cut once it reaches the knife; however, there may be printed tags left
between the printhead and the knife. The user mus t press Feed/Cut or send another batch to feed the last tag
out far enough to be cut.
** The printer feeds the last tag in the batch out far enough to be cut. No user intervention is
required to cut the last tag.
Printing 6-3
Note: Using "overstrike/continue" as the Error Action minimizes the number of RFID
tags left between the printhead and the knife. To use the least amount of RFID
tags, set overstrike to five.
E7. cut_mult
Note: The last tag in the batch is always cut,
regardless of the multiple.
Example
F ee d
Number of tags to print before cutting.
A cut multiple of one cuts after each tag.
The range is 0 to 32,000. 0 is the default.
The cut multiple is a multiple of the print
quantity. If the cut multiple is three and the
print quantity is 16, then five sets of three tags
and one set of one tag is produced.
Edge
Ap e rtu re
Straight
Edge
E8. ver_mode
Verifier Mode. Enables or disables the verifier.
For more information about enabling the verifier, refer to the Verifiers Operating
Instructions. Not all the printers support a verifier. 0 is the default. Options:
0 Disable verifier - not using a verifier
1 Enable verifier
E9. cable_det
Verifier cable detect. The printer can be set to detect when a verifiers cable is
disconnected. For more information about connecting the verifiers cables, refer to
the Verifiers Operating Instructions. 0 is the default. Options:
0 The printer does not detect when a cable is disconnected (default)
1 I/O cable is disconnected
2 I/O and/or data cables are disconnected
E,0,1,4,2,1,4,1,2 |
Defines a batch control field. Continuous feed mode is used and a separator prints between
batches. Four tags have the same image and there are two identical parts on one tag. The knife
cuts after every four tags. A verifier is enabled and the printer detects when either the I/O or data
cables are disconnected.
Defining Batch Data Fields
Batch data fields should be sent in field number order. Use continuation fields for large amounts
of data. If you are using N (New) in the batch header, you must list all fields with your data in
sequence. If you are using U, you need to list only those fields and data that changes from the
last printed batch.
Syntax
field#,"data string" |
C,"continuation" |
field#
“data string”
C
“continuation”
Example
Identifies the text, bar code, or non-printable text field in which to insert the
following data. Range: 1 to 999.
Provides the actual information to appear in fields. Enclose in quotation marks.
Length: 0 to 2710 characters. “” is the default.
Identifies information to be appended to the data string. This parameter is
optional.
Provides the actual information to be added to the batch packet. Enclose in
quotation marks. Use this option to break up longer fields. Length: 0 to 2710
characters. “” is the default. This parameter is optional.
1,"Size 12" |
2,"" |
3,"Blue" |
C,"and this would be appended." |
Defines a batch data field. “Size 12" prints in field #1, a blank line appears in field #2, ”Blue and
this would be appended" prints in field #3.
Merged or Sub-Fields
If a field is completely filled by data copied from other fields, use quotation marks without spaces
between them for the “data string” parameter.
6-4 Packet Reference Manual
Incrementing Fields
In incrementing fields, the first number in the sequence must contain the same number of digits
as the highest number to be counted. For example, to increment the numbers in a field from 1 to
999, enter the starting number in the batch as 001.
Using Gen2 RFID Data (9855 RFMP Printer Only)
The 9855 RFMP printer supports C1Gen2 RFID data, which contains these fields:
♦ EPC Data
The printer accepts EPC data following the guidelines in the EPCglobal  Tag
Data Standards Specification, which conforms to the EPC Radio-Frequency
Identity Protocols Class 1 Generation 2 UHF RFID Protocol for Communications
at 860-960MHz Standards (RFID Air Interface protocol). Refer to the EPC
Specification to create valid EPC data.
♦ User
Memory
Many different RFID supplies (tags) are available and the amount of
programmable user memory varies with the chip embedded in the tag.
Depending on your tag type, all memory fields may not be available. Refer to the
Monarch® RFID Printer Setup Utility
(http://www.servisource1.com/prnutil/rfidsetup/) for details about the available
user memory for each chip.
♦ TID Field
Tag
Identifier
A portion of the TID field contains a unique number that identifies the
manufacturer of the tag. This field is readable and writable.
♦ Access
Password
Controls when new data can be written to a field.
♦ Kill
Password
Sets a tag up to be inoperable.
♦ Lock
Code
Contains the locking method for each field. There are four locking methods:
Printing 6-5
Value
EPC Lock
Description
0
No lock
(unsecure)
The selected memory fields (EPC, user memory,
access password and kill password) are readable and
writable. The tag can be programmed multiple times.
1
Permalock
(permanently
unsecure)
Permanently locked in a writable state. The tag can
be programmed multiple times.
User memory and kill password are also readable in
this state.
2
Password lock
(secure)
Requires the access password to rewrite the selected
memory fields. The tag can be programmed multiple
times with the password.
EPC and user memory are writable with password
and readable.
Access password is never readable.
Kill password is only writable with password.
3
Permalock and
Password lock
(permanently
locked)
Never rewritable, but always readable. The tag can
never be rewritten, once locked.
EPC and user memory are never rewritable, but are
readable.
Access password and kill password are never
readable or rewritable.
Note: The EPC field is always readable, no matter what locking method is assigned.
To use Gen2 data, modify the RFID Field’s batch data.
Syntax
field#,"EPC_data~028" |
C,"User_Mem~028" |
C,"TID_Mem~028" |
C,"Acs_Pwd~028" |
C,"Kill_Pwd~028" |
C,"Lock_Code" |
field#
"EPC_data~028"
Identifies the RFID Data Field number for the following data. Range: 1 to
999. 1 is the default.
EPC data. Enclose in quotation marks. To create EPC data, follow the
guidelines in the EPC Global Generation 1 Tag Data Standards Specification.
The data must be in ASCII Hex format specified in the RFID Data Field
(data_type). The data must end with the ASCII field separator (decimal 028).
Note: Do not enter more characters than the available EPC data.
Using version 7.1 or greater firmware, the printer increments EPC data.
C,"User_Mem~028"
C,"TID_Mem~028"
C,"Acs_Pwd~028"
6-6 Packet Reference Manual
User Memory. Enclose in quotation marks. The amount of programmable
user memory varies with the tag types. Refer to the Monarch® RFID Printer
Setup Utility for details about the available user memory for each chip.
The printer programs up to 512-bits of data (128 ASCII Hex characters). The
data must be ASCII Hex c haracters and end with the ASCII field separator
(decimal 028).
TID Memory. Reserved for future use. Only include the field separator
(decimal 028) in this field.
Access Password. This must be 8 ASCII Hex characters. No password is
assigned if this field is left blank. The data must end with the ASCII field
separator (decimal 028).
C,"Kill_Pwd~028"
C,"Lock_Code"
Notes:
Kill Password. This must be 8 ASCII Hex characters. No password is
assigned if this field is left blank. The data must end with the ASCII field
separator (decimal 028).
Five-digit locking method for each field in this order:
EPC Data, User Memory, TID, Access password, and Kill password.
Use 0 for the reserved field. Locking options:
0
No Lock (unsecure)
1
Permalock (permanently unsecure)
2
Password lock (secure)
3
Permalock & password lock (permanently locked)
Use only one locking method per field.
The printer is not capable of unlocking a field. Depending on the locking
method used for each field, the EPC data may be programmable by sending
the access password with the batch data. See “Sample RFID Data Fields”
in Appendix A for more information.
Do not use the ASCII file separator character (1C) in RFID batch data.
Example
F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"PERMLOCK" |
X,1,100,0 |
B,2,N,1 |
1,"313233343536373831323334~028" |
C,"ABCDEF~028" |
C,"~028" |
C,"73737373~028" |
C,"CAD01234~028" |
C,"11001" | }
The EPC data is 313233343536373831323334, the user memory data is ABCDEF, the access
password is 73737373, and the kill password is CAD01234. Selects permalock (1) as the locking
method for the EPC, user memory, and kill field. Selects no lock (0) for the access password
field. The EPC, user memory, and kill fields are permanently readable/writable.
Entering Batch Data for QR Code
QR Code requires certain parameters at the beginning of all batch data.
Syntax
"error_cor mask# data_input,char"
error_cor
Level of error correction. Some damaged or dirty bar codes may still be scannable
if the error correction is high enough. Options:
H Ultra high reliability level
Q High reliability level
M Standard level
L High density level (more data in the bar code)
Note: As you increase the error correction level, the maximum number of
characters (in the field) decreases.
mask#
Mask number. Undefined. Use 0.
data_input
Type of data input. Options:
A Automatic
M Manual
Note: When using Automatic, do not end with a comma or specify the next
parameter for char (type of characters).
char
Type of characters. This parameter is only required when data_input is Manual.
Options:
A Alphanumeric
B Binary
K Kanji
N Numeric
Note: In binary mode, the number of characters must be represented by the 4digit number in decimal.
Printing 6-7
Example
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"QRURL" |
B,2,200,V,75,50,36,0,100,2,B,0 | }
{B,1,N,1 |
2,"LA testdatainAutomode0987654321" | }
Defines the following batch data for the QR Code: the error correction level is L, which provides
high density (more data in bar code). Leave the mask number blank. The data input mode is
Automatic and the data is testdatainAutomode0987654321.
Example
1,"HM,N0123456789012345" |
Defines the following batch data for the QR Code: The error correction level is H, which provides
very high reliability. Leave the mask number blank. The data input mode is Manual. The type of
characters are Numeric and the data is 0123456789012345.
Structured Append Mode
QR Code offers a mode called structured append (or concatenated) that allows you to collect
data from multiple QR Code symbols and use that data elsewhere. For example, the components
of a sub-assembly can have individual QR Codes and the QR Code for the entire assembly
contains all the data from the individual codes. This mode also requires certain parameters at the
beginning of all batch data.
Syntax
"mode_id code# #of_div parity, error_cor mask#
data_input char"
mode_id
Mode identifier. Use D to indicate the structured append (or concatenated) mode.
code#
Code number of the individual symbol in the concatenated set. You must use a
two-digit number in decimal.
Total number of s ymbols in this concatenated set. You must use a two-digit
number in decimal.
Parity byte. You must use a two-digit number in hexadecimal. There is no
standard parity byte.
Level of error correction. Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the
error correction is high enough. Options:
H Ultra high reliability level
Q High reliability level
M Standard level
L High density level
#of_div
parity
error_cor
Note: As you increase the error correction level, the maximum number of
characters (in the field) decreases.
mask#
data_input
char
Mask number. Undefined. Leave blank or use 0.
Type of data input. W hen using Automatic, do not specify the next parameter for
char (type of characters). Options:
A Automatic
M Manual
Type of characters. This parameter is only required when data_input is Manual.
Options:
A Alphanumeric
B Binary
K Kanji
N Numeric
Note: In binary mode, the number of characters must be represented by the 4digit number in decimal.
Example
1,"D0205E9,Q0A," |
C,"B006qrcode," | }
6-8 Packet Reference Manual
Defines the structured append mode (D) for QR Code. This is symbol (02) of a concatenated set
containing (05) symbols. The parity byte is E9. The error correction level is Q, which provides a
high reliability. Use 0 for the mask number. The data input mode is Automatic. The type of
characters are binary (B) and there will be six (06) data characters (qrcode).
Structured Append QR Code Packet
{F,2,A,R,E,200,200,"QRCODE2" |
B,1,200,V,50,50,36,0,100,2,B,0 | }
{B,2,N,1 | 1,"D0202E9,Q0A" |
C,"0123456789ABCD+__âôû
~129~064~159~252~224~064" | }
Using Special Characters in Batch Data
There are two ways to specify special characters in batch data:
♦
Place a tilde (~) before each character
♦
Use a tilde with the decimal ASCII equivalent
For example, you can use “” or ~034 to print the “ character in your batch data; otherwise, the
tilde characters are ignored. You can also use ~XXX where XXX is the decimal equivalent of an
unprintable character.
Sample Batch Data w ith Special Characters
{B,1,N,1 |
Decimal Character
What Prints
1,"123~034456789" |
~034 is “
123"456789
2,"~094983~’126LG4451" |
~094 is ^~126 is ~
^983~’LG4451
Special 9855 Printing Considerations
Keep in mind the following special printing considerations when using a 9855 printer.
Print
Speed
Printing
Printhead
Density
Knife
Peel Mode
Verifier
2.5/4.0/6.0
ips
Direct
Transfer
203/300 dpi
supported
supported
supported
8.0 ips
Direct
Transfer
203/300 dpi
not supported
supported
supported
10.0 ips
Direct
Transfer
203 dpi only
not supported
not supported
supported
12.0 ips
Direct
Transfer
203 dpi only
not supported
not supported
supported
Notes: The minimum label feed length is 0.75 inches using 8, 10, or 12 ips printing.
94x5 emulation is not supported using 300 dpi.
The maximum supply and image length with the optional 300 dpi printhead is 12.0 inches
(305 mm).
The recommended print speed using linerless supplies is 2.5 or 4.0 ips.
Contact your Sales Representative for supply requirements in high temperature and high
humidity environments.
Printing 6-9
Serial Bar Code Printing Information
Keep in mind the following serial bar code printing information when using a 9855 printer.
Print Speed
Printhead Density
Minimum Bar Code Narrow Element
2.5 ips
203/300 dpi
Less than 3 dots
4.0 ips
203 dpi
3 dots
6.0/8.0/10.0 ips
203 dpi
4 dots or more
Downloading Methods
You can download the format and batch data using one of three methods: sequential, batch, and
batch quantity zero.
Sequential Method
Using the sequential method, send all format and batch data at one time. Use this method when
your application does not require operator intervention to input data. All data is sent down at one
time, and the printer then images each field. As soon as the last field is imaged, your labels
begin to print.
Example
{Format}
{Batch Packet}
Batch Method
This is similar to the sequential method, but it is used when you want to send multiple batches.
All data for the first batch is sent at one time, and the printer then images each field. As soon as
the last field for the first batch is imaged, labels begin to print. This process is repeated for each
subsequent batch.
Example
{Format}
{Batch Packet}
{Batch Packet}
Batch Quantity Zero Method
You may use the batch quantity zero method when your application requires operator intervention
to enter data. While the operator is entering data, the previous field is sent with a batch quantity
of zero. The printer images the field, but does not print it. After the operator enters the data for
the last field, the batch quantity can be specified. The last remaining field is imaged, and the
label prints almost immediately.
To use the batch quantity zero method:
1.
Send the format and a batch header in one file. The first time you send the batch header, use
the parameter N (new batch), and the parameter 0 for (zero quantity). This ensures the label
is properly positioned.
The printer images constant text, line, and box fields, but does not print them.
2.
Input data for each field, and send it with a batch header using the parameter U (batch
update) and a quantity of zero. When the printer receives the data, it immediately images the
field, but does not print it.
At this time, the printer is imaging all associated fields, including fields that copy from
other fields.
3.
Repeat step 2 for each field except the last one.
6-10 Packet Reference Manual
4.
For the last field, input data and send a batch header with the quantity of labels you want
printed. W hen the printer receives input for the last field, it immediately prints the labels. See
“Reducing Imaging Time” in Chapter 9 for an example using the batch quantity zero method.
Modifying Formats
The optional entry method is a quick way to modify your format fields, check digit fields and
configuration packets.
Optional Entr y Method
This method enables you to reset only the parameters you want to change. Commas act as
placeholders for unchanged parameters. The optional entry method reduces file size and
increases the speed at which files are sent to the printer.
Creating DOS Batch Files for Downloading
If you are downloading from an MS-DOS system, you can create batch files to set communication
values and download formats. It is a good idea to create a subdirectory to hold your format files.
Here is a DOS batch file that sets a serial port, changes to a subdirectory, and downloads a
check digit file, format file, and batch data file.
MODE COM1: 9600,N,8,1,|
CD\MONARCH
COPY LABEL1.CDS COM1
COPY LABEL1.FMT COM1
COPY LABEL1.BCH COM1
Refer to your DOS manual for more information on creating batch files.
Printing 6-11
6-12 Packet Reference Manual
S TAT U S P O L L I N G
7
This chapter explains how to use status polling.
There are two types of Status Polling:
♦
Inquiry Request—information about the readiness of the printer.
♦
Job Request—information about the current (or last received) job downloaded to the printer.
Inquiry Request (ENQ)
An ENQ character acts as a request for printer status information. You can send an ENQ in front
of, in the middle of, or immediately following any packet downloaded to the printer. An ENQ is a
command that can be executed as part of a packet or sent on its own (using a communications
program). An ENQ is processed immediately. The ENQ character is user defined.
The ENQ character does not appear as a visible character; however, we are representing the
ENQ character as .
Inquir y Response
Printer status is returned to the host in a 3-byte (3-character) sequence. The first byte is the
non-printable user-defined ENQ character, which is not visible on the response. The second and
third bytes are printer status codes. See the ENQ Reference Tables for the meaning of bytes 2
and 3.
Example:
AB
The status codes (A and B in this case) are ASCII equivalents to the hexadecimal bits that
represent the various types of status responses. This response indicates that the printer is
online (Character A) and that there is a stock fault (Character B).
Example:
??
Indicates that this is the first ENQ response since the printer was turned on. Send another ENQ
immediately to receive the printer’s status.
Example:
@@
Indicates the printer is offline.
The following graphics can be used as a quick reference for the Status of Byte #2 and Byte #3.
Byte #1 is the non-printable user-defined ENQ character.
Status Polling 7-1
ENQ Reference Table - Byte #2
Char
Const.
OFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
@
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
A
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
B
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
C
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
D
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
E
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
F
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
G
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
H
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
I
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
J
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
K
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
L
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
M
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
N
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
O
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
P
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
Q
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
R
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
S
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
T
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
U
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
V
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
W
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
X
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
Y
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
Z
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
[
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
\
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
]
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
^
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
_
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
`
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Note:
Const.
ON
Comp.
Failure
Corr.
Error
Online
Data Error
Busy
Active
A “1" indicates the bit is turned on. A ”0" indicates the bit is off.
7-2 Packet Reference Manual
Online
ENQ Reference Table - Byte #2 (continued)
Char
Const. OFF
Const. ON
Comp.
Failure
Corr. Error
Online Data
Error
Busy
Active
Online
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
a
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
b
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
c
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
d
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
e
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
f
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
g
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
h
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
i
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
j
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
k
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
l
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
m
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
n
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
o
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
p
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
q
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
r
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
s
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
t
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
u
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
v
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
w
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
x
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
y
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
z
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
{
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
|
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
}
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
~
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Dec 127
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note:
A “1" indicates the bit is turned on. A ”0" indicates the bit is off.
Status Polling 7-3
ENQ Reference Table - Byte #3
Char
Const. OFF
Const. ON
Low Battery
Format
Error
Waiting to
Dispense
Label
Ribbon
Fault
Stock Fault
Online Error
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
@
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
A
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
B
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
C
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
D
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
E
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
F
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
G
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
H
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
I
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
J
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
K
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
L
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
M
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
N
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
O
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
P
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
Q
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
R
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
S
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
T
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
U
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
V
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
W
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
X
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
Y
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
Z
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
[
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
\
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
]
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
^
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
_
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
`
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Note:
A “1" indicates the bit is turned on. A ”0" indicates the bit is off.
7-4 Packet Reference Manual
ENQ Reference Table - Byte #3 (continued)
Char
Const. OFF
Const. ON
Low Battery
Format
Error
Waiting to
Dispense
Label
Ribbon
Fault
Stock Fault
Online Error
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
a
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
b
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
c
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
d
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
e
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
f
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
g
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
h
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
i
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
j
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
k
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
l
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
m
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
n
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
o
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
p
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
q
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
r
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
s
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
t
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
u
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
v
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
w
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
x
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
y
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
z
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
{
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
|
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
}
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
~
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Dec 127
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note:
A “1" indicates the bit is turned on. A ”0" indicates the bit is off.
Status Polling 7-5
Job Request
A Job Request returns status information about the most recently processed print job. You can
send a job request after an ENQ or batch. You can send two levels of Job Requests:
♦
Numeric Error Codes Only (0, 1, or 2)
♦
Verbose (3 or 4)
Syntax
{J,#}
Field Type
Valid Options
Description
Identifier
J
Job Status Request
Request#
0
1
2
3
4
Returns ASCII coded strings or
numeric error codes
Example
Returns error number
Returns number of labels
printed in batch
{J,3}
The job response may not be immediate. If the printer has an error (out of supplies, ribbon
problem, etc.), is in pause mode, or has insufficient memory, correct the problem and then
resend the job request. If the problem is not corrected, no response is returned. If a formatting
error has occurred, the job request will return the status. The printer must first interpret the
format and batch data before returning the response.
Note:
You may need to press FEED/CUT before the job response is returned.
To clear an error, press ESCAPE/CLEAR. An ENQ can also clear errors numbered less than
500. Once the error is corrected, a job request can be sent. The printer cannot accept another
job request until the error is resolved.
Job Response
The Job Response varies, depending on the type of request sent to the printer. The following
syntax is the response for a Job 0, 1,or 2 request.
Syntax
{J,Status1,Status2,"FMT-1","BCH-2"}
Status1
These errors stop the print job. Examples include out of stock, supply faults,
or data formatting errors. These errors are numbered less than 24 on the
“Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table,” later in this chapter.
Status2
These are errors in the syntax of the MPCL data stream. Printing does not
stop, but the information may not print properly. These errors are numbered
greater than 24 on the “Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table,” later in this
chapter.
FMT-1/BCH-2
The format or batch number is returned.
Here is an example of a response returned to a J 0, 1, 2 request:
{J,8,0,"FMT-1","BCH-2"}
Indicates that a portion of the format extends off the tag in format 1, batch 2. Refer to the “Job
Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table” later in this chapter for brief explanations for J, 0, 1, 2 requests.
In the above example, refer to error 8 for an explanation.
7-6 Packet Reference Manual
The following syntax is the response for a Job 3 request. You may need to press FEED before
the job response is returned.
Syntax
{J,"Status1 A,B","Status2
A,B,C,D,E","FMT-1","BCH-2"}
“Status1 A,B”
Example
Status1 A contains the field number, in the format or batch, where an
error was found. If the error is not in the format or batch, a “0" is
returned.Status1 B contains an error number, which represents the
actual printer error. The error numbers can be found in Chapter 8,
“Diagnostics and Errors.”
{J,"2,612",}
2 is the field number where an error was found. 612 is the error number, indicating that data is
missing or does not match the format definition for that field.
Note:
Error numbers found in Status1 B, always have a value equal to or greater than 500.
These are considered very serious errors.
“Status2 A,B,C,D,E”
Status2 A contains the packet type, field type, field number, parameter,
and error number.
Status2APacket Type
represents the MPCLII packet that the error occurred on. The packet
could be Format (F), Batch (B), Check Digit (A), Graphic (G), or Font (W).
Status2BField Type
represents the MPCLII field that the error occurred on. If the packet has
no fields, Status2 A will be replicated. If the error occurs before the field
is identified a question mark is sent. Since the batch data is variable, a D
is sent to indicate data.
Status2CField Number
represents the field number within each packet. The packet header is the
first field and each subsequent field is indicated by the field separator.
Status2 DParameter
represents the parameter within the field that the error occurred. The
numbering begins after the field identifier.
Status2EError Number
is the error that coincides with the error numbers presented in Chapter 8,
“Diagnostics and Errors.”
“FMT-1/BCH-2"
The format or batch number is returned.
Note:
If more than one error occurred, only the most serious error is acknowledged.
Example
{J,"","F,B,4,6,33","FMT-1","BCH-2"}
Indicates that an error occurred on a bar code (B) field within a format (F) packet. The bar code
field is the fourth (4) field in the packet. The error occurred in the sixth (6) parameter of the field.
Error number 33 means the bar code density is invalid.
To clear an error, press ESCAPE/CLEAR. An ENQ can also clear errors numbered less than
500. Once the error is corrected, a job request can be sent. The printer cannot accept another
job request until the error is resolved.
Status Polling 7-7
The following syntax is the response for a Job 4 request.
Syntax
{J,printed,total,"FMT-1","BCH-2"}
Printed
Total
“FMT-1/BCH-2"
Example
the number of tags or labels remaining in the batch to print.
the total number of tags or labels to be printed in the current batch.
The format or batch number is returned.
{J,8,25,"FMT-3","Bch-2"}
8 out of 25 tags or labels are left to print from format number 3.
Use a Job Request 4 when printing in the on-demand mode with a large number of tags or labels
from a single batch. A Job Request 4 may not be accurate if tags or labels are printed in
continuous mode, because of the response time involved. A Job Request 4 is not useful in single
ticket batches (printing 1 of 1) or multiple single ticket batches.
Note:
A batch has to be printing when you send the job request. You cannot use this job
request on batches printing formats with incrementing fields.
Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 1 Codes)
Number
0
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
23
24
Meaning
No error
Stacker Fault
Supply problem
Hot printhead
Printhead open
Insufficient memory
Ribbon problem
Field number extends off tag
Field number has a bad font/bar code
Field number contains invalid data
Field number has a graphic missing
Invalid communication channel
Invalid file type
All communication channels are busy
Receive overrun error
Receive parity error
Receive framing error
Receive buffer full
Label waiting
Bad dots (verifier detected a failure)
Low battery
Memory configuration packet error
Numbers 25 through 50 are not currently in use.
7-8 Packet Reference Manual
Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 2 Codes)
Number
Meaning
51
Invalid command
52
Invalid separator value
53
Graphic not found
54
Format for batch not found
55
Quantity/Multiples out-of-range
56
Name descriptor too long
57
Invalid cut value
58
Invalid number-of-parts
59
Invalid orientation value
60
Invalid thickness value
61
Invalid text field
62
Invalid bar code file
63
Data string too long
64
Invalid data field
65
Row greater than stock length
66
Row greater than format length
67
Column greater than printhead width
68
Column greater than format width
69
Invalid label length
70
Invalid label width
71
Invalid increment/decrement value
72
Identifier out-of-range
73
No field to create format
74
Stop location of a line is out of range
75
Syntax error
80
Cannot use offline format for online batch
81
Cannot queue graphic batch
82
Cannot store online format
83
Cannot queue online batch
84
Cannot queue online clear command
Status Polling 7-9
Status Polling Considerations for Script Mode
The following table shows the effects of the I Packet and the printer’s front panel (or keyboard)
on status polling and immediate commands.
Status
Polling
Immediate
Commands
I Packet Printer
Configuration Packet
(inside the script or sent
online to the printer)
While Running in Script Mode ONLY
(set through printer’s front panel)
OFF (status polling not
enabled by I packet)
OFF (status polling
not enabled through
printer’s front panel)
OFF (status polling
enabled through printer’s
front panel)
ON (status polling
enabled by I packet)
OFF (status polling
not enabled through
printer’s front panel)
ON (status polling
enabled through printer’s
front panel)
OFF (immediate
commands not enabled
by I packet)
OFF (immediate
commands not
enabled through
printer’s front panel)
OFF (immediate
commands enabled
through printer’s front
panel)
ON (immediate
commands enabled by I
packet)
OFF (immediate
commands not
enabled through
printer’s front panel)
ON (immediate
commands enabled
through printer’s front
panel)
Disabled
Enabled
If status polling and immediate commands are NOT enabled through the I Packet, enabling status
polling and immediate commands at the printer’s front panel has NO effect.
7-10 Packet Reference Manual
DIAGNOSTICS AND ERRORS
8
This chapter explains how to
♦
print diagnostics labels
♦
reset the printer
♦
call Technical Support.
Before you call Service, print a test label. The label contains information to help diagnose
mechanical and setup problems.
This chapter also provides explanations of your printer’s errors. The errors are classified by type
and are listed in order. If you have trouble loading supplies or performing maintenance, refer to
the Operator’s Handbook.
Some errors numbered 400-438 and 500-574 are internal software errors. Errors numbered 703758 are supply errors. Follow the directions provided with the error description to correct the
problem. Errors numbered 900-999 are Hard Printer Failures. If you cannot clear an error, turn
off the printer, wait several seconds and then turn on the printer. Call Technical Support if you
receive any error message not listed in this chapter.
To clear a data error, press ESCAPE/CLEAR. If a formatting error occurs, the label prints; but
data may be missing. Correct the format or batch and resend them to the printer. If a data error
occurs, press FEED/CUT to queue and print an error label.
Printing a Test Label
1.
From the User Diagnostics menu, press the right arrow until you see
USER DIAG
Test Label
2.
Press ENTER/PAUSE.
The test label shows the model number, software version, total number of inches printed, voltage,
print contrast, printhead resistance, code page, MPCL control characters, ENQ and RS232
characters.
Note:
You can also print a test label by pressing the left arrow and the right arrow at the
same time. Hold for one second and release.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-1
Reading a Test Label
The first label shows the printer’s configuration by packet (A-X). See Chapter 2, “Configuring the
Printer” for more information. The lines beginning with M show the printers memory allocation,
which can be changed. The units for supply position, etc. are displayed in dots, even if you
entered them in English or Metric units.
The second label shows the model number, software version, total number of inches printed,
number of inches printed by current printhead, voltage, print contrast, printhead resistance,
number of bad dots, and installed options (see the following table). The test label for the 9855
printer shows an inch count for the high energy ribbon. The one-dot rule line at the bottom of the
test label indicates the vertical 0,0 point.
The third test label shows wireless and network settings if the printer has network capability.
Installed Options
Description
A
Network Control Language (NCL)
B
Battery
C
Cutter (Knife)
H
High Speed (12.0 ips)
L
Smart Relay
P
Peel mode
R
RS-232 option (Keypad)
S
Stacker
V
Verifier
If You Receive an Error Message
Any time you receive a message that is not described in this manual, or the recommended action
does not solve the problem, call Technical Support. Some errors are the result of communication
problems. In this case, reset your printer and reboot your computer. If you change any of the
online configuration packets, resend the format packet to the printer, so the configuration
changes take effect.
Reading an Error Label
An error label queues and prints when you press FEED/CUT after
a data error (0-499) occurs. The error label contains the packet
type, field type, line number, and error number. The packet and
field type return the first letter after the or | . A “?” is returned if
the letter cannot be determined. The line number refers to which
line in the packet the error occurs. The error number is the threedigit error code. Use this information to correct the format, batch,
font, check digit, graphic, or online configuration packet.
The first label shows an error in line 8, which is a constant text
field within the format packet. The error number is 18.
The second label shows an error in line 1 of the batch packet.
The error number is 101.
8-2 Packet Reference Manual
If the PC and Printer Are Not Communicating
If your PC is having trouble communicating with your printer, follow these steps:
♦
Check any messages that occur at the printer and at the computer. See the following error
message listing in this chapter for more information.
♦
Make sure you are using the correct printer cable.
♦ Make sure the cable is plugged into the correct port on the computer.
♦
Compare your printer’s communications settings (especially flow control) with the settings on
your PC. Your printer and PC communications should match. Print a test label to identify the
printer’s communication settings.
♦
Make sure the printer is online (ready to receive data).
If all of the above are correct, reset your printer. Try the function again. If you still can not
establish communications, call Technical Support.
Resetting the Printer
Sometimes, the printer receives mixed signals and loses its ability to communicate. If this
happens, reset the printer and attempt communication again. To reset the printer, turn off the
printer, wait 15 seconds, and turn it back on.
When you turn off the printer, all the information set through the online configuration packets (AM) is saved. See the sections in Chapter 2, “Configuring the Printer,” for more information about
each packet.
Calling Technical Support
Technical support representatives are available Monday through Friday during regular business
hours. Follow these steps before you call:
1.
Make sure your PC and printer are properly connected.
2.
Record any error messages that occurred.
3.
Recreate the problem, if you can.
4.
Check your port settings. Your problem may be corrected simply by changing the
communication settings.
5.
List any changes that have recently been made to the system. Try to record what you were
doing when the problem occurred.
6.
Reset your printer. For information on resetting your printer, see "Resetting the Printer."
7.
Reboot your computer. Refer to your computer documentation for specific instructions.
8.
Print a test label, see “Printing a Test Label” for more information.
Have the following information ready before you call: computer brand name and model, version
of DOS, printer model, other peripheral devices on your system, support agreement, contract
number, or invoice information, customer number, and printer serial number.
Additional Diagnostics Information
For detailed printer diagnostics information, refer to the Operator’s Handbook. See Chapter 7,
“Status Polling,” for information on requesting printer and job status. See the following error
message listing in this chapter for more information.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-3
Data Errors
Call Technical Support if you receive any error message not listed below.
Errors 001 to 499 are data errors. These errors are returned in response to a J,3 request. See
Chapter 7, “Status Polling,” for more information. A data error indicates that incorrect data was
received from the host, causing the printer to ignore the entire print job. After checking the
packet and correcting the problem, transmit the print job again.
The following is a list of data errors. These errors occur because data in the format, batch,
check digit, font, or graphic packet is invalid.
Format Errors
Error
Code
Description
001
Packet ID number must be 1 to 999.
002
Name must be 1 to 8 characters (excluding non-printable control characters) inside
quotes. The range is 1 to 256 characters for the 9855 XML-enabled printer.
003
Action must be A (add) or C (clear).
004
Print length is invalid. See “Defining the Format Header” in Chapter 3 for valid lengths.
005
Print width is invalid. See “Defining the Format Header” in Chapter 3 for valid widths.
006
Storage device must be F (Flash), R (volatile RAM), or T (temporary for graphics).
007
Unit of measure must be E (English), M (Metric), or G (Dots). See “Defining the Format
Header” in Chapter 3 for more information.
010
Field ID number is outside the range 0 to 999.
011
Field length exceeds 2710.
012
Row field position is greater than the maximum stock dimension. See “Defining Text
Fields” in Chapter 3 for valid row lengths.
013
Column field position is greater than the maximum stock dimension. See “Defining Text
Fields” in Chapter 3 for valid column widths.
014
Font style must be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 15, 16, 17, 18, 50, 56; or a valid downloaded
font selector. See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 or Appendix B, “Fonts,” for more
information.
015
Character rotation must be 0 (0 degree), 1 (90 degree), 2 (180 degree), or 3 (270
degree). See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.
016
Field rotation must be 0 (0 degree), 1 (90 degree), 2 (180 degree), or 3 (270 degree).
See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.
017
Field restriction must be V (variable) or F (fixed).
018
Code page/symbol set selection defined in the field must be 0 (Internal), 1 (ANSI), 100
(Macintosh), 101 (W ingdings), 102 (Unicode), 103 (BIG5 for Unicode), 104 (GB2312 for
Unicode), 105 (SJIS for Unicode), 106 (GB2312), 107 (BIG5), 110 (Unicode UTF-8), 437
(DOS Page 437), 850 (DOS Page 850), 852 (Latin 2), 855 (Russian), 857 (Turkish), 860
(Portuguese), 1250 (Latin 2), 1251 (Cyrillic), 1252 (Latin 1), 1253 (Greek), 1254
(Turkish), 1255 (Hebrew), 1256 (Arabic), 1257 (Baltic), or 1258 (Vietnamese). See
“Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.
020
Vertical magnification must be 1 to 7 or 4 to 255 (point size) for the scalable or
downloaded TrueType fonts.
8-4 Packet Reference Manual
Error
Code
Description
021
Horizontal magnification must be 1 to 7 or 4 to 255 (point size) for the scalable or
downloaded TrueType fonts.
022
Color must be A, B, D, E, F, N, O, R, S, T, or W. See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3
for more information.
023
Intercharacter gap must be 0 to 99 dots.
024
Field justification must be B (balanced), C (centered), E (end), L (left), or R (right). See
“Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.
025
String length is outside the range 0 to 2710.
030
Bar code height must be at least 19 (English), 48 (Metric), 38 (203 dpi Dots), 57 (300 dpi
Dots), or is not within the supply dimensions.
031
Human readable option must be
0
1
5
6
7
8
default
no CD or NS
NS at bottom, no CD
CD at bottom, no NS
CD and NS at bottom
no text
032
Bar code type is invalid. See “Defining Bar Code Fields” in Chapter 3 for valid options.
033
Bar code density is invalid. See “Defining Bar Code Fields” in Chapter 3 for the bar code
density chart.
034
GS1 DataBar type is invalid. See “Defining Bar Code Fields” in Chapter 3 for more
information.
035
GS1 DataBar separator height is invalid. See “Defining Bar Code Fields” in Chapter 3 for
more information.
036
GS1 DataBar segment width is invalid. See “Defining Bar Code Fields” in Chapter 3 for
more information.
040
Line thickness must be 0 to 99 dots.
041
Line direction must be 0, 90, 180, or 270.
042
End row is invalid. Line segment or box end row is defined outside of printable area.
043
End column is invalid. Line segment or box end column is defined outside of printable
area.
044
Dot pattern for line or box must be “”.
045
Line length is defined beyond the maximum length. See “Defining Line Fields” in
Chapter 3 for valid lengths.
046
Line type must be S (segment) or V (vector).
051
Imaging mode in the graphic header must be 0.
052
Data type in the RFID Data Field is invalid. See “Defining the RFID Data Field” in
Chapter 3 for more information.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-5
Batch Errors
Error
Code
Description
101
The format referenced by batch is not in memory.
102
Print quantity is outside the range 0 to 32000.
104
Batch mode must be N (new) or U (update).
105
Batch separator in a batch control field must be 0 (Off) or 1 (On).
106
Print multiple is outside the range 1 to 999.
107
Cut multiple is outside the range 0 to 999. Only valid for printers with a knife.
108
Multiple part supply is outside the range 1 to 5.
109
Cut type is outside the range 0 to 5.
110
Image rotation must be 0 (no rotation) or 1 (180° rotation) in the batch control field.
Option Errors
Error
Code
Description
200
Option number must be 1 - 7, 20, 21, 30, 31, 42, 50, 51, 52, 53, 60, 61, 62, or 64.
201
Copy length is outside the range 0 to 2710.
202
Copy start position must be 1 to 2710.
203
Destination start position must be 1 to 2710.
204
Source field must be 0 to 999.
205
Copy type must be 1 (copy after rules) or 2 (copy before rules).
206
Increment/Decrement selection must be I (increment) or D (decrement).
207
Incrementing start position must be 0 to 2710.
208
Incrementing end position must be 0 to 2710.
209
The incrementing amount must be 0 to 999.
210
Security value for a PDF-417 bar code must be 0 to 8. Correct the value and resend the
format to the printer.
211
Narrow element value is less than 1 or greater than 99. Correct the value and resend
the format to the printer.
212
Wide element value is less than 1 or greater than 99. Correct the value and resend the
format to the printer.
213
Dimension must be 1 to 30 for a column or 3 to 90 for a row on a PDF417 bar code.
214
Truncation code must be S (standard) or T (truncated bar code).
215
Aspect code must be C (columns) or R (rows).
216
Option definition must be S (set) or T (template).
217
Input device must be D (Default), H (Host), K (Keyboard), N (None), or S (Scanner).
218
Pad direction must be L (from left) or R (from right).
219
Pad character is outside the range 0 to 255.
220
Check digit selection must be G to generate check digit.
8-6 Packet Reference Manual
Error
Code
Description
221
Primary or secondary price format is outside the range 1 to 16.
222
Data type restriction is outside the range of 1 to 6.
223
Option is not valid for the field.
224
Bar code intercharacter gap must be 0 to 99 dots. (This is also known as the additional
character gap when using Option 50, Defining Bar Code Densities.)
226
Rule (option) Record Line xx. The upload device must be H (host) for Option 6.
Online Configuration Errors
Error
Code
Description
251
Power up mode must be 0 (online) or 1 (offline).
252
Language selection must be 0 (English), 1 (French), 2 (German), 3 (Spanish-ES), 4
(Japanese), 5 (Portuguese), 6 (Italian), 7 (Swedish), 8 (Spanish2-MX), 9 (Danish), 10
(Dutch), 11 (Finnish), or 12 (Norwegian).
253
Batch separator code in a system setup packet must be 0 (off), 1 (on) or 2 (double).
254
Slash zero selection must be 0 (standard zero) or 1 (slashed zero).
255
Supply type must be 0 (black mark), 1 (die cut), 2 (continuous), or 3 (aperture)
256
Ribbon selection must be 0 (direct), 1 (transfer), or 2 (high energy).
257
Feed mode must be 0 (continuous) or 1 (on-demand).
258
Supply position must be -300 to 300 dots.
259
Contrast adjustment must be -699 to 699 dots.
260
Print adjustment (position) must be -99 to 99 dots (9825) or -450 to 450 dots (9855).
261
Margin adjustment (position) must be -99 to 99 dots.
262
Speed adjustment must be 0 (default), 25 (2.5 ips), 40 (4.0 ips), 60 (6.0 ips), 80 (8.0
ips), 100 (10.0 ips), or 120 (12.0 ips). Speeds above 6.0 ips are available on the 9855
printer.
263
Primary monetary symbol must be 0 (None), 1 (Dollar), 2 (Pound), 3 (Yen), 4 (Deutsche
Mark), 5 (Franc), 6 (Peseta), 7 (Lira), 8 (Krona), 9 (Markka), 10 (Schilling), 11 (Rupee),
12 (Ruble), 13 (Won), 14 (Baht), 15 (Yuan), or 16 (Euro).
264
Secondary symbol selection must be 0 (none) or 1 (print secondary sign).
265
Monetary decimal places must be 0 to 3.
266
Character string length in the control characters packet must be 5 (MPCL control
characters) or 7 (ENQ/IMD command character).
267
Baud rate selection must be 0 (1200), 1 (2400), 2 (4800), 3 (9600), 4 (19200), 5 (38400),
6 (57600), or 7 (115200). Resend the communication settings packet.
268
Word length selection must be 0 (7 bits), or 1 (8 bits). Resend the communication
settings packet.
269
Stop bits selection must be 0 (1 bit), or 1 (2 bits). Resend the communication settings
packet.
270
Parity selection must be 0 (none), 1 (odd), or 2 (even). Resend the communication
settings packet.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-7
Error
Code
Description
271
Flow control selection must be 0 (none), 1 (DTR), 2 (CTS/RTS), or 3 (XON/XOFF).
Resend the communication settings packet.
272
Symbol set (code page) in the System Setup packet must be 0 (Internal), 1 (ANSI), 2
(DOS 437), 3 (DOS 850), 4 (1250- Latin 2), 5 (1251- Cyrillic), 6 (1252- Latin 1), 7 (1253Greek), 8 (1254- Turkish), 9 (1255- Hebrew), 10 (1256- Arabic), 11 (1257- Baltic), 12
(1258- Vietnamese), 13 (852- Latin 2), 14 (855- Russian), 15 (857- IBM Turkish), 16
(860- DOS Portuguese), 17 (Wingdings), 18 (Macintosh), 19 (Unicode), 20 (BIG5), 21
(GB), 22 (SJIS to SJIS), 23 (GB to GB), 24 (BIG5 to BIG5), 25 (KSC to KSC) or 26 (UTF8).
273
Cut adjustment must be -300 to 300 dots.
282
RS232 Trailer string is too long. Use a maximum of 3 characters.
283
ENQ Trailer string is too long. Use a maximum of 3 characters.
284
The buffer type must be D (Downloadable Fonts), F (Format), I (Image), R (Receive), T
(Transmit), or V (Scalable Fonts).
285
The storage device type in the memory configuration packet must be F (flash) or R
(volatile RAM).
286
The buffer size is invalid.
287
The printhead width must be 0.
288
The battery voltage must be 0 (15-volt battery) or 1 (12-volt battery).
289
The printer address specified in the communications settings packet must use exactly six
characters.
290
Action must be 0 (disable), 1 (enable), or 2 (extended) for the backfeed control packet or
the printer is active.
291
Dispense position must be 50 to 200 dots or the printer is active.
292
Backfeed distance must be 10 to 200 dots or the printer is active. The backfeed distance
can not be greater than the dispense position.
293
The skip index selection defined in the field must be 0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled). Correct
the packet and resend to the printer.
294
The verifier mode must be 0 (disable) or 1 (enable).
295
The verifier’s cable detect mode must be 0 (no detect), 1 (I/O cable detect), or 2 (I/O and
data cable detect).
296
Protocol must be 0 to 3. 0 is the only valid option for hardware version 00000003. See
“Defining the RFID Setup Packet” for more information.
297
Write attempts must be 1 to 5. 3 is the only valid option for hardware version 00000003.
See “Defining the RFID Setup Packet” for more information.
298
Read power must be -7 to 25 (-7 to 10 for Japan). Use 10 for hardware version
00000003. See “Defining the RFID Setup Packet” for more information.
299
Write power must be -7 to 27 (-7 to 10 for Japan) or -7 to 27 for hardware version
00000003. See “Defining the RFID Setup Packet” for more information.
300
Signal adjust must be 1 to 6. Use 2 for hardware version 00000003. See “Defining the
RFID Setup Packet” for more information.
301
Image rotation must be 0 (no rotation) or 1 (180° rotation).
8-8 Packet Reference Manual
Error
Code
Description
302
The hours in the time/date packet must be 0 to 23.
303
The minutes in the time/date packet must be 0 to 59.
304
The day in the time/date packet must be 1 to 31.
305
The month in the time/date packet must be 1 to 12.
306
The year in the time/date packet must be 0 to 99.
307
Read after write must be 0 (disable) or 1 (enable). See “Defining the RFID Setup
Packet” for more information.
308
Retry Printing must be 0 (Disabled) or 1 (Enabled). See “Defining the RFID Setup
Packet” for more information.
309
Singulate mode is invalid. Use 0.
Check Digit Errors
Error
Code
Description
310
Check digit scheme number must be 1 to 10.
311
Modulus must be 2 to11.
314
Check digit algorithm must be D (sum of digits) or P (sum of products).
Graphic Errors
Error
Code
Description
325
Duplicating direction must be 0 (insert after) or 1 (insert before) in duplicate fields for
graphics.
327
Amount of row adjustment must be 0 to 999 dots in duplicate fields for graphics.
328
Duplicate count must be 0 to 999.
340
Bitmap line encoding must be H (hex) or R (run length).
350
Font selector must be 1 to 9999.
351
Font data length must be 68 to 16384.
352
Insufficient font memory is available for the downloaded font.
380
Job request is outside the range 0 to 4.
400
The character immediately following { is invalid.
401
Internal software failure. Call Technical Support.
402
Field separator is not in the expected location.
403
Field separator was not found.
404
The number (greater than five digits/732,000), string (greater than 2710), or tilde
sequence (greater than 255) currently being processed is out of range.
405
Too many fields exist in the format. You cannot have more than 1000 fields in the
format. Lines, boxes, and constant text fields count as fields.
406
Parser error. Format or graphic is already in use. Make sure your packet is not missing
| or {} characters.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-9
Communication Errors
Error
Code
Description
409
The printer memory is full. Delete unnecessary formats or graphics from memory. If you
are using a graphic file that is very large, consider using another mapping method (such
as run length encoding) to reduce the required memory. To use flash memory, you must
format it first. See “Formatting Flash Memory” in Chapter 2 for more information.
410
Parity on the printer does not match the parity on the host. Check the parity setting
under SETUP options.
411
Framing error. The printer cannot communicate with the host. Make sure the host is
turned on, communication cables are connected correctly, port settings are correct, and
communications are active. Check the baud rate, word length, and stop bits to make
sure they match those at the host. Do not toggle between Microsoft® Windows® and
MS-DOS while using the COPY command, or you will receive a framing error. Exit
Windows before using the COPY command. Re-transmit the data.
412
There is a problem with flow control between the printer and the host. Make sure the
printer and the host flow control settings match (both are DTR or both are XON/XOFF).
If the error persists, call Technical Support.
413
Online receive buffer is full. Check your printer’s XON/XOFF or DTR SETUP values to
be sure there is not a flow control problem.
414
The internal keyboard buffer is full or you need a new keypad. Call Technical Support.
415
The buffer size you defined exceeds the total available in your machine.
416
Flash/PC board error. Call Technical Support.
417
Flash memory is full. Clear flash. Resend the format, graphic, and check digit packets.
If the error reappears, call Technical Support.
420
Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
421
Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
422
Duplicate internal name. Call Technical Support.
423
Internal software error. Call Technical Support.
424
Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
425
Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
426
Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
427
Format name is invalid. Valid name is 1 to 8 characters inside quotes or “” for a printerassigned name. Press ESCAPE and try to continue. If the error reappears, call
Technical Support.
428
Batch name is invalid or graphic not found. Press ESCAPE and try to continue. If the
error reappears, call Technical Support.
429
A field number appears more than once in a format.
430
The format uses a graphic or verifier configuration packet that cannot be found.
433
The batch references a field number that does not exist in the format.
497
An error occurred during the loop back test on the parallel port. Call Service.
499
An error occurred during the loop back test on the serial port. Call Service.
8-10 Packet Reference Manual
Data Formatting Failures
Formatting errors indicate that a field prints incorrectly. After you have checked the data stream
and corrected the data, retransmit the format and batch.
Note:
For errors 571-622, the batch still prints, but the field, font, bar code, or density may be
incomplete, missing or contain incorrect data.
Error
Code
Description
571
UPC or EAN bar code data length is invalid. The bar code data length in the batch does
not fit the format.
572
A copy field, padded field, or incrementing field length is invalid. The field length in the
batch does not fit the format or the field contains blanks. Or, the fixed length field does
not contain the specified number of characters.
573
Price field length is invalid. The price field length in the batch does not fit the format or
the field contains blanks.
574
No CD scheme or room for CD. The CD scheme in the batch does not fit the format or
the field contains blanks.
575
The graphic included in your format could not be found. Resend the graphic packet. If
the error persists, call Technical Support.
600
The printer could not image the batch, because the batch was refused. Call Technical
Support.
601
An error occurred while the batch was imaging. Resend the format, batch, font, and/or
any graphic packets. If the error persists, call Technical Support.
603
The batch was not found while imaging. Resend the batch packet. If the error persists,
call Technical Support.
611
Font, bar code or density is invalid. The font, bar code or density in the batch does not
fit the format.
612
The data in this line of the batch is either missing or does not match the format. This
error also occurs if the EPC Gen2 RFID data length is invalid. See “Using Gen2 RFID
Data” for more information.
613
Reference point off tag.
614
Portion of field off tag. There may be an invalid character in the packet. Make sure you
did not enter O for 0 (zero).
615
Bar code width is greater than 16 inches or the number of keywords for your PDF 417
bar code exceeds 928. Decrease the density or shorten the amount of data to print the
bar code.
616
A bad dot falls on a bar code and the dot cannot be shifted. A gray box is printed
instead of the bar code. However, 2D bar codes still print on the 9825 printer when bad
dots are present within the bar code field.
618
Magnification must be 1 to 7 or 4 to 255 (point size) for the scalable font.
619
The JIS (16-bit) code for Kanji is invalid.
620
Font and printhead dot density mismatch. A 300 dpi font is specified in the format, but a
203 dpi printhead is used in the printer or vice-versa. Check the font or change the
printhead to correct the error.
621
An error occurred opening the TrueType font file. Select a different font to download. If
the error message persists, call Technical Support.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-11
Error
Code
Description
622
Not enough memory to create the downloaded TrueType characters in the scalable fonts
buffer. Save the font into the printer’s flash memory instead. If the error message
persists, call Technical Support.
623
There are more than 10 bar codes on one label for the verifier to scan. Redesign the
format, disable scanning certain bar codes using Option 62, or disable the verifier.
Machine Faults
These errors occur when there is a problem with the printer.
Error
Code
Description
703
The printer sensed a calibration of different-sized black marks. Make sure the correct
supply is loaded.
704
Printer has not sensed a supply mark within the specified number of inches or out of
supplies. Check the
♦ supply tracking
♦ black mark sensor position
♦ supply marks
♦ supply roll for binding.
Press ESCAPE. If the error continues to appear, change the supply and/or clean
the supply sensor.
710
Band out of data. Call Technical Support.
711
UART receiving communication error (framing, parity, etc.). Call Technical Support.
712
Receiving failure or command overrun error. Call Technical Support.
713
Receiving failure or illegal command. Call Technical Support.
714
Receiving failure or undefined command. Call Technical Support.
730
A memory allocation error occurred during initialization.
RFID Errors
These errors occur when there is an RFID problem.
Note:
The printer does not recalibrate (feed a blank label) after any RFID error.
Error
Code
Description
715
Invalid data length/data mismatch. The data in the RFID Data Field has an incorrect
data length or there is a data type mismatch between selected data type and actual data
entered. See “Defining the RFID Data Field” for more information on the data length and
for selecting the appropriate data type for the data being entered. This error also occurs
if any of the Gen2 fields are invalid. Check with your System Administrator about your
format.
727
Duplicate TID fields. The printer detected two inlays within the programmable range with
the same TID. One inlay is defective and another inlay may have the wrong data
encoded – do not use the label that has an overstrike pattern. Check the Write power
setting.
728
Multiple Tag Error. The printer detected multiple inlays within the programmable range.
Re-check values from the Monarch® RFID Printer Setup Utility.
8-12 Packet Reference Manual
Error
Code
Description
729
Invalid Tag Type. The chip (inlay) embedded in your RFID supply does not support
serialized TID.
730
A memory allocation error occurred during initialization.
731
Backfeed error with a positive cut position defined for RFID. The tag is cut too short and
cannot backfeed to the correct inlay encoding position. Check or modify the backfeed
and cut position settings.
732
RFID Hardware Error. A non-RFID printer received a format containing an RFID Data
Field. Resend the format to an RFID printer.
733
The RFID tag is not in the programmable field with short-feed length RFID supplies.
Check supply loading. If you changed the supply, print or RFID position, make sure the
RFID tag was not moved out of the programmable range. Refer to the Monarch® RFID
Printer Setup Utility for more information.
734
The RFID tag is not programmed before the end of the label is reached. The program
cycle fails. Resend the batch to the printer.
735
RFID module hardware error. The RFID module may need to be replaced or has become
disconnected. Call Technical Support.
736
Invalid RFID command sent to the RFID module. The tag command is invalid.
737
Invalid RFID reader command sent to the RFID module. The reader setup command is
invalid.
738
Insufficient RFID power to read the TID field or program the RFID tag. There is a reader
or tag power level problem.
739
Missing specific tag. The printer cannot find the RFID tag identified by singulation.
Check supply loading or the RFID tag may be lost or defective.
740
Command, hardware, inventory, or memory allocation error. There may be an RFID
hardware or memory allocation error.
741
RFID tag missing. Tag not found in RF Field. The RFID tag was not found in the RF
Field (area inside the printer where RFID tag is programmed.) Check supply loading. If
you changed the supply or print position, make sure the RFID tag was not moved out of
the programmable range. Re-check values from the Monarch® RFID Printer Setup
Utility.
742
Tag erase failed. The RFID tag was found in the RF Field, but could not be erased. If
this error occurs consecutively, increase or decrease the write power setting by one. If
the write power is set too high, you may affect the data programmed in adjacent labels.
743
Program tag failed. The RFID tag was found in the RF Field, but could not be
programmed. If this error occurs consecutively, increase or decrease the write power
setting by one. If the write power is set too high, you may affect the data programmed in
adjacent labels. Re-check values from the Monarch® RFID Printer Setup Utility.
744
Tag locked fail. The RFID tag is unable to be programmed, because it is already locked.
This is considered a bad RFID tag.
746
Lock tag fail. The RFID tag has not been locked to prevent reprogramming. This is
considered a bad RFID tag.
747
Time out failure. Any RFID command (read, program, etc.) has failed to complete in the
maximum amount of allowed time.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-13
Machine Faults (Continued)
Error
Code
Description
748
Invalid data length/data mismatch from RFID interrogator module. The RFID interrogator
module found a problem with the data received from the printer. You may need a new
RFID printer or RFID module.
749
RFID verify fail. The RFID verification process failed after writing (programming) the tag.
This is considered a bad RFID tag.
750
Printhead is overheated. Turn off the printer to let the printhead cool. If the error
persists, call Technical Support.
751
Printer did not sense a black mark when expected. The supply may be jammed.
For errors 751-753, check the supply tracking, supply marks, black mark sensor position,
and supply roll for binding. Press ESCAPE/CLEAR and try to continue printing. If the
error continues to appear, change the supply
752
Printer sensed a mark in the wrong place.
753
Printer sensed a mark that is too long.
754
Printer has a ribbon problem. Check the ribbon for a jam or remove any slack by turning
the take-up reel clockwise. Load a new ribbon.
755
Printhead is open. Close the printhead before continuing. If the error persists, call
Technical Support.
756
The printer is out of supplies. Load supplies and/or clean the supply sensor.
757
Load supplies. The calibrated supply length differs by plus or minus .25 inches from the
format. Press FEED/CUT to print on the current supply or load new supply and press
ENTER/PAUSE.
758
Check supply. Either the supply is not seen, or the on-demand sensor is broken
(purchase optional). Check for a label jam. Clear the supply path or reload supplies.
This error may occur if you remove a label too quickly in on-demand mode. The printer
does not recalibrate after this error.
759
Knife is not moving. Call Technical Support.
760
Knife jam. Call Technical Support.
761
The stacker is full or jammed. Empty the stacker or clear the jam before continuing. The
printer does not recalibrate after this error.
762
Low Voltage. For DC-powered printers, recharge the external battery. For AC-powered
printers, check the power inlet where the printer is connected. The acceptable voltage
range is between 90-132 V R MS and 180-264 V R MS . If more or less power is received,
unpredictable results may occur.
763
Waiting to dispense label. Press FEED/CUT.
764
Verifier scan error (bad scan) on label when using normal (no overstrike) mode. Press
ESCAPE/CLEAR to clear the error and continue printing. Make sure you did not apply
Option 62 (do not scan a particular bar code) to all bar codes on a format.
765
The printhead has less than 8 bad dots. The printer can shift bar code fields to avoid
bad dots. You may need to press ESCAPE/CLEAR to continue printing. Print a test
label to confirm the number of bad dots.
766
Backfeed/overfeed error. There is a problem with the backfeed or overfeed distance.
767
Incorrect AD value. Call Technical Support.
8-14 Packet Reference Manual
Error
Code
Description
768
Printhead has more than 8 bad dots within the format area or is not connected. Make
sure the printhead is connected.
769
The printhead is not receiving enough volts. Call Technical Support.
770
The print motor is not ready. Call Technical Support.
771
The format specified by the application was not found. Reload your application and
format, and try again. If the problem continues, call Technical Support.
772
Verifier scan error (bad scan) on label or multiple labels in a row when using overstrike
and continue mode. Press ESCAPE/CLEAR to clear the error and continue printing.
773
Verifier Failure - the verifier is enabled, but not connected. The printer can detect if the
I/O and/or serial cables are connected to the verifier. Refer to your verifier’s Operating
Instructions for more information.
781
The voltage is too low. Call Technical Support.
782
The voltage is too high. Call Technical Support.
783
The printer is printing too fast for the verifier to accurately scan the bar codes. Increase
the bar code height in your formats or slow the print speed.
784
No power to stacker. Check connections between the stacker and the printer. Make
sure the printer is connected to an AC outlet.
785
The internal liner take-up reel is full. Remove the liner take-up reel and dispose of the
liner. Press ESCAPE/CLEAR to continue printing.
786
Internal liner take-up error. The liner has separated from the core or is not properly
winding on the core. Remove the liner from the take-up core and reload the liner into the
take-up core.
790
Wait until the printer is idle (no batch waiting to print or not receiving data) before you
send any packets. This error may occur when you try to print a test label if the printer is
busy.
791
The printer has an error pending. Turn off the printer. Wait 15 seconds and turn it back
on. Resend the packets. If the problem continues, call Technical Support.
792
The printer is not initialized. Call Technical Support.
793
The printer job queue is full. Turn off the printer. Wait 15 seconds and turn it back on.
Resend the packets. If the problem continues, call Technical Support.
794
The backfeed mode is not set.
795
Print engine lock-up. Call Technical Support.
796
No job quantity for the job setup. If this error message appears, call Technical Support.
797
No sub-job quantity for the job setup. If this error message appears, call Technical
Support.
799
Job quantity mismatch. If this error message appears, call Technical Support.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-15
Script Errors
These errors occur when there is a script (application) problem.
Error
Code
Description
850
Invalid script packet or not enough flash memory for the script. The script download
failed. Format flash memory and download the script using the COPY command from
DOS or the ADK2 software.
851
Invalid lookup table or not enough flash memory for the script. The lookup table
download failed. Check the data in the lookup table. Format flash memory and
download the script using the COPY command from DOS or the ADK2 software.
852
Invalid buffer definition packet or not enough flash memory for the script. One or more
of the following buffers were invalid: input buffer, temporary buffer, lookup buffer,
printer, or array buffer. Check the buffer definitions. Format flash memory and
download the script using the COPY command from DOS or the ADK2 software.
853
Invalid version string or not enough flash memory for the script. The version information
in the APPVERSION command is missing or invalid. Make sure the information is
enclosed in double quotation marks. Format flash memory and download the script using
the COPY command from DOS or the ADK2 software.
854
Invalid table (string and numeric) data or not enough flash memory for the script. Check
the data. Format flash memory and download the script using the COPY command from
DOS or the ADK2 software.
855
Invalid start/clear command. The script is missing the start or clear command
{S space}.
856
Invalid quit command. The script is missing the quit command {Q space}.
857
Illegal command in the script. Your script may include commands that have been
removed from the ADK2 scripting language.
858
Check sum error. Each packet has a four-digit checksum at the beginning of the packet.
Compile the script again using the ADK2 software.
859
Script download buffer overflow. The image buffer is used as the SCRATCH buffer.
Increase the size of the image buffer.
Hard Printer Failure Errors
Errors numbered 930-940 are errors that may occur during the loading of flash memory. Errors
numbered 950-999 may indicate a circuit board failure. These errors are hard printer failures.
Call Technical Support if you receive these messages.
Error
Code
Description
900
RAM test failure.
901
ROM/EPROM checksum failure.
902
Software timer failure.
903
Software interrupt failure.
905
Illegal interrupt.
906
Non-maskable interrupt. Check format packet for font clear or format clear packets.
907
Low RAM error.
908
Non Volatile RAM checksum failure.
8-16 Packet Reference Manual
Error
Code
Description
909
NVRAM reset.
910
Warm restart.
911
Version string mismatch.
930
Flash erase error.
931
Flash write error.
932
RAM write error.
933
Parity error.
934
Framing error.
935
Buffer overrun.
936
Invalid record type.
937
Invalid hex data.
938
Invalid checksum.
939
Invalid record count.
940
Invalid flash address.
Errors numbered 900-911 occur when you turn on the printer. They may indicate a circuit board
failure. Errors numbered 930-940 are errors that may occur during the loading of flash memory.
Errors numbered 950-999 indicate a circuit board failure. Call Technical Support if you receive
any of these messages.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-17
When a HARD failure occurs on the printer, the printer displays WARNING or POWER DOWN on
the top line of the keypad display. If this happens, record the displayed message and turn off the
printer. If the problem reoccurs when you turn the printer on again, call Technical Support. If the
problem does not reoccur after you turn your printer on again, reset your printer’s SETUP
options. Retransmit your packets.
Printer
Display
Description
WARNING
RAM Test Failure
RAM check failed on power up. Reset your SETUP options.
Retransmit your packets.
POWER DOWN
ROM Sum Failure
ROM checksum test failed.
POWER DOWN
Timer Failure
Timer test failed.
POWER DOWN
Intr Test Failure
Interrupt test failed.
POWER DOWN
Low System RAM
Not enough RAM for system. Reset your SETUP options. Retransmit
your packets.
POWER DOWN
Illegal Intr#
Illegal interrupt occurred.
POWER DOWN
NMI Received
Non-maskable interrupt occurred. Reset your SETUP options.
Retransmit your packets.
POWER DOWN
Low Appl RAM
Not enough RAM for application. Reset your SETUP options.
Retransmit your packets.
POWER DOWN
NVRAM Sum Fail
RAM checksum test failed. Reset your SETUP options. Retransmit
your packets.
POWER DOWN
RAM Corrupt
Item storage RAM failed. Reset your SETUP options. Retransmit
your packets.
8-18 Packet Reference Manual
P R I N T E R O P T I M I Z AT I O N
9
This chapter provides information on how to improve your printer’s performance by
♦
adjusting the print quality
♦
reducing the imaging time for printing
♦
providing general tips and hints for designing formats.
This printer uses “smart imaging” to image and print fields on supplies. Smart imaging remembers
the exact boundaries and locations of each field and places a boundary box (white space) around
each field. When a field changes that particular boundary box is cleared and the new field data is
imaged. However, the new field data may require a larger boundary box than the previous field
did. In some cases, neighboring fields that do not change may be covered with white space from
the changing field’s boundary box. To prevent existing fields from being covered by a changing
field, see “Using Option 61 (Reimage Field)” in Chapter 4.
Note:
Smart imaging is automatically disabled on formats with a Data Matrix bar code.
Adjusting the Print Quality
Many factors affect print quality: type of supplies, print speed, print contrast, and the type of
printer’s application. This printer supports both thermal transfer and thermal direct supplies. The
type of supply should match the printer’s application.
♦
If you want to print at high speeds, you should use premium supplies. Using premium supplies
reduces smudged images, hard to read labels, and faded print. Supply type, print speed, and
print contrast work together to improve the print quality of labels. Contact your Sales
Representative for more information.
♦
Select the print speed based on desired throughput and print quality. If print quality is more
important, reduce the print speed, because a lower print speed increases the print quality of
labels. If throughput is more important, increase the print speed as high as it will go to give
you the needed print performance. See “Increasing Throughput” for more information.
♦
If the print quality is too light or too dark, adjust the print contrast. The correct contrast setting
is important because it effects how well your bar codes scan and how long the printhead lasts.
Solid black print cannot exceed 30% of any given square inch of the supply.
Be sure to check the print quality of bar codes with a bar code verifier or scanner. If you
do not have a verifier or scanner, check the bar code visually. A bar code that is IN SPEC
will have complete bars and clear spaces. Small alphanumeric characters will look
complete. A bar code that is IN SPEC may not look as good as one that is too dark, but it
will have the highest scan rate.
Dark
Note:
IN SPEC
Light
For highest scan rates, make sure there is adequate white space before and after the bar
code. Also, a darker bar code does not mean it will scan better.
Printer Optimization 9-1
The following non-print zones are recommended:
All Supplies
All Supplies
.050 inches on either edge of the label.
.020 inches at the top and bottom of the label.
If using the optional verifier, allow a minimum no-scan zone on the trailing edge of the label of
0.5 inches (13 mm).
Reducing Imaging Time
Imaging time is the time it takes the printer to image the data for the first label after the printer
receives the format and batch packet. There are several ways to reduce the imaging time: send
formats and configurations once, use a batch quantity of zero, or update batch fields.
♦
If the formats use the same check digit scheme, you only need to send the check digit scheme
once.
♦
Send formats once and use the batch update field to change information on the label. Using a
batch update field reduces the imaging time, because only the fields that change are imaged.
All other fields remain the same as the last queued batch.
♦
Use the batch quantity zero method when your application requires operator intervention to
enter data. While the operator is entering data, the previous field is sent with a batch quantity
of zero. The printer images the field, but does not print it. After the operator enters the data
for the last field, the batch quantity can be specified. The last remaining field is imaged, and
the label prints almost immediately.
To pre-image a label:
1. Send the format and a batch header in one file. The first time you send the batch header, use
the parameter N (new batch), and the parameter 0 for (zero quantity).
Example
{B,1,N,0 | }
The printer images constant text, line, box, and graphic fields, but does not print them.
2. Input data for each field, and send it with a batch header using the parameter U (update) and
a quantity of zero. When the printer receives the data, it immediately images the field, but
does not print it.
Example
{B,1,U,0 |
1,"RODGER DIST CTR" | }
{B,1,U,0 |
2,"8292" | }
At this time, the printer is imaging all associated fields, including fields that copy from
other fields.
3. Repeat step 2 for each field except the last one.
{B,1,U,0 |
3,"BROADWAY" | }
{B,1,U,0 |
4,"555 WEST OAK AVE." | }
4. For the last field, input data and send it with the quantity of labels you want printed. When the
printer receives input for the last field, it immediately prints the labels.
Example
{B,1,U,10 |
5,"DAYTON, OHIO" | }
9-2 Packet Reference Manual
Increasing Throughput
Reducing the imaging time increases throughput. You can also increase the baud rate to increase
the transmission time and increase throughput. Make sure the communication settings at the
printer match those at the host. Using a baud rate of 19200 is almost twice as fast as 9600 baud.
Using a baud rate of 38400 is almost twice as fast as 19200 baud.
General Format Tips and Hints
The following tips and hints are helpful to keep in mind when designing MPCLII formats.
With Packets
♦
Leave parameters blank that you do not need to change when sending online configuration
packets. For example, {I,A,,,,1 | } prints a slashed zero and uses the last sent online
system setup parameters.
You can group fields with similar parameters. For example
T,1,10,V,250,50,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0 |
T,2,15,,,75 |
T,3,,,,100 |
The first text field sets all the parameters for that field. The second text field’s number of
characters and column location changes from what was defined in the first field. In the third text
field, only the column location is changed. This method can be used on bar code and constant
text fields as well.
Note:
You should understand the basics of each field before using this method.
After you modify any fields or parameters with the optional entry method, resend the format,
batch, or configuration packet to the printer.
With Bar Codes
♦
Be careful when rotating or placing a UPC/EAN bar code with human readable characters,
because the bottom reference point is at the bottom of the bars, not at the bottom of the
human readable characters.
With Fields
♦
Data that remains the same for each label should be in a constant text field. Data that varies
for each label should be in a text field.
♦
Check for trailing spaces in text or constant text fields if you receive a “field off tag” error. An
easy way to see trailing spaces is to print the field in the reverse font.
♦
Make sure if you magnify a field, it does not go off the label or cover another field. Magnifying
a field increases the distance between the printed character and the edge of the cell.
Printer Optimization 9-3
9-4 Packet Reference Manual
SAMPLES
A
This appendix contains sample formats. You can customize any of these formats to
meet your needs.
The field separator is the split vertical bar (|). The decimal value is 124. To enter this character,
use the Shift key plus the Split Vertical Bar key on your computer’s keyboard. Depending on your
text editor, it may appear as a solid vertical bar or as a split vertical bar.
Sample UPCA Format Packet
{F,25,A,R,E,200,200,"Fmt 25" |
C,140,40,0,1,2,1,W,C,0,0,"SAMPLE FORMAT" |
B,1,12,F,85,40,1,2,40,5,L,0 |
T,2,18,V,50,50,1,3,1,1,B,L,0,0 | }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,25,N,1 |
1,"02802811111" |
2,"TEXT FIELD" | }
Sample MaxiCode Packets
MaxiCode is a two-dimensional bar code developed by UPS (United Parcel Service, Inc.). Data
must be defined in a specific way for UPS. Refer to the Guide to Bar Coding with UPS or the AIM
MaxiCode Specification for more details about data requirements.
The printer supports modes 0, 1, 2, and 3. Contact us for information about additional MaxiCode
modes.
Mode
Description
0
Obsolete
1
Obsolete
2
Structured Message
3
Structured Message
You can select which mode to use in the bar code field or allow the printer to auto-select the
mode (0, 2, or 3) based on your data. See “Defining a Bar Code Field” for more information.
MaxiCode automatically pads data with the “!” character.
Note:
MaxiCode does not support the NULL character.
Modes 2 and 3 are defined by the way the postal code, class of service, and country code fields
are arranged. (The postal code, class of service, and country code are required fields.) Begin
with the message header, then the primary data (15 characters), followed by the secondary
message (up to 78 characters). Or, begin with the primary data, then the message header,
followed by the secondary data. If the postal code data characters are all numeric then the
MaxiCode symbol is set to Mode 2. If the characters are alphanumeric, or only contain ASCII
characters 65 to 90, then the MaxiCode symbol is set to Mode 3.
If you receive an error 612, check your MaxiCode data. You may have not correctly structured or
left out one of the three required fields (postal code, class of service, and country code) or the
“~029" character.
Samples A-1
Mode 0 (Obsolete) Sample
{F,1,A,R,E,0200,0200,"MAXICODE" |
B,1,93,V,020,20,33,7,0,8,L,0 | }
MaxiCode bar code (33)
{B,1,N,1 |
Batch header
1,"450660000" |
Postal code- zip code
(This field determines Mode)
C,"001" |
Country code
C,"840" |
Class of service
C,"[)~030" |
Message header
C,"01~02996" |
Transportation header
C,"1Z12345678~029" |
Tracking number
C,"UPSN~029" |
Origin carrier SCAC
C,"12345A~029" |
UPS shipper number
C,"070~029" |
Julian day of pickup
C,"~029" |
C,"1/1~029" |
Shipment ID (empty)
Package count
C,"15~029" |
Weight (lb.)
C,"Y~029" |
Address validation
C,"60 SADDLEBROOK CT.~029" |
C,"DAYTON~029" |
Street address (empty)
City (empty)
C,"OH~030" |
State
C,"~004" | }
EOT
A-2 Packet Reference Manual
Mode 2 Sample
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"MAXI_M2" |
B,1,93,V,020,020,33,7,0,8,L,0 | }
MaxiCode bar code (33)
{B,1,N,1 |
1,"[)~030" |
Message header
C,"01~02996" |
Transportation header
Postal Code
C,"068100000~029" |
(This field determines Mode)
C,"840~029" |
Country code
C,"001~029" |
C,"1Z12345675~029" |
Class of service
Tracking number
C,"UPSN~029" |
Origin carrier SCAC
C,"12345E~029" |
UPS shipper number
C,"089~029" |
C,"~029" |
Julian day of pickup
Shipment ID (empty)
C,"1/1~029" |
Package count
C,"10~029" |
Weight (lb.)
C,"Y~029" |
C,"~029" |
Address validation
Street address (empty)
C,"~029" |
City (empty)
C,"CT~030" |
C,"~004" | }
State
EOT
Samples A-3
Mode 3 Sample
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"MAXI_M3" |
B,1,93,V,020,020,33,7,0,8,L,0 | }
MaxiCode bar code (33)
{B,1,N,1 |
1,"[)~030" |
Message header
C,"01~02996" |
Transportation header
Postal Code
C,"M5E1G45~029" |
(This field determines Mode)
C,"124~029" |
Country code
C,"066~029" |
C,"1Z12345679~029" |
Class of service
Tracking number
C,"UPSN~029" |
Origin carrier SCAC
C,"12345E~029" |
UPS shipper number
C,"089~029" |
C,"~029" |
Julian day of pickup
Shipment ID (empty)
C,"1/1~029" |
Package count
C,"10~029" |
Weight (lb.)
C,"Y~029" |
C,"~029" |
Address validation
Street address (empty)
C,"TORONTO~029" |
City (empty)
C,"ON~030" |
C,"~004" | }
State
EOT
A-4 Packet Reference Manual
MaxiCode Compression Sample
Once the data is properly encoded per the compressed format, the UPS scanners and software
do the translating of the compressed data when reading the symbol. Our printers take the input
data as-is and encode it as a standard MaxiCode symbol. Standard scanners interpret the
encoded data exactly as it appears in the symbology without decompressing its contents.
Note:
Compressed data can not contain carriage return or line feed (CRLF) characters.
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"Compress"|
B,01,120,V,272,15,33,7,0,8,L,0|}
appearance (8) for compressed data
{B,1,N,1|
1,"[)>~030"|
C,"01~029"|
C,"96453420000~029"|
C,"840~029"|
C,"013~029"|
C,"1Z12121212~029"|
C,"UPSN~029"|
C,"564W65~030"|
start of compressed data
C,"07'4N%KKL8X5~029"|
C,"9T#VO:Z+Z 0~029"|
C,"SFBH3R#&ZAT/~029"|
C,"87EPJ)~029"|
end of compressed data
C,"S~013"|
C,"~030"|
C,"~004"|}
Batch data can also be included as one long string without carriage return or line feed (CRLF)
characters.
{B,1,N,1|
1,"[)>~03001~02996142010000~029840~029003~0291Z00000014~029UPSN~029111111~03007#P
36 (AWO'$6,X3&W6HMJAL-7WK0 8YU,)92+'#I%~029#S~013~030~004"|}
Samples A-5
Sample Data Matrix Packets
Data Matrix (ECC-200) is a two-dimensional bar code which is made up of square modules
arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. There are 24 square symbol sizes available ranging
from 10 rows by 10 columns to 144 rows by 144 columns. There are six rectangular symbol sizes
available ranging from 8 rows by 8 columns to 16 rows by 48 columns. The symbol size is data
dependent. Data Matrix automatically pads data.
Make sure you do not overlay other fields when designing your Data Matrix symbol. Smart
imaging is automatically disabled on formats with a Data Matrix bar code. You should also allow
a 3 or 4 dot “quiet zone” (blank space around the bar code’s perimeter) for scanning. See
“Defining a Bar Code Field” for more information.
Sample Batch Data with Special Characters
To use this character in the bar code
enter these characters in the batch data
null character
~~@
~ (tilde)
~126~126
FNC1
~~1
Square Data Matrix Packet
{F,36,A,R,E,400,400,"DTMTRX1" |
B,1,50,V,50,100,35,0,100,8,L,0 | }
{B,36,N,1 |
1,"1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST" | }
This example prints a one-inch wide by one-inch tall (100) square Data Matrix symbol using the
default density (0) without any field rotation (0).
Rectangular Data Matrix Packet
{F,36,A,R,E,400,400,"DTMTRX2" |
B,1,400,V,100,200,35,29,50,8,L,1 | }
{B,36,N,1 |
1,"1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST" | }
This example prints a one-inch by a half-inch tall (50) rectangular 16 rows by 36 columns (density
29) Data Matrix symbol rotated 90 (1).
Sample Data Matrix w ith Function 1
{F,36,A,R,E,400,400,"DTMTRX1" |
B,1,50,V,10,50,35,0,50,8,L,0 | }
{B,36,N,1 |
1,"~~110012345678902" | }
This example prints a 0.50-inch wide by 0.50-inch tall (50) square Data Matrix symbol using the
default density (0) without any field rotation (0). FNC1 appears in the batch data as ~~1.
A-6 Packet Reference Manual
Sample Quick Response Packets
Quick Response (QR Code) is a two-dimensional bar code, which is made up of square modules
arranged in an overall square pattern. A unique finder pattern is located at three corners of the
symbol. Four levels of error correction are available, along with a wide range of symbol sizes.
♦
Model 1 is the original specification.
♦ Model 2 is an enhanced form that includes additional features.
The maximum number of characters depends on the type of characters entered for the batch data
and differs for the two models of QR Code.
Data Type
Model1
Model2
Numeric Data
1167
2710
Alphanumeric Data
707
2710
8-Bit data
486
2710
Kanji data
299
1817
QR Code can accommodate Japanese Kana and Kanji characters and has a variety of
applications, including marking spark plugs, radiators, printed circuit boards, and test tubes.
Refer to the AIM International Symbology Specification for more details about data requirements.
Sample QR Code Packet
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"QRCODE" |
B,1,200,V,75,50,36,0,100,2,B,0 |
{B,1,N,1 |
1,"HM,N0123456789012345" |}
}
Sample QR Code with URL Packet
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"QRURL" |
B,2,200,V,75,50,36,0,100,2,B,0 | }
{B,1,N,1 |
2,"MA,http://www.monarch.averydennison.com" | }
Structured Append QR Code Packet
{F,2,A,R,E,200,200,"QRCODE2" |
B,1,200,V,50,50,36,0,100,2,B,0 | }
{B,2,N,1 | 1,"D0202E9,Q0A" |
C,"0123456789ABCD+__âôû
~129~064~159~252~224~064" | }
Samples A-7
Sample GS1 DataBar Packets
GS1 DataBar encodes brand identification and dynamic data. This family of bar codes can
contain more information than current EAN/UPC bar codes. Seven symbologies encode a Global
Trade Item Number (GTIN). GS1 DataBar codes can be stacked, truncated, or omni directional.
GS1 DataBar w ith Function 1
{F,1,A,R,E,400,400,"UCCAB" |
B,1,30,V,5,65,38,4,35,0,L,0,11,2,22 | }
{B,1,N,1 |
1,"#10ABC|#Monarch Brand Printers" | }
GS1 DataBar E AN13 w ith Composite
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"GS1EAN13" |
B,0,39,V,285,100,38,3,60,8,L,0,9,1,22 |
R,1,"123456789012|#910123456#011234567890123" | }
{B,1,N,1 | }
GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked Omni Directional
{F,17,A,R,E,400,400,"STACKOM" |
B,1,120,V,50,100,38,3,100,0,L,0,4,2 | }
{B,17,N,1 |
1,"1234567890123" | }
GS1 DataBar Expanded
{F,27,A,R,E,400,400,"EXPANDED" |
B,1,120,V,50,100,38,3,100,0,L,0,6,,6 | }
{B,27,N,1 |
1,"123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345
6789012345678901234567890" | }
GS1 DataBar Expanded (no composite)
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"GS1EXPD" |
B,0,16,V,425,25,38,3,50,8,L,0,6,1,22 |
R,1,"10123456#21ABCD" | }
{B,1,N,1 | }
A-8 Packet Reference Manual
Sample Aztec Packet
Aztec is a two-dimensional bar code symbology consisting of square modules arranged around a
square bulls eye pattern. For more information about the Aztec bar code, refer to the ANSI/AIM
BC13 ISS - Aztec Code Specification from AIM Global.
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"TEST" |
B,1,25,V,20,20,37,7,0,0,L,0 |
R,53,0,0,0,1,"" | }
{B,1,N,1 |
1,"Monarch Brand Printers" | }
Sample Intelligent Mail® Packet
For the Intelligent Mail® bar code, the maximum number of characters is 31, including commas
between the data. This bar code is only available on the 9855 printer using version 7.1 or
greater firmware. For more information, refer to the USPS® Intelligent Mail® Specification.
{F,1,A,R,G,1218,812,"intmail"|
B,1,35,V,100,100,24,0,0,8,L,0|}
{B,1,N,1|
1,
"11,222,333333,444444444,55555555555"| }
In the above sample, the batch data indicates the following:
Batch Data
11
Description
222
Special Services: Range: 000 to 999
333333
Mailer ID: Range: 000000 to 999999
444444
Serial Number: Range: 000000000 to 999999999
555555555
Delivery Point ZIP code: 0, 5, 9, or 11-digit ZIP code
Bar code ID: First digit = 0 to 9; Second digit = 0 to 4
Samples A-9
Sample Compliance Packet
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"RDCI" |
L,V,500,115,90,85,3 |
L,V,298,245,90,102,3 |
L,V,500,2,0,390,3 |
L,V,400,2,0,390,3 |
L,V,298,2,0,390,3 |
L,V,200,2,0,390,5 |
C,568,8,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"FROM:",0 |
C,568,125,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"CARRIER:",0 |
C,529,124,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"PRO NUMBER:",0 |
C,511,125,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"B/L NUMBER:",0 |
C,472,8,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"TO:",0 |
C,387,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"(420) SHIP TO POSTAL CODE",0 |
C,391,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"APPOINTMENT NUMBER:",0 |
C,358,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ORDER TYPE:",0 |
C,327,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ITEM:",0 |
C,190,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"UPC SHIPPING CONTAINER CODE",0 |
C,557,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MONARCH",0 |
C,547,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"170 MONARCH LANE",0 |
C,537,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"P.O. BOX 608",0 |
C,527,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"DAYTON, OHIO 45401",0 |
C,462,313,0,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,"#",0 |
T,1,15,V,529,220,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,2,15,V,511,220,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
B,3,13,V,311,28,8,4,50,8,L,0 |
B,4,14,V,17,60,50,5,130,8,L,0 |
T,5,30,V,161,080,0,3,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,6,15,V,467,40,4,1,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,7,10,V,462,330,6,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,8,20,V,549,124,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,9,30,V,446,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,10,30,V,426,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,11,30,V,406,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,12,20,V,368,255,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,13,5,V,335,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,14,15,V,304,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
T,15,15,V,366,65,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
R,1,"(420)ÿ" |
T,16,27,V,270,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 |
T,17,27,V,240,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 |
R,1,"WELCOMES GUEST # " |
T,18,27,V,210,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 | }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,1,N,1 |
1,"1234567890" |
2,"0987654321" |
3,"~20142032678" |
4,"10028028662854" |
5,"1 00 28028 66285 4" |
6,"RODGER DIST CTR" |
7,"8292" | 8,"BROADWAY" |
9,"555 WEST OAK AVE." |
10,"DAYTON, OH 45401-0608" |
11,"" |
12,"08292 123456-123" |
13,"AR" |
14,"999-999999-99" |
15,"32678" |
16,"WYSIWYG" |
17,"99999" |
18,"TO A PRODUCT DEMO" | }
A-10 Packet Reference Manual
Sample Format Packet
{F,5,A,R,G,576,768,"1HDREC1" |
L,S,19,39,499,39,38,"" |
L,S,19,93,499,93,15,"" |
L,S,19,124,499,124,15,"" |
L,S,19,155,499,155,38,"" |
C,461,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"PO NUMBER ",1 |
C,426,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"STORE " |
C,391,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"CTNS SHOPPED" |
C,357,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"CTNS RECVD " |
C,320,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"CARRIER " |
C,259,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"FRT BILL # " |
C,196,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"FRT TERMS " |
C,159,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"KEYREC# " |
C,125,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"FRT CLAIM # " |
C,090,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"RECVD BY " |
C,056,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"DATE RECVD " |
C,461,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" |
C,426,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" |
C,391,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" |
C,357,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" |
C,320,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" |
C,259,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" |
C,196,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" |
C,159,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" |
C,125,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" |
C,090,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" |
C,056,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" |
T,01,08,V,461,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
T,02,08,V,426,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
T,03,08,V,391,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
T,04,08,V,357,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
T,05,18,V,290,289,0,1,1,1,B,R,0,0 |
T,06,12,V,230,395,0,1,1,1,B,R,0,0 |
T,07,08,V,196,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
T,08,08,V,159,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
T,09,08,V,125,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
T,10,08,V,090,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
T,11,08,V,056,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
T,12,11,V,259,762,0,1,2,2,B,B,0,1 |
R,1,"*_________*" |
B,13,09,V,259,720,4,4,145,8,B,1 |
R,4,12,2,9,1,1 |
R,50,3,8 | }
Sample Zero Batch Packet
{B,5,N,0 | }
{B,5,U,1 |
1,"6005710" |
2,"106" |
3,"3" |
4,"3" |
5,"ALLIED FREIGHT1234" |
6,"123456789012" |
7,"P" |
8,"10650337" |
9,"0" |
10,"VIC" |
11,"1/6/94" |
12,"106503378" | }
Samples A-11
Sample Data Entry Format Packet
This packet uses Option 5 (Data Entry Sources) and Option 20 (Data Entry Prompts). After the
printer receives the format packet, the operator can go into Batch Entry Mode at the printer and
enter the batch data.
{F,1,A,R,E,300,200,"TEXTILES" |
T,1,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 |
R,20,"PART NUMBER:" |
R,5,K |
B,2,12,V,150,40,1,2,80,7,L,0 |
R,20,"UPC NUMBER:" |
R,5,K |
D,3,20 |
R,20,"FIBER#1:" |
R,5,K |
D,4,3 |
R,20,"PERCENTAGE:" |
R,5,K |
T,5,30,V,80,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 |
R,1," % " |
R,4,3,1,20,5,1 |
R,4,4,1,3,1,1 |
R,5,N | D,6,20 |
R,20,"FIBER #2:" |
R,5,K |
D,7,3 |
R,20,"PERCENTAGE:" |
R,5,K |
T,8,30,V,65,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 |
R,1," % " |
R,4,6,1,20,5,1 |
R,4,7,1,3,1,1 |
R,5,N |
C,30,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MADE IN USA",0 |
L,S,110,30,110,150,10," " |
Q,240,30,270,150,3," " | }
Depending on the operator-entered batch data, a label similar to this one prints.
A-12 Packet Reference Manual
Sample RFID Data Fields
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"EPCFONT" |
T,40,1,F,10,10,0,56,40,40,B,L,0,0|}
{B,1,N,1 |
40,"A"|}
RFID Data Field w ith a Copy Option
F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"RDCI" |
L,V,500,115,90,85,3 |
L,V,298,245,90,102,3 |
C,568,8,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"FROM:",0 |
C,568,125,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"CARRIER:",0 |
C,387,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"(420) SHIP TO POSTAL CODE",0 |
C,391,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"APPOINTMENT NUMBER:",0 |
C,327,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ITEM:",0 |
C,190,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"UPC SHIPPING CONTAINER CODE",0 |
T,1,15,V,529,220,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 |
B,3,13,V,311,28,8,4,50,8,L,0 |
B,4,14,V,17,60,50,5,130,8,L,0 |
X,5,24,0 |
T,6,20,V,415,270,0,50,15,15,B,L,0,2 |
R,4,5,1,16,1,0 |
Sample Batch Packet
B,1,N,1 |
1,"RFID TEST" |
3,"1005678" |
4,"67-90-32" |
5,"3123456789ABCDEF12345678" |
6,"ABCDEFG" |
ASCII HEX
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"ASCIIHEX" |
T,1,50,V,10,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
X,2,24,0 |}
{B,2,N,1 |
1,"313233343536373839303132" |
2,"313233343536373839303132" |}
ASCII HEX Incrementing Field
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"ASCIIHEX" |
T,1,50,V,10,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 |
X,2,24,0 |
R,60,I,1 |}
{B,2,N,5 |
1,"313233343536373839303132" |
2,"313233343536373839303132" | }
Samples A-13
SSCC96
{F,45,A,R,E,600,400,"SSCC96" |
C,45,220,0,50,10,10,B,L,0,2,"®" |
C,75,385,0,50,40,30,B,L,0,2,"Monarch RFID" |
C,110,385,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"SHIP TO RFID USER" |
C,110,150,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"CARRIER" |
C,150,150,0,50,9,9,B,L,0,2,"PRO:" |
C,165,150,0,50,9,9,B,L,0,2,"B/L:" |
C,200,380,0,50,18,15,B,L,0,2,"AVERY DENNISON" |
C,235,380,0,50,14,12,B,L,0,2,"EMAIL: RFID@MONARCH.COM" |
C,255,380,0,50,14,12,B,L,0,2,"PHONE: 1 800 543-6650" |
C,275,345,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"VENDOR STK NO:" |
C,275,110,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"PACK/UNITS:" |
C,360,330,0,50,10,10,B,L,0,2,"EPC Pure Identity:" |
C,275,190,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"COLOR:" |
C,315,110,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"SIZE/STYLE:" |
C,415,390,0,50,12,12,B,L,0,2,"EPC#:" |
L,S,098,005,098,395,6,"" |
L,S,170,005,170,395,6,"" |
L,S,098,155,170,155,6,"" |
L,S,260,005,260,395,6,"" |
L,S,390,005,390,395,6,"" |
T,1,15,V,130,335,0,50,13,12,B,L,0,2 |
B,2,15,V,165,365,8,4,25,0,L,2 |
T,3,20,V,130,150,0,50,13,12,B,L,0,2 |
T,4,20,V,150,110,0,50,10,12,B,L,0,2 |
T,5,20,V,165,110,0,50,10,12,B,L,0,2 |
T,12,10,V,295,370,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 |
T,13,10,V,295,110,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 |
T,14,50,V,380,385,0,50,12,11,B,L,0,2 |
T,15,10,V,295,200,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 |
T,16,10,V,335,155,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 |
T,18,30,V,550,330,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 |
B,17,20,V,530,340,50,6,110,0,L,2 |
X,19,24 |
T,20,40,V,415,330,0,50,12,13,B,L,0,2 |
R,4,19,1,40,1,1 |}
{B,45,N,1 |
1,"VENDOR USA" |
2,"42060512" |
3,"AVERY DENNISON" |
4,"0987764356" |
5,"0020545640" |
12,"0075687332" |
13,"3600" |
14,"urn:epc:tag:sscc-96:1.0028028.0000001235" |
15,"RED" |
16,"48~"/TOUGH" |
17,"009280287586887" |
18,"0 09 28028 75688 7" |
19,"313401B5F0000004D3000000" |
20,"0" |}
A-14 Packet Reference Manual
SGTIN 96
{F,46,A,R,E,600,400,"SGTIN96" |
C,45,220,0,50,10,10,B,L,0,2,"®" |
C,75,385,0,50,40,30,B,L,0,2,"Monarch RFID" |
C,110,385,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"SHIP TO RFID USER" |
C,110,150,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"CARRIER" |
C,150,150,0,50,9,9,B,L,0,2,"PRO:" |
C,165,150,0,50,9,9,B,L,0,2,"B/L:" |
C,200,380,0,50,18,15,B,L,0,2,"AVERY DENNISON" |
C,235,380,0,50,14,12,B,L,0,2,"EMAIL: RFID@MONARCH.COM" |
C,255,380,0,50,14,12,B,L,0,2,"PHONE: 1 800 543-6650" |
C,275,345,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"VENDOR STK NO:" |
C,275,110,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"PACK/UNITS:" |
C,360,330,0,50,10,10,B,L,0,2,"EPC Pure Identity:" |
C,275,190,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"COLOR:" |
C,315,110,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"SIZE/STYLE:" |
C,415,390,0,50,12,12,B,L,0,2,"EPC#:" |
L,S,098,005,098,395,6,"" |
L,S,170,005,170,395,6,"" |
L,S,098,155,170,155,6,"" |
L,S,260,005,260,395,6,"" |
L,S,390,005,390,395,6,"" |
T,1,15,V,130,335,0,50,13,12,B,L,0,2 |
B,2,15,V,165,365,8,4,25,0,L,2 |
T,3,20,V,130,150,0,50,13,12,B,L,0,2 |
T,4,20,V,150,110,0,50,10,12,B,L,0,2 |
T,5,20,V,165,110,0,50,10,12,B,L,0,2 |
T,12,10,V,295,370,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 |
T,13,10,V,295,110,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 |
T,14,50,V,380,385,0,50,12,11,B,L,0,2 |
T,15,10,V,295,200,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 |
T,16,10,V,335,155,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 |
T,18,30,V,550,330,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 |
B,17,20,V,530,340,50,6,110,0,L,2 |
X,19,24 |
T,20,40,V,415,330,0,50,12,13,B,L,0,2 |
R,4,19,1,40,1,1 |}
{B,46,N,1 |
1,"VENDOR USA" |
2,"42060512" |
3,"AVERY DENNISON" |
4,"0987764356" |
5,"0020545640" |
12,"0075687332" |
13,"3600" |
14,"urn:epc:tag:sgtin-96:1.0028028.001234.2" |
15,"RED" |
16,"48~"/TOUGH" |
17,"009280287586887" |
18,"0 09 28028 75688 7" |
19,"303401B5F001348000000002" |
20,"0" |}
Samples A-15
Passw ord Lock
{F,1,A,R,E,400,400,"PWDLOCK" |
X,1,100,0 |}
{B,1,N,1 |
1,"313233343536373831323334~028" |
C,"ABCDEFGH01234567UserMemorySample~028" |
C,"~028" |
C,"73737373~028" |
C,"CAD01234~028" |
C,"22022" |}
Permalock and Passw ord Lock
{F,1,A,R,E,400,400,"BOTHLOCK" |
X,1,100,0 |}
{B,1,N,1 |
1,"313233343536373831323334~028" |
C,"ABCDEF ~028" |
C,"~028" |
C,"73737373~028" |
C,"CAD01234~028" |
C,"33033" |}
A-16 Packet Reference Manual
FONTS
B
Our printers support two types of fonts: Bitmapped (traditional printer fonts such as
Standard and Reduced) and Scalable/TrueType® (Font 50). This appendix gives a brief overview
of each type of font and how your printer interprets fonts. It also shows examples of the fonts
loaded in your printer.
Number
Font Size and
Appearance
Type of
Spacing
# of Dots Between
Characters
1
Standard
Monospaced
3 (203 dpi)
5 (300 dpi)
2
Reduced
Monospaced
1 (203 dpi)
2 (300 dpi)
3
Bold
Monospaced
3 (203 dpi)
5 (300 dpi)
4
OCRA-like
Monospaced
3 (203 dpi)
5 (300 dpi)
5
HR1 – only for numeric data
Monospaced
2 (203 dpi)
3 (300 dpi)
6
HR2 – only for numeric data
Monospaced
1 (203 dpi)
2 (300 dpi)
10*
CG Triumvirate™ Typeface Bold
(9pt. at 203 dpi or 8 pt. at 300 dpi)
Proportional
Varies with each letter
11*
6 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
Proportional
Varies with each letter
15*
7 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
Proportional
Varies with each letter
16*
9 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
Proportional
Varies with each letter
17*
11 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
Proportional
Varies with each letter
18*
15 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
Proportional
Varies with each letter
50
EFF Swiss Bold
Scalable
Varies with each letter
56
PaxarSymbols
Proportional
Varies with each letter
70
15 pt. Paxar
Proportional
Varies with each letter
71
18 pt. Paxar
Proportional
Varies with each letter
72
15 pt. NAFTA
Proportional
Varies with each letter
73
18 pt. NAFTA
Proportional
Varies with each letter
* The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces support only ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol
Sets. The scalable font does not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic). The Euro symbol( ) at
position ~192 is only available in the Standard, Reduced, and Bold fonts.
Fonts B-1
These samples were printed using the Internal Symbol set.
Standard Font
Reduced Font
OCRA-like Font
EFF Swiss Bold Font*
* Printed with ANSI Symbol Set
B-2 Packet Reference Manual
Bold Font
These samples were printed using Code Page 437.
CG Triumvirate™ Typeface Bold
CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
PaxarSymbols Font 56 Characters
A (decimal 65) =
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"epc" |
T,1,10,V,30,35,0,56,20,20,B,L,0,0|}
{B,1,N,1|
1,"~065
A"|}
Fonts B-3
Paxar Font 70 and Font 71 Characters
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
44
45
46
47
No tum ble
dry
Tum ble dry
lo w he at
Tum ble dry
high he at
professiona l
dry clea n
40
48
41
42
43
No ble ach
Tum ble dry
50
51
52
53
54
55
Cool ir on
W arm iron
Hot iron
No iro n
Hand W ash
Do Not
W ash
49
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Cotton
W ash
Synthetics
W ash
Cotton
W ash
Synthetics
W ash
Cotton W ash
Synthetics
W ash
Cotton
W ash
Synthetics
W ash
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Cotton
W ash
Synthetics
W ash
Cotton
W ash
Synthetics
W ash
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
W ool W ash
Use the tilde sequences shown in this table to produce the desired character on your tags/labels.
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"Font70" |
T,1,10,V,25,25,0,70,2,2,B,L,0,0|
T,2,10,V,65,65,0,70,1,1,B,L,0,0|}
{B,1,N,1|
1,"~042 ~064"|
2,"~052
~054"|}
B-4 Packet Reference Manual
NAFTA Font 72 and Font 73 Characters
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Machin e
W ash
Machin e
W ash
Machin e
W ash
Machin e
W ash
Machin e
W ash
Machin e
W ash
Machin e
W ash
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Hand W ash
Hand W ash
Hand W ash
Hand W ash
Hand W ash
Hand W ash
Machin e
W ash, Perm .
Press
Machin e
W ash, Perm .
Press
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Machin e
W ash, Perm .
Press
Machin e
W ash, Perm .
Press
Machin e
W ash, Perm .
Press
Machin e
W ash, Perm .
Press
Machin e
W ash, Gentle
Machin e
W ash, Gentle
Machin e
W ash, Gentle
Machin e
W ash, Gentle
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Machin e
W ash, Gentle
Machin e
W ash, Gentle
Do Not W ash
Do Not
Bleach
Do Not Dry
No Iron
Bleach W hen
Need ed
Non -Chl orin e
Bleach W hen
Need ed
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Tum ble Dry
Tum ble Dry,
High Heat
Tum ble Dry,
Med ium Heat
Tum ble Dry,
Lo w Heat
Tum ble Dry,
No He at
Tum ble Dry,
Perm . Press
Tum ble Dry,
Perm . Press,
High Heat
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
Tum ble Dry,
Perm . Press,
Med ium Heat
Tum ble Dry,
Perm . Press,
Lo w Heat
Tum ble Dry,
Perm . Press,
No He at
Tum ble Dry,
Gentle
Tum ble Dry,
Gentle, Hig h
Heat
Tum ble Dry,
Gentle,
Med ium Heat
Tum ble Dry,
Gentle, Lo w
Heat
Tum ble Dry,
Gentle, No
Heat
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
Line Dry
Drip Dry
Dry Fl at
Do Not W ring
Do Not
Tum ble Dry
Dry In Sha de
Iron
Iron, Hig h
Heat
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Iron, Medium
Heat
Iron, Lo w
Heat
Iron, Hig h
Heat, No
Steam
Iron, Medium
Heat, No
Steam
Iron, Lo w
Heat, No
Steam
Professional
dry clea n
Do Not Dry
clean
Dry cle an,
Any Solve nt
Fonts B-5
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
Dry cle an, No
Trichlor oethyle ne
Dry cle an,
Petroleum
Solvent Onl y
Dry cle an,
Any Solve nt,
Short Cycle
Dry cle an, No
Trichloroethyle ne,
Short Cycle
Dry cle an,
Petroleum
Solvent Onl y,
Short Cycle
Dry cle an,
Any Solve nt,
Reduce d
Moisture
Dry cle an, No
Trichloroethyle ne,
Reduce d
Moisture
Dry cle an,
Petroleum
Solvent Onl y,
Reduce d
Moisture
104
105
106
107
108
109
Dry cle an,
Any Solve nt,
Lo w Heat
Dry cle an, No
Trichlor o
ethyle ne,
Lo w Heat
Dry cle an,
Petroleum
Solvent Onl y,
Lo w Heat
Dry cle an,
Any Solve nt,
No Steam
Dry cle an, No
Trichloro
ethyle ne, No
Steam
Dry cle an,
Petroleum
Solvent Onl y,
No Steam
Use the tilde sequences shown in this table to produce the desired character on your tags/labels.
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"Font72" |
T,1,10,V,25,25,0,72,2,2,B,L,0,0|
T,2,10,V,65,65,0,72,1,1,B,L,0,0|}
{B,1,N,1|
1,"~042 ~067"|
2,"~080
~087"|}
Bitmap Font Information
Our bitmap fonts are either monospaced (each character occupies the same amount of space) or
proportional (each character is a different width). Use monospaced fonts for price fields and data
you want to list in a column. With proportionally spaced fonts, you may be able to place more
characters on a line. However, you may need to experiment with these fonts and adjust field
measurements in your format. The bitmapped fonts (either monospaced or proportional) appear
jagged when magnified. The magnification range is 1 to 7.
Use the MONARCH® MPCL™ Toolbox (Font Utility), available on our Web site, to convert a
bitmap font to Hex or Run-Length encoding for the printer. Select the point size and characters
to print. Bitmap fonts may image faster than a TrueType font, but you are limited to the point
size and characters you downloaded.
Monospaced Font Magnification
Monospaced characters occupy the same amount of space within a magnification. Use
monospaced fonts for price fields and data you want to list in a column. Decide how wide and tall
you want the characters to appear on the labels.
Only the 1x width can be scanned with the OCRA-like font. Using a printhead with 203 dpi, the
character widths are as follows: 7.9 (English), 20.1 (Metric), and 16 (Dots).
To calculate other font widths, multiply the font dots (14 dots for Standard, 7 dots for Reduced,
24 dots for Bold) by the magnification and add the default spacing (3 dots for Standard, 1 dot for
Reduced, 3 dots for Bold) between characters.
Example
14 (Standard font dots) x 5 (magnification) = 70 + 3 (default spacing between characters). There
are 73 dots in the Standard font at 5x.
B-6 Packet Reference Manual
Proportional Font Magnification
Each character in a proportionally spaced font is a different height and width. You may be able
to place more characters on a line using proportionally spaced fonts. You may want to
experiment with these fonts and adjust field measurements in your format as needed. The
bitmapped fonts (either monospaced or proportional) appear jagged when magnified. The
magnification range is 1 to 7.
To calculate other font widths, multiply the font dots (3 dots for Minimum, 13 dots for Average, 22
dots for Maximum) by the magnification.
Example
13 (Average font dots) x 5 (magnification) = 65 dots in an average letter of the CG Triumvirate™
Typeface Bold at 5x.
Scalable Font Information
The scalable font is smooth at any point size. There are no jagged edges because the font is
created from an equation every time it is used. The field width varies with each letter.
When you define formats using scalable fonts, remember to set the character rotation to 0,
because it is not supported. However, field rotation is supported for text or constant text fields
using the scalable font. The scalable font does not print a slashed zero.
Scalable fonts perform better in constant text fields, because those fields are imaged only once
per batch, not once per label as in text fields. The transparent overlay allows closer field
placement when using scalable fonts.
The height and width magnification are defined in point size. 72 points = one inch.
One inch = cell size. The cell size is the built-in space around the individual characters of the
scalable font. The point size range is 4 to 255. If the height and width are not set to the same
point size, the printed characters look tall and thin or short and thick, which allows for greater
flexibility in the appearance of the font.
The 72 point EFF Swiss Bold sample shows the one inch cell size.
6pt
Sam ple
10pt
Sample
24pt Sample
48pt Sample
72pt Sample
1”
Fonts B-7
TrueType Font Information
TrueType fonts follow the TrueType outline font standard. These fonts are smooth at any point
size. There are no jagged edges, because the font is created from an equation every time it is
used. The height and width magnification are defined in point size.
72 points = one inch. One inch = cell size. The cell size is the built-in space around the
individual characters of the scalable font. The point size range is 4 to 255. The field width
varies with each letter. The printer accepts downloaded TrueType fonts.
Dow nloading TrueType Fonts
The MONARCH® MPCL™ Toolbox (Font Utility) is available on our Web site and converts
TrueType fonts to Hex or Run-Length encoding for the printer.
When downloading a TrueType font, you download the entire font, not particular characters or
one point size. You can print a variety of symbol sets with International (Turkish, Latin, Spanish,
etc.) characters. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all symbol sets
may not be supported in a given font.
Save the fonts to flash memory for optimal performance with downloaded fonts. No memory
configuration packets are necessary since flash memory cannot be reallocated.
Using International Fonts
International fonts are available as bitmap or TrueType fonts. See "Bitmap Font Information" or
"TrueType Font Information" for more details. Save the font into the printer’s flash memory.
An additional symbol set (110 - Unicode UTF-8) is available depending on your printer’s firmware
version. To use this symbol set, download an International TrueType font. An International
TrueType font containing Chinese or Japanese characters requires the high memory option
(purchased separately). An International TrueType font containing Arabic characters may not.
The high memory option is only available with the 9855 printer.
Note
Because the 9825 printer’s memory is limited, only Latin fonts (smaller than 256K) may
fit in the printer’s flash memory. There is not enough memory to store an Asian font.
To use International fonts, consider the following information:
♦
All fonts contain an internal character mapping. The mapping is organized by one or more
standards, such as BIG5. These mapping standards can provide over 65,000 characters,
which are not represented in this manual. The printer supports several mapping standards:
♦
♦
♦
♦
Unicode (UCS-2)
BIG5
GB2312
SJIS
♦
Specify a symbol set based on the characters to print and one that is compatible with the
font's character mapping. For example, to print Japanese characters, select symbol set 932
(Japanese Shift JIS) and a font compatible with that symbol set. See "Selecting a Symbol
Set" for more information.
♦
To enter batch data, use the method specified by the font's character mapping and a
compatible symbol set.
Selecting a S ymbol Set
Specify a symbol set based on the characters to print and one that is compatible with the font's
character mapping. The symbol set parameter identifies the character mapping used in the text
field or constant text field, for example, Unicode, BIG5, etc. If no symbol set is selected, the
default symbol set (Internal Symbol Set) is used.
B-8 Packet Reference Manual
The printer automatically translates some character mappings to others. For example, if you
need a BIG5 font, it is possible to use Unicode text data. Use Unicode in the symbol set
parameter to indicate the text mapping and select the BIG5 font needed in the font parameter (T8
or C5). The printer automatically translates the Unicode character values into BIG5 values
before printing the character.
The following table lists the compatible mappings and symbol sets.
Font Character Mapping
Batch Data*
True Type Font
Character Mapping
Symbol Set Parameter (T15, C13, or A6)
Use in text or constant text fields
Unicode
BIG5
Unicode
SJIS
Unicode
KSC5601
Unicode
GB2312
Unicode
Unicode
BIG5
Unicode
103 – BIG5
GB2312
Unicode
104 – GB2312
SJIS
SJIS
105 – SJIS (Code Page 932 – Japanese Shift JIS)
GB2312
GB2312
106 – GB2312 (Code Page 936 – Simplified Chinese)
BIG5
BIG5
107 – BIG5 (Code Page 950 – Traditional Chinese)
UTF-8
Unicode
BIG5
SJIS
KSC5601
GB2312
110 – Unicode UTF-8
If you are unsure which character mapping to select,
use this symbol set, because the printer automatically
translates the character mappings.
Note: UTF-8 is very common. We recommend using it
for compatibility with different host applications and
data streams.
102 – Unicode
If you are unsure which character mapping to select,
use this symbol set, because the printer automatically
translates the character mappings.
* Characters in batch data must be entered based on their mapping (Unicode, BIG5, etc.).
Note:
Symbol sets 102-110 require the memory expansion option and a downloaded
International TrueType font.
International Font Sample
{F,3,A,R,E,150,200,"SIMPLE" |
T,1,5,V,10,10,0,100,30,30,B,L,0,0,102 | }
{B,3,U,1 |
1,"~125~000~125~002~125~004~125~005" | }
S ymbol Set Parameter
Font Number
This example prints these four characters with Unicode batch data of ~125~000, ~125~002,
~125~004 and ~125~005.
Fonts B-9
Arabic Font Sample
{F,3,A,R,E,220,400,"SIMPLE" |
T,1,250,V,40,380,0,1000,24,24,B,E,0,0,110 |
T,2,250,V,90,380,0,1000,24,24,B,E,0,0,110 | }
{B,3,N,1 |
1,"%5
95%
|
2,"5% polyester 95% cotton" | }
This example prints on the printer with a downloaded Arabic font and the printer's Numeric
Format set as Default.
Refer to the Internet for a listing of the characters in each code page. Search on a particular
code page, such as “codepage 936" to view the characters in that code page.
Licensing Your Fonts
We provide you with tools to create and download TrueType fonts. However, it is your
responsibility to purchase and license any fonts you download to your printer. Contact your font
supplier for licensing information. Additional fonts that are compatible with the printer can be
purchased from:
The Electronic Font Foundry
thefonts.com
Korean, Chinese, and Japanese fonts can be purchased from:
DynaComware
www.dynalab.com
Locating the Font Number in a Font Packet
If you are creating font packets, the font number is the second parameter in the packet. Software
is available to create the font data and packet. Call Technical Support for more information.
Font Number
Example
{W,200,A,M,68 |
font data |
font data | }
Use this number in T8 (font) or in C5 (font). See “Defining Text Fields” or “Defining Constant
Text Fields” in Chapter 2 for more information.
Font Number
Example
T,1,10,V,30,10,0,200,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 |
C,50,30,0,200,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MONARCH",0 |
Font Number
Defines a text and constant text field using the downloaded (#200) font.
B-10 Packet Reference Manual
S Y M B O L S E T S / C O D E PA G E S
C
This appendix contains a listing of the symbol sets, code pages, and extended
character sets the printer supports.
Use the charts in this appendix to convert dot sequences from the image dot pattern to codes you
can use in the fields. Use the Binary to Hex Conversion Chart to convert Binary dot sequences
to Hexadecimal numbers for bitmap files. Use the Dot to Run Length Encoding Chart to convert
dot sequences to alphabetic characters for bitmap files.
Supported Symbol Sets and Code Pages
The printers support these symbol sets and code pages: Internal, ANSI, Bold, OCRA Character
Set, DOS Code Page 437 and 850. Additional Code Pages are supported with downloaded
TrueType or Unicode (International) fonts.
The printer defaults to the internal symbol set. See “Defining the System Setup Packet” in
Chapter 2 to change the symbol set.
Selecting a S ymbol Set or Code Page
The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces support only the ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol
Sets. These fonts print a slashed zero when using the ANSI symbol set.
Internal
Use this symbol set to print international monetary symbols, the
trademark (™) symbol, and for formats that may be used on other
MPCLII printers.
ANSI
Use this symbol set with proportionally spaced fonts.
DOS CP 437/850
Use this symbol set for extended and international characters with
proportionally spaced fonts.
Using Code 128 Function Codes
This table lists the characters for Bar Code 128 function codes. These functions are used with
scanners.
Code
Function Code
~201
F1
~202
F2
~203
F3
~204
F4
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-1
Entering Extended Characters
When using extended characters in your batch data file, type a tilde in front of the three-digit
code. For example, if you want to include the character Ä in a text field using the Internal
Symbol Set, type:
1,"~142" |
Using International Character Sets/Code Pages
Symbol sets 100, 101, 852-860, and 1250-1258 may only be used with the scalable font (font#50)
or downloaded TrueType fonts. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore,
all symbol sets may not be supported in a given font. For example, to print Hebrew characters,
you need to find a font (such as Arial) that supports Hebrew characters; convert, and then
download the font to your printer. Make sure the correct symbol set for Hebrew characters is
selected.
Font 50 does not print the slashed zero or support Code Pages 101 (W ingdings) and 1256
(Arabic). The Euro symbol at position ~192 is only available in the Standard, Reduced, and Bold
fonts.
Code pages 102-107, 932, 936, and 950 contain thousands of characters, which are not
represented in this manual. These code pages require the memory expansion option and a
downloaded International TrueType font.
The Code Pages (100 and greater) on the following pages were printed using Arial or a similar
downloaded TrueType font.
Internal S ymbol Set
Note:
To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the
character. For example, to produce the ™ character with the Internal character set, you
would press Alt 255 (column 15 + row 240) or use ~255 in your data stream.
C-2 Packet Reference Manual
ANSI S ymbol Set
Note:
To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the
character. For example, to produce the ÿ character with the ANSI character set, you
would press Alt 255 (column 15 + row 240) or use ~255 in your data stream.
Bold Character Set
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-3
OCRA Character Set
Code Page 100 (Macintosh)
Note:
To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the
character. For example, to produce the ñ character with the Code Page 100 character
set, you would press Alt 150 (column 6 + row 144) or use ~150 in your data stream.
C-4 Packet Reference Manual
Code Page 101 (Wingdings)
Code Page 437 (Latin U.S.)
Note:
To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the
character. For example, to produce the û character with the Code Page 437 character
set, you would press Alt 150 (column 6 + row 144) or use ~150 in your data stream.
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-5
Code Page 850 (Latin 1)
Code Page 852 (Latin 2)
Note:
To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the
character. For example, to produce the ľ character with the Code Page 852 character
set, you would press Alt 150 (column 6 + row 144) or use ~150 in your data stream.
C-6 Packet Reference Manual
Code Page 855 (Russian)
Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)
Note:
To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the
character. For example, to produce the û character with the Code Page 857 character
set, you would press Alt 150 (column 6 + row 144) or use ~150 in your data stream.
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-7
Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese)
Code Page 1250 (Latin 2)
Note:
To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the
character. For example, to produce the ü character with the Code Page 1250 character
set, you would press Alt 252 (column 12 + row 240) or use ~252 in your data stream.
C-8 Packet Reference Manual
Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)
Code Page 1252 (Latin 1)
Note:
To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the
character. For example, to produce the ü character with the Code Page 1252 character
set, you would press Alt 252 (column 12 + row 240) or use ~252 in your data stream.
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-9
Code Page 1253 (Greek)
Code Page 1254 (Turkish)
Note:
To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the
character. For example, to produce the ü character with the Code Page 1254 character
set, you would press Alt 252 (column 12 + row 240) or use ~252 in your data stream.
C-10 Packet Reference Manual
Code Page 1255 (Hebrew )
Code Page 1256 (Arabic)
Note:
To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the
character. For example, to produce the ü character with the Code Page 1256 character
set, you would press Alt 252 (column 12 + row 240) or use ~252 in your data stream.
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-11
Code Page 1257 (Baltic)
Code Page 1258 (Vietnamese)
Note:
To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the
character. For example, to produce the ü character with the Code Page 1258 character
set, you would press Alt 252 (column 12 + row 240) or use ~252 in your data stream.
C-12 Packet Reference Manual
ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart
Use the chart below to translate the characters printed on your test label. The chart lists ASCII
characters and their hexadecimal and decimal equivalents.
Char.
Hex
Decimal
Char.
Hex
Decimal
NUL
00
0
DC2
12
18
SOH
01
1
DC3
13
19
STX
02
2
DC4
14
20
ETX
03
3
NAK
15
21
EOT
04
4
SYN
16
22
ENG
05
5
ETB
17
23
ACK
06
6
CAN
18
24
BEL
07
7
EM
19
25
Backspace
08
8
SUB
1A
26
Tab
09
9
Escape
1B
27
Linefeed
0A
10
File separator
1C
28
Vertical tab
0B
11
Group separator
1D
29
Form feed
0C
12
Record separator
1E
30
Carriage return
0D
13
Unit separator
1F
31
SO
0E
14
Space
20
32
SI
0F
15
!
21
33
DLE
10
16
„
22
34
DC1
11
17
#
23
35
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-13
ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart (continued)
Char.
Hex
Decimal
Char.
Hex
Decimal
$
24
36
;
3B
59
%
25
37
<
3C
60
&
26
38
=
3D
61
‚
27
39
>
3E
62
(
28
40
?
3F
63
)
29
41
@
40
64
*
2A
42
A
41
65
+
2B
43
B
42
66
‚
2C
44
C
43
67
-
2D
45
D
44
68
.
2E
46
E
45
69
/
2F
47
F
46
70
0
30
48
G
47
71
1
31
49
H
48
72
2
32
50
I
49
73
3
33
51
J
4A
74
4
34
52
K
4B
75
5
35
53
L
4C
76
6
36
54
M
4D
77
7
37
55
N
4E
78
8
38
56
O
4F
79
9
39
57
P
50
80
:
3A
58
Q
51
81
C-14 Packet Reference Manual
ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart (continued)
Char.
Hex
Decimal
Char.
Hex
Decimal
R
52
82
i
69
105
S
53
83
j
6A
106
T
54
84
k
6B
107
U
55
85
l
6C
108
V
56
86
m
6D
109
W
57
87
n
6E
110
X
58
88
o
6F
111
Y
59
89
p
70
112
Z
5A
90
q
71
113
[
5B
91
r
72
114
\
5C
92
s
73
115
]
5D
93
t
74
116
^
5E
94
u
75
117
_
5F
95
v
76
118
`
60
96
w
77
119
a
61
97
x
78
120
b
62
98
y
79
121
c
63
99
z
7A
122
d
64
100
{
7B
123
e
65
101
|
7C
124
f
66
102
}
7D
125
g
67
103
~
7E
126
h
68
104
Delete
7F
127
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-15
Binary to Hex Conversion Chart
Binary
Hex
Binary
Hex
Binary
Hex
Binary
Hex
00000000
0
01000000
40
10000000
80
11000000
c0
00000001
1
01000001
41
10000001
81
11000001
c1
00000010
2
01000010
42
10000010
82
11000010
c2
00000011
3
01000011
43
10000011
83
11000011
c3
00000100
4
01000100
44
10000100
84
11000100
c4
00000101
5
01000101
45
10000101
85
11000101
c5
00000110
6
01000110
46
10000110
86
11000110
c6
00000111
7
01000111
47
10000111
87
11000111
c7
00001000
8
01001000
48
10001000
88
11001000
c8
00001001
9
01001001
49
10001001
89
11001001
c9
00001010
a
01001010
4a
10001010
8a
11001010
ca
00001011
b
01001011
4b
10001011
8b
11001011
cb
00001100
c
01001100
4c
10001100
8c
11001100
cc
00001101
d
01001101
4d
10001101
8d
11001101
cd
00001110
e
01001110
4e
10001110
8e
11001110
ce
00001111
f
01001111
4f
10001111
8f
11001111
cf
00010000
10
01010000
50
10010000
90
11010000
d0
00010001
11
01010001
51
10010001
91
11010001
d1
00010010
12
01010010
52
10010010
92
11010010
d2
00010011
13
01010011
53
10010011
93
11010011
d3
00010100
14
01010100
54
10010100
94
11010100
d4
00010101
15
01010101
55
10010101
95
11010101
d5
00010110
16
01010110
56
10010110
96
11010110
d6
00010111
17
01010111
57
10010111
97
11010111
d7
00011000
18
01011000
58
10011000
98
11011000
d8
00011001
19
01011001
59
10011001
99
11011001
d9
00011010
1a
01011010
5a
10011010
9a
11011010
da
00011011
1b
01011011
5b
10011011
9b
11011011
db
00011100
1c
01011100
5c
10011100
9c
11011100
dc
00011101
1d
01011101
5d
10011101
9d
11011101
dd
00011110
1e
01011110
5e
10011110
9e
11011110
de
00011111
1f
01011111
5f
10011111
9f
11011111
df
00100000
20
01100000
60
10100000
a0
11100000
e0
00100001
21
01100001
61
10100001
a1
11100001
e1
00100010
22
01100010
62
10100010
a2
11100010
e2
00100011
23
01100011
63
10100011
a3
11100011
e3
00100100
24
01100100
64
10100100
a4
11100100
e4
00100101
25
01100101
65
10100101
a5
11100101
e5
00100110
26
01100110
66
10100110
a6
11100110
e6
C-16 Packet Reference Manual
Binary to Hex Conversion Chart (continued)
Binary
Hex
Binary
Hex
Binary
Hex
Binary
Hex
00100111
27
01100111
67
10100111
a7
11100111
e7
00101000
28
01101000
68
10101000
a8
11101000
e8
00101001
29
01101001
69
10101001
a9
11101001
e9
00101010
2a
01101010
6a
10101010
aa
11101010
ea
00101011
2b
01101011
6b
10101011
ab
11101011
eb
00101100
2c
01101100
6c
10101100
ac
11101100
ec
00101101
2d
01101101
6d
10101101
ad
11101101
ed
00101110
2e
01101110
6e
10101110
ae
11101110
ee
00101111
2f
01101111
6f
10101111
af
11101111
ef
00110000
30
01110000
70
10110000
b0
11110000
f0
00110001
31
01110001
71
10110001
b1
11110001
f1
00110010
32
01110010
72
10110010
b2
11110010
f2
00110011
33
01110011
73
10110011
b3
11110011
f3
00110100
34
01110100
74
10110100
b4
11110100
f4
00110101
35
01110101
75
10110101
b5
11110101
f5
00110110
36
01110110
76
10110110
b6
11110110
f6
00110111
37
01110111
77
10110111
b7
11110111
f7
00111000
38
01111000
78
10111000
b8
11111000
f8
00111001
39
01111001
79
10111001
b9
11111001
f9
00111010
3a
01111010
7a
10111010
ba
11111010
fa
00111011
3b
01111011
7b
10111011
bb
11111011
fb
00111100
3c
01111100
7c
10111100
bc
11111100
fc
00111101
3d
01111101
7d
10111101
bd
11111101
fd
00111110
3e
01111110
7e
10111110
be
11111110
fe
00111111
3f
01111111
7f
10111111
bf
11111111
ff
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-17
Dot to Run Length Encoding Chart
ON (Black) Dots
# of Dots
Code
# of Dots
Code
1
A
14
N
2
B
15
O
3
C
16
P
4
D
17
Q
5
E
18
R
6
F
19
S
7
G
20
T
8
H
21
U
9
I
22
V
10
J
23
W
11
K
24
X
12
L
25
Y
13
M
26
Z
# of Dots
Code
# of Dots
Code
1
a
14
n
2
b
15
o
3
c
16
p
4
d
17
q
5
e
18
r
6
f
19
s
7
g
20
t
8
h
21
u
9
i
22
v
10
j
23
w
11
k
24
x
12
l
25
y
13
m
26
z
Off (White Dots)
C-18 Packet Reference Manual
F O R M AT D E S I G N T O O L S
D
Use copies of these worksheets and grids to create formats, batch data, and check
digit schemes. You may want to keep copies of the completed forms for your records:
♦
Online Configuration Worksheet
♦
Batch Worksheet
♦ Check Digit Worksheet
♦
Supply Layout Grids (English, Metric, Dots)
♦
Format Worksheet
♦
Sample Format Worksheet
Format Design Tools D-1
Online Configuration Worksheet
Note:
The Verifier Configuration and RFID Setup packets are only available on the 9855.
D-2 Packet Reference Manual
Batch Worksheet
Format Design Tools D-3
Check Digit Worksheet
D-4 Packet Reference Manual
Supply Layout Grids (English)
The following non-print zones are recommended:
All Supplies
All Supplies
.050 inches on either edge of the label.
.020 inches at the end of the label.
Format Design Tools D-5
Supply Layout Grids (Metric)
The following non-print zones are recommended:
All Supplies
All Supplies
1.3 mm on either edge of the label.
0.5 mm at the end of the label.
D-6 Packet Reference Manual
Supply Layout Grids (Dots)
The following non-print zones are recommended:
All Supplies
All Supplies
10 dots on either edge of the label.
4 dots at the end of the label.
Format Design Tools D-7
The following non-print zones are recommended:
All Supplies
All Supplies
15 dots on either edge of the label.
6 dots at the end of the label.
D-8 Packet Reference Manual
LINES
V
V
V
V
F2 FORMAT #
X
X
X
X
R
R
R
R
1
1
1
1
R
R
R
R
4
4
4
4
R
R
R
R
5
5
5
5
R
R
R
R
6
6
6
6
R
R
R
R
30
30
30
30
Format Name
Supply Type
Format #
Customer Name
Date
Software Version
R3 L / R
R
R
R
R
60
60
60
60
61 R
61 R
61 R
61 R
R
R
R
R
64
64
64
64
R5 LOCK
R
R
R
R
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R4 "CODE"
OPTION #60
R2 CODE #
Incrementing
Data
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
OPTION
#42
R3 FIELD
60
60
60
60
R6 R POS
Price Field
R1 HEADER
R
R
R
R
R3 APP CODE
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
R5 L POS
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R6 R POS
Pad Data
R5 L POS
OPTION #30
Define
Extended
Field Names
R2 CODE #
OPTION #21
Data Entry
Prompts
R4 AMOUNT
OPTION #20
Upload Field
Data
R4 AMOUNT
OPTION #6
Data Entry
Source
R1 HEADER
OPTION #5
Copy Data
from Previous Field
R3 I /D
OPTION #4
Data Entry
Templates
R3 I /D
R4 "CHARACTER"
OPTION #3
Data Type
Restrictions
R2 CODE #
OPTION #30
Pad Data
R2 CODE #
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
R3 L / R
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R1 HEADER
R7 "STRING"
R6 STR_APPEND
R3 "FIELD NAME"
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
R3 PROMPT
("IN QUOTES")
OPTION #2
R1 HEADER
OPTION #5 OPTION #6
Data Entry
Source
Upload Field
Data
R5 MENU_SYM
R4 ECI
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
R4 "CHARACTER"
53
53
53
53
R2 CODE #
R
R
R
R
R1 HEADER
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R3 ERROR_CTRL
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
R3 DEVICE
R2 CODE #
Copy Data
from Previous Field
R1 HEADER
52
52
52
52
R1 HEADER
OPTION #4
R2 CODE #
R3 DEVICE
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R4 DIMENSION
NUMBER
R2 CODE #
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
R3 CODE
R
R
R
R
R3 ROW /COLUMN
PDF417 Security /
Truncation
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
R1 HEADER
R3 CODE
R2 CODE #
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
R2 CODE #
Fixed Characters
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R1 HEADER
OPTION #1
R4 STANDARD
/DEFAULT
OPTION #51
R7 COPY CODE
51
51
51
51
R6 DEST. START
R
R
R
R
R5 # TO COPY
OPTION #50
R3 SECURITY LEVEL
R1 HEADER
R7 COPY CODE
R6 DEST. START
R5 # TO COPY
R4 SRC START
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
R4 SRC START
R2 CODE #
R2 CODE #
R3 SRC FIELD
R1 HEADER
R4 "CHARACTER"
("IN QUOTES")
R3 CODE
R2 CODE #
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R3 SRC FIELD
R1 HEADER
R7 ADDITIONAL
WIDE SPACE
R6 ADDITIONAL
NAR. SPACE
Bar Code Densities
R2 CODE #
Copy Data
from Previous Field
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
R1 HEADER
OPTION #4
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R5 ADDITIONAL
CHAR. GAP
Define
Check Digit
R4 DOT WIDTH
WIDE ELEMENT
OPTION #31
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
50
50
50
50
R2 CODE #
R
R
R
R
R3 DOT WIDTH
NAR. ELEMENT
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
R1 HEADER
R1 HEADER
R3 CHAR CODE
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
X4 DATA TYPE
X3 # OF CHAR.
31
31
31
31
R4 CHECK DIGIT #
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
X2 FIELD #
R
R
R
R
R3 GEN/VER
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
T15 SYM. SET
T14 FIELD ROT.
T13 CHAR. ROT.
T12 ALIGNMENT
T11 COLOR
T10 WID. MAG.
T9 HGT. MAG.
T8 FONT
T7 GAP
T6 COLUMN
T5 ROW
T4 FIX/VAR
T3 # OF CHAR.
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
X1 HEADER
R1 HEADER
Pad Data
R2 CODE #
OPTION #30
RFID DATA
FIELDS
R4 "CHARACTER"
R3 L / R
R2 CODE #
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F1 HEADER
4
4
4
4
R1 HEADER
T1 HEADER
T2 FIELD #
OPTION #1
VERIFIER
FIELDS
G
G
G
G
R
R
R
R
R7 COPY CODE
Fixed Characters
30
30
30
30
R6 DEST. START
OPTION #1
R
R
R
R
G6 ROTATION
21
21
21
21
R5 # TO COPY
R
R
R
R
G5 MODE
H
H
H
H
R4 SRC START
Data Entry
Source
Define
Extended
Field Names
R3 SRC FIELD
6
6
6
6
R3 "FIELD NAME"
OPTION #21
Upload Field
Data
R2 CODE #
OPTION #5 OPTION #6
G4 COLUMN
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R1 HEADER
R3 DEVICE
R
R
R
R
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
TEXT
FIELDS
R8 NAME.
("IN QUOTES")
F7 WIDTH
F6 LENGTH
F5 MEASURE
F4 DEVICE
F3 ACTION
F2 FORMAT #
F1 HEADER
FORMAT
HEADER
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
G3 ROW
5
5
5
5
G2 GRAPH ID
R
R
R
R
R3 CODE
R2 CODE #
Copy Data
from Previous Field
R1 HEADER
R7 COPY CODE
R6 DEST. START
R5 # TO COPY
R4 SRC START
OPTION #4
G1 HEADER
1
1
1
1
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
R
R
R
R
Q7 PATTERN
R2 CODE #
D
D
D
D
R1 HEADER
D3 # OF CHAR.
D2 FIELD #
R3 SRC FIELD
R2 CODE #
4
4
4
4
D1 HEADER
R1 HEADER
R
R
R
R
Q6 THICKNESS
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
NON-PRINTABLE
TEXT FIELDS
Fixed Characters
Q5 END
COLUMN
C13 SYM. SET
1
1
1
1
Q4 END ROW
R
R
R
R
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
R2 CODE #
OPTION #1
GRAPHICS
FIELDS
Q
Q
Q
Q
R1 HEADER
B15 SEGMENT
B14 SEP HEIGHT
B13 TYPE
B12 FIELD ROT.
B11 ALIGNMENT
B10 TEXT
B9 HEIGHT
B8 DENSITY
B7 FONT
B6 COLUMN
B5 ROW
B4 FIX/VAR
B3 # OF CHAR.
B2 FIELD #
B1 HEADER
R
Q3 COLUMN
C12 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
C11 FIELD ROT.
C10 CHAR. ROT.
C9 ALIGNMENT
C8 COLOR
C7 WID. MAG.
C6 HGT. MAG.
C5 FONT
C4 GAP
C3 COLUMN
C2 ROW
B
B
B
B
Q2 ROW
Q1 HEADER
L8 PATTERN
L7 THICKNESS
L6 LENGTH/
END COL.
L5 ANGLE/
END ROW
L4 COLUMN
L3 ROW
C1 HEADER
BAR CODE
FIELDS
F
BOXES
L
L
L
L
L2 TYPE
L1 HEADER
CONSTANT TEXT
FIELDS
Fixed Characters
Reimage
Field
OPTION
#61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
OPTION #52
OPTION #53
OPTION #60
OPTION OPTION
#62
#61
PDF417
Aspect Ratio
Aztec Barcode
Incrementing
Data
Reimage Bypass
Barcode
Field
62
62
62
62
OPTION #64
Program AFI
FORMAT WORKSHEET
Supply Size
TC9800FW Rev. AC 10/14
LINES
R5 # TO COPY
X4 DATA TYPE
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
X 5 24 0
X
X
X
R
R
R
R
1
1
1
1
V 10
V
V
V
R
R
R
R
4 3 1
4
4
4
2 1 1
R
R
R
R
5 R R
5
R
5
R
5
R
6
6
6
6
R
R
R
R
30
30
30
30
FORMAT WORKSHEET
Format Name
Supply Type
Format #
Customer Name
Date
Software Version
R
R
R
R
Incrementing
Data
OPTION #60
60 I 0
60
60
60
R
R
R
R
64
64
64
64
R5 LOCK
61 R
61 R
61 R
61 R
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
R
R
R
R
R4 "CODE"
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R3 FIELD
R2 CODE #
6 1
R1 HEADER
42 1
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
R2 CODE #
5
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
R3 APP CODE
OPTION
#42
R6 R POS
OPTION #30
Pad Data
60 I
60
60
60
R5 L POS
Price Field
R1 HEADER
R
R
R
R
R6 R POS
“X” R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R5 L POS
Pad Data
R2 CODE #
OPTION #30
Define
Extended
Field Names
R4 AMOUNT
OPTION #21
Data Entry
Prompts
R1 HEADER
R4 "CHARACTER"
R3 L / R
OPTION #20
Upload Field
Data
R3 I /D
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
OPTION #6
Data Entry
Source
R2 CODE #
30 L
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
R1 HEADER
R7 "STRING"
R6 STR_APPEND
R3 "FIELD NAME"
OPTION #5
Copy Data
from Previous Field
R3 I /D
OPTION #5 OPTION #6
Data Entry
Source
Upload Field
Data
R5 MENU_SYM
R4 ECI
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
OPTION #4
Data Entry
Templates
R4 AMOUNT
R2 CODE #
53
53
53
53
R3 ERROR_CTRL
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 PROMPT
("IN QUOTES")
OPTION #3
Data Type
Restrictions
R2 CODE #
Copy Data
from Previous Field
R4 DIMENSION
NUMBER
R1 HEADER
R3 DEVICE
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
R3 CODE
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
R7 COPY CODE
R6 DEST. START
R5 # TO COPY
R4 SRC START
R3 SRC FIELD
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
R4 "CHARACTER"
("IN QUOTES")
OPTION #2
R1 HEADER
Fixed Characters
R
R
R
R
R3 L / R
Copy Data
from Previous Field
21 “UPC” R
R
21
R
21
R
21
R
21
R
21
R
21
R
21
R
21
R4 "CHARACTER"
OPTION #4
Fixed Characters
10
R2 CODE #
52 C
52
52
52
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R1 HEADER
OPTION #1
R3 ROW /COLUMN
R2 CODE #
5 K R 6 H R 20 “UPC”
5
R 6 H R 20
5
R 6 H R 20
5
R 6 H R 20
5
R 6 H R 20
5
R 6 H R 20
5
R 6 H R 20
5
R 6 H R 20
5
R 6 H R 20
R3 DEVICE
OPTION #4
R2 CODE #
OPTION #1
R1 HEADER
R
R
R
R
R3 CODE
S
R2 CODE #
51 2
51
51
51
R1 HEADER
PDF417 Security /
Truncation
R1 HEADER
R
R
R
R
R4 STANDARD
/DEFAULT
OPTION #51
R7 COPY CODE
1
R6 DEST. START
1
R5 # TO COPY
5
R4 SRC START
OPTION #50
R3 SECURITY LEVEL
Bar Code Densities
R3 SRC FIELD
1 R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R2 CODE #
R2 CODE #
3 T “Y” R 4 3 1 3 1
3
R 4
3
R 4
3
R 4
3
R 4
3
R 4
3
R 4
3
R 4
3
R 4
R1 HEADER
R7 ADDITIONAL
WIDE SPACE
8
R6 ADDITIONAL
NAR. SPACE
R1 HEADER
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R3 CODE
R3 CHAR CODE
2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
R2 CODE #
50 4
50
50
50
R5 ADDITIONAL
CHAR. GAP
Define
Check Digit
R4 DOT WIDTH
WIDE ELEMENT
R3 DOT WIDTH
NAR. ELEMENT
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
T15 SYM. SET
T14 FIELD ROT.
T13 CHAR. ROT.
T12 ALIGNMENT
T11 COLOR
T10 WID. MAG.
T9 HGT. MAG.
T8 FONT
T7 GAP
T6 COLUMN
T5 ROW
T4 FIX/VAR
T3 # OF CHAR.
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R1 HEADER
5 R
R
R
R
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
R4 CHECK DIGIT #
R3 GEN/VER
OPTION #31
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
X3 # OF CHAR.
X2 FIELD #
30 R “5” R 31 G
30
R 31
30
R 31
30
R 31
X1 HEADER
RFID DATA
FIELDS
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
Pad Data
R7 COPY CODE
R3 L / R
R4 "CHARACTER"
OPTION #30
F2 FORMAT #
4
4
4
4
R2 CODE #
“SALE”
F1 HEADER
R
R
R
R
R6 DEST. START
R
R
R
R
G6 ROTATION
21
21
21
21
R4 SRC START
Data Entry
Source
Define
Extended
Field Names
R1 HEADER
OPTION #21
R3 SRC FIELD
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
G5 MODE
R
R
R
R
R3 "FIELD NAME"
H
H
H
H
R2 CODE #
6
6
6
6
R1 HEADER
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
T1 HEADER
T2 FIELD #
OPTION #1
VERIFIER
FIELDS
G
G
G
G
R3 DEVICE
R
R
R
R
R2 CODE #
1 B C 0 0 0 R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
G4 COLUMN
1
1
1
1
OPTION #5 OPTION #6
Upload Field
Data
G3 ROW
5
5
5
5
R1 HEADER
Copy Data
from Previous Field
G2 GRAPH ID
R
R
R
R
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
OPTION #4
R3 CODE
0 1 1
G1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
1 1 R
R
R
R
R7 COPY CODE
R1 HEADER
R6 DEST. START
R5 # TO COPY
R4 SRC START
TEXT
FIELDS
050
Q7 PATTERN
D
D
D
D
R2 CODE #
3
R1 HEADER
4 3 1
4
4
4
D3 # OF CHAR.
D2 FIELD #
R
R
R
R
R3 SRC FIELD
Fixed Characters
R2 CODE #
R1 HEADER
OPTION #1
D1 HEADER
1
1
1
1
V 250
Q6 THICKNESS
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
NON-PRINTABLE
TEXT FIELDS
C13 SYM. SET
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
R2 CODE #
R8 NAME.
("IN QUOTES")
F7 WIDTH
10
Q5 END
COLUMN
Q4 END ROW
4 1 22 R
R
R
R
T 2
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
GRAPHICS
FIELDS
Q
Q
Q
Q
R1 HEADER
B15 SEGMENT
B14 SEP HEIGHT
“TEXTILES”
Q3 COLUMN
C12 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
0
Q2 ROW
L
B13 TYPE
B12 FIELD ROT.
400
Q1 HEADER
C11 FIELD ROT.
C10 CHAR. ROT.
F6 LENGTH
F5 MEASURE
F4 DEVICE
F3 ACTION
F2 FORMAT #
F1 HEADER
FORMAT
HEADER
300
L8 PATTERN
B10 TEXT
B11 ALIGNMENT
7
C9 ALIGNMENT
B9 HEIGHT
80
L7 THICKNESS
B8 DENSITY
B7 FONT
B6 COLUMN
B5 ROW
B4 FIX/VAR
B3 # OF CHAR.
B2 FIELD #
B1 HEADER
2
C8 COLOR
C7 WID. MAG.
C6 HGT. MAG.
C5 FONT
C4 GAP
C3 COLUMN
C2 ROW
B 3 12 V 150 040 1
B
B
B
L6 LENGTH/
END COL.
L5 ANGLE/
END ROW
L4 COLUMN
L3 ROW
C1 HEADER
BAR CODE
FIELDS
F 1 A R E
BOXES
L
L
L
L
L2 TYPE
L1 HEADER
CONSTANT TEXT
FIELDS
Fixed Characters
Reimage
Field
OPTION
#61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
OPTION #52
OPTION #53
OPTION #60
OPTION OPTION
#62
#61
PDF417
Aspect Ratio
Aztec Barcode
Incrementing
Data
Reimage Bypass
Barcode
Field
62
62
62
62
Program AFI
OPTION #64
(SAMPLE)
Supply Size
TC9800FW Rev. AC 10/14
PRINTER DIFFERENCES
E
Here are the major features and differences between each printer. Earlier printer
versions may not support all features.
Printer Comparison
Feature
9825 Printer
9855 Printer
Printhead Density DPI
203 DPI
203 DPI / 300 DPI (optional)
Print speed IPS
(inches per second)
2.5, 4.0, or 6.0 IPS
2.5, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0, or 12.0
IPS (optional)
Maximum print area
4.0" x 16.0"
4.0" x 16.0"/
4.0" x 13.0" (w/300 dpi)
Non-Print Zone
Recommended: all supplies
- .05" on either edge and
.02" at the end
Butt cut supplies - .15" at the
beginning
Recommended: all supplies .05" on either edge and .02" at
the end
Butt cut supplies - .15" at the
beginning
Location of Print Area
Center
Center
Supply Width
.75" x 4.25"
.75" x 4.25"
Supply Length
.50" x 17.5"
.32" x 17.5"
Power Up Mode
Online
Online/Offline
Feed Mode
On demand/Continuous/
Peel Mode (optional)
On demand/Continuous/
Peel Mode (optional)
Supplies
Labels or Perforated Tags
Labels or Tags
Supply Type
Edge Aperture/Black mark/
Die cut/ Continuous
Aperture/Black mark/Die cut/
Continuous
Keypad
Feed/Cut
Enter/Pause
Escape/Clear buttons
Feed/Cut
Enter/Pause
Escape/Clear buttons
Display
2-line 16 characters per line
2-line 16 characters per line
Serial Port Speed
1200/2400/4800/9600/
19200/38400 Baud
1200/2400/4800/9600/
19200/38400/57600/115200 Baud
Field Number Range
0-999
0-999
Batch Separator
Yes
Yes
High Energy Ribbon
Yes
Yes
Standard Fonts
Standard/Reduced/Bold
OCRA/CG Triumvirate
Typeface Bold 9 pt/
CG Triumvirate Typeface 6,
7, 9, 11, or 15 pt
Standard/Reduced/Bold
OCRA/CG Triumvirate Typeface
Bold 9 pt/CG Triumvirate
Typeface 6, 7, 9, 11, or 15 pt
Scalable Font Standard
Yes (EFF Swiss Bold)
Yes (EFF Swiss Bold)
Downloadable Fonts
Yes
Yes
Memory Allocation
Yes
Yes
RAM
4 Meg / 2 Meg (Flash)
16 Meg / 4 Meg (Flash)
Storage on Powerdown
512K (Flash)
In Flash
Printer Differences E-1
Feature
9825 Printer
9855 Printer
Extended Memory
No
Yes
2D bar codes
MaxiCode/PDF417
POSTNET/Data Matrix/QR
MaxiCode/PDF417
POSTNET/Data Matrix/QR
Parallel Port
IEEE-1284 or Centronics
Mode
IEEE-1284 or Centronics Mode
94x5 Emulation
No
Yes
Backfeed
Yes
Yes
Offline Batch Entry
No
Yes, with keyboard
Status Polling
Yes
Yes
Immediate
Commands
Yes
Yes
Test Label
Two labels
Two labels
Ethernet Print
Server
Yes- supports IPX (NetWare),
TCP/IP, NetBios/NetBEUI
Yes- supports IPX (NetWare),
TCP/IP, NetBios/NetBEUI
RF Print Server
Yes
Yes
External Knife
No
Optional
Stacker
No
Yes
Verifier
No
Yes
External Rewind
Yes
Yes
Tear Bar
Optional
Optional
12 IPS
No
Optional
300 DPI
No
Optional
RFID support
No
Yes
Post-Print Options
Install the printer, knife, and stacker on sound-absorbing material in office, commercial, or
industrial environments.
♦
The 9855 “knife ready” printer does not support on-demand/peel mode or the optional tear
bar.
♦
The 926 knife must be installed before you can use the 928 stacker.
♦
A printer must be ordered “verifier ready” to receive the correct cut-out cover, which allows
room for the verifier’s beam and for tearing supplies.
E-2 Packet Reference Manual
GLOSSARY
G
Batch Data
2,"Monarch" |
Defines the actual information (as fields within { }) printed on the
label.
Batch Control
E,0,0,4,2,1,0 |
Defines the print job (as a field).
Batch Header
{B,1,N,1 | }
First line of a batch, immediately following ({). Identifies the format
and batch quantity.
Contains a batch header and the batch data. Enclose within { }.
Batch Packet
{B,1,N,1 |
2,"Monarch" | }
Bitmapped Fonts
Reside in the printer’s memory. If you change the point size, you have
changed the font. Magnifying these fonts causes jaggedness to occur.
Buffer
Storage area in the printer’s memory that holds specific data (images,
formats, etc).
Field
Can be text, bar codes, lines, boxes, constant, or non-printable text. It
is the result of a field definition.
Downloaded Fonts
Reside in the printers RAM and deleted when the printer is turned off.
.
Field Definition
Any string of parameters that pertain to one field. A field definition
begins with a field identifier (such as T, B, D, C, etc.).
T,1,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0 |
Field Parameters
Parameters that apply to a field and are separated by commas. (In the
above example, B is a field element for black print on a white
background.)
Flash Memory
Contains information that is SAVED when the printer is turned off.
Flash memory needs to be formatted before it can be used.
Layout or design for your printed label.
Format
Format Header
First line of a format, immediately following the start of packet ({). A
format header must begin with F, followed by various header
elements.
F,1,A,R,E,600,400,”Fmt-1” |
Monospaced Fonts
All characters have the same width and are easy to center justify.
(Standard, bold, and reduced are monospaced.)
Non-volatile RAM
Contains information that is SAVED when the printer is turned off.
Option
R,4,6,1,3,1 |
Any line within a format that applies special formatting to a field. This
line begins with R and must immediately follow the field it applies to.
Packet
B,1,N,1 |
2,”Monarch" |
Any string of characters within ({ }).
Pre-image
A way to optimize the printer, because it images the fields while data
is collected. After the last field is imaged, the label prints almost
immediately.
Proportionally
Spaced Fonts
All characters have different widths and are difficult to center justify
(CG Triumvirate™ Typefaces).
Glossary G-1
Scalable Fonts
All characters are scalable and smooth at any point size. There are no
jagged edges at any point size because the font is created from an
equation every time it is used.
TrueType Fonts
All characters follow the TrueType outline font standard. All
characters are scalable and smooth at any point size.
Volatile RAM
Contains information that is LOST when the printer is turned off.
G-2 Packet Reference Manual
INDEX
A
C
access password ......... 6-7, 6-9
algorithm
check digit ........... 4-17, 4-18
alignment
constant text field .......... 3-21
text field ................ 3-4, 3-22
angle
of line ........................... 3-24
ASCII
hexadecimal chart ......... 3-13
ASCII hex
data type ...................... 3-28
sample ......................... 3-13
Aztec
error control level .......... 4-11
sample .......................... A-9
B
backfeed distance ............ 2-15
bar code
density3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14
determine distance .......... 3-9
field definition ................. 3-6
field,GS1 DataBar segment3-18
field,GS1 DataBar separator height
field,GS1 DataBar type .. 3-18
field,rotation ................. 3-17
length ............................. 3-8
placing human readables . 9-3
type ................................ 3-9
batch
control field ..................... 6-3
data field ........................ 6-4
header definition ............. 6-2
quantity zero method download6-11
separator ................. 2-5, 6-3
special characters in data 6-9
batch header
use zero quantity ............ 9-2
baud rate ......................... 2-14
binary
hexadecimal chart ......... 3-16
bitmap
defining graphic header ... 5-7
graphics, hexadecimal chart3-16
hexadecimal method . 5-2, 5-3
run length chart ............. 3-18
run length method .... 5-2, 5-4
storing the image ............ 5-5
bitmap field definition ......... 5-8
black to white print ratio ..... 5-3
box
field definition ............... 3-26
buffer
downloadable fonts ....... 2-19
format ........................... 2-19
3-18
calculate check digit .......... 4-8
character mapping
UTF-8 ............. 3-5, 3-23, 3-9
characters
Cyrillic ........................... 3-9
Latin .......... 3-5, 3-6, 3-8, 3-9
non-printable field ......... 3-19
number of in bar code ..... 3-6
number of in text ............ 3-2
placement of human readables9-3
Turkish ......................... 3-10
Vietnamese ................... 3-12
chart
hexadecimal conversion . 3-16
run length conversion .... 3-18
check before write ............ 2-28
check digit
create scheme ............... 4-16
modulus ........................ 4-16
options ......................... 4-16
sum of digits algorithm ... 4-16
sum of digits calculation 4-18
sum of products algorithm4-16
sum of products calculation4-17
check printer status ........... 7-1
check programming
RFID tag ....................... 2-28
Code 128
function code ................. 3-1
code page ......................... 2-6
text field ................ 3-5, 3-23
code pages ....................... 3-1
entering characters ......... 3-2
International ................... 3-2
selecting ........................ 3-1
communication
problems ........................ 8-3
compliance label
sample .......................... 3-10
configuration
packet ........................... 2-3
packet header ................ 2-3
constant text
field definition ............... 3-20
constant text field
character rotation .......... 3-22
fixed characters............. 3-22
justification ................... 3-21
copy command .................. 6-1
currenc y s ymbol ................ 2-9
custom
check digit .................... 4-16
cut
multiple .......................... 6-4
position .......................... 2-7
type ............................... 6-3
Index 1
Cyrillic
characters ...................... 3-9
D
Data Matrix
Function 1 sample ........... 3-6
rectangle sample ............. 3-6
square sample ................ 3-6
data stream
Aztec .............................. 3-9
compliance label ........... 3-10
Data Matrix FNC 1 ........... 3-6
Data Matrix rectangle ...... 3-6
Data Matrix square .......... 3-6
Intelligent Mail® .............. 3-9
MaxiCode ....................... 3-1
MaxiCode compression .... 3-5
MaxiCode Mode 0 ........... 3-1
MaxiCode Mode 2 ........... 3-3
MaxiCode Mode 3 ........... 3-4
QR Code ......................... 3-7
QR Code structured append6-6, 3-7
QR Code with W eb address3-7
data type
ASCII hex ..................... 3-28
decimal
currenc y s ymbol .............. 2-9
define
bar code density3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14
bar code type .................. 3-9
delete
packets from memory .... 2-22
diagnostics
list of check digit errors ... 8-9
list of comunication errors8-10
list of data errors8-4, 8-5, 8-8, 8-11
list of format errors ........ 8-11
list of graphic image errors8-9
list of machine errors ..... 8-12
list of online configuration errors8-7
list of printer errors ....... 8-16
list of script errors ......... 8-16
resetting the printer ......... 8-3
disable
backfeed ....................... 2-15
dispense position ............. 2-15
DOS
download packet ............. 6-1
double-byte
font ................................ 3-8
download
TrueType font ................. 3-7
downloading
packets ........................... 6-1
duplicate field definition ...... 5-9
E
enable
backfeed ....................... 2-15
ENQ
2 Packet Reference Manual
explanation .................... 7-1
reference byte 2 table ..... 7-2
reference byte 3 table ..... 7-4
request status ................ 7-1
response ........................ 7-1
EPC data
lock ......................... 6-7, 6-9
upload command ........... 2-12
error control level
Aztec bar code .............. 4-11
errors
check digit ..................... 8-9
communication ....... 8-3, 8-10
data ......... 8-4, 8-5, 8-8, 8-11
data formatting .............. 8-11
graphic images ............... 8-9
hard printer failures ....... 8-16
hardware problems ........ 8-12
in Batch data .................. 8-6
in Formats 8-4, 8-5, 8-8, 8-11
in Options ................ 8-6, 8-7
online configuration ........ 8-7
script ............................ 8-16
extended field names ......... 4-7
F
feed mode ................... 2-7, 6-3
field
copy partial data ............ 4-5
options - restrictions ....... 4-1
options, Aztec settings... 4-11
options, check digit ........ 4-8
options, copy data .......... 4-4
options, custom bar code density
options, data entry template4-3
options, data restrictions 4-3
options, extended names 4-7
options, fixed data .......... 4-2
options, inc/dec ............. 4-12
options, merge data ........ 4-4
options, pad data............ 4-8
options, PDF417 security4-10
options, PDF417 width/length4-11
options, price field .......... 4-9
options, reimage ............ 4-13
options, upload data ....... 4-6
fields
find trailing characters .... 9-3
fixed characters
constant text field .......... 3-22
flash
available for use ............ 2-21
font storage .................. 2-21
format before use .......... 2-21
memory ......................... 2-21
save TrueT ype font ......... 3-7
storing images ................ 5-5
temporar y graphics ........ 2-22
use for fonts/scripts ....... 2-21
flow control ...................... 2-14
font
4-9
bitmap information........... 3-6
bold sample .................... 3-2
care label sample ............ 3-4
CG Triumvirate bold sample3-3
CG Triumvirate sample .... 3-3
double-byte ..................... 3-8
EFF Swiss bold sample ... 3-2
international .................... 3-8
magnification .................. 3-6
monospaced information .. 3-6
NAFTA ............................ 3-5
OCRA-like sample ........... 3-2
proportional information ... 3-6
reduced sample ............... 3-2
save to flash ................. 2-21
save TrueType font ......... 3-7
scalable .......... 3-3, 3-20, 3-7
scalable information ........ 3-7
size of monospaced ......... 3-6
size of proportional ......... 3-6
standard sample .............. 3-2
TrueType3-3, 3-20, 3-1, 3-7, 3-2
format
monetar y s ymbols ........... 4-9
format header definition ...... 3-1
formats
sample ........................... 3-1
function code
Code 128 ........................ 3-1
G
generate check digit ........... 4-8
graphic
defining bitmap field ........ 5-8
defining duplicate field .... 5-9
defining next-bitmap field 5-8
field, defining ................ 5-12
hexadecimal method . 5-2, 5-3
run length chart ............. 3-18
run length method .... 5-2, 5-4
storing images ................ 5-5
graphic field definition ...... 5-12
graphic header ................... 5-7
graphic header definition .... 5-7
graphics
temporar y storage ......... 2-22
GS1 DataBar
segment........................ 3-18
separator height ............ 3-18
type .............................. 3-18
H
header
configuration ................... 2-3
hexadecimal chart
ASCII conversion .......... 3-13
high speed
printing ........................... 9-1
human readable characters
placement issues ............ 9-3
I
ignore sense mark ............. 2-8
incrementing
set first number ............. 4-12
incrementing field .............. 6-9
restriction w/price field ... 4-1
inquir y request
explanation .................... 7-1
inquir y response
explanation .................... 7-1
Intelligent Mail®
sample ........................... 3-9
International
symbol set ..................... 3-2
J
job request
explanation .................... 7-6
job response .................. 7-6
status ............................ 7-6
syntax ............................ 7-6
job response
explanation .................... 7-6
job request ..................... 7-6
status ............................ 7-6
syntax ............................ 7-7
justification
constant text field .......... 3-21
text field ........................ 3-4
K
Kanji characters
QR Code .................. 6-5,
kill password ............... 6-7,
knife
enable ...........................
position ..........................
6-6
6-9
6-3
2-7
L
label
move back wards ............ 2-15
stopping point ............... 2-15
language ........................... 2-5
Latin
characters .. 3-5, 3-6, 3-8, 3-9
left/right
position .......................... 2-8
length
non-printable text field ... 3-19
of bar code field ............. 3-6
of text field ..................... 3-2
line
defining as segments ..... 3-24
defining as vectors ........ 3-24
direction of angle .......... 3-24
field definition ............... 3-24
list of check digit errors ..... 8-9
list of communication problems8-10
list of data errors8-4, 8-5, 8-8, 8-11
Index 3
list of graphic errors ........... 8-9
list of I packet errors .......... 8-7
list of machine errors ........ 8-12
list of printer errors........... 8-16
list of script errors ............ 8-16
lock
EPC data ................. 6-7, 6-9
RFID tag ....................... 3-16
RFID tags ................ 6-7, 6-9
lock code .................... 6-7, 6-9
M
magnification
considerations ................ 9-3
mapping
method, hexadecimal 5-2, 5-3
method, run length ... 5-2, 5-4
margin
position .......................... 2-8
MaxiCode
compression sample ........ 3-5
Mode 0 sample ................ 3-1
Mode 2 sample ................ 3-3
Mode 3 sample ................ 3-4
sample ........................... 3-1
MaxiCode information ......... 3-1
memory
about flash .................... 2-21
available flash ............... 2-21
in downloadable fonts buffer2-19
in format buffer ............. 2-19
storing images in flash .... 5-5
storing images in RAM ..... 5-5
user ......................... 6-7, 6-8
mode com command ........... 2-1
monetar y s ymbols
in price fields .................. 4-9
multi-part supply ................ 6-3
multiple tags
check before write ......... 2-28
N
next-bitmap field definition .. 5-8
non-printable text
field definition ............... 3-19
O
online mode ....................... 2-5
opaque overlay .......... 3-3, 3-21
optimize
font imaging .................... 9-3
print quality ..................... 9-1
print speed ..................... 9-1
repeat field parameters.... 9-3
use zero batch quantity ... 9-2
options
Aztec settings ............... 4-11
calculate check digit ........ 4-8
copy data ........................ 4-4
copy partial data ............. 4-5
4 Packet Reference Manual
custom bar code density . 4-9
data entr y template ......... 4-3
data type restrictions ...... 4-3
fixed data ....................... 4-2
inc/dec fields ................. 4-12
long field names ............. 4-7
merging fields ................ 4-4
pad data ........................ 4-8
PDF417 security ............ 4-10
PDF417 truncation ......... 4-10
PDF417 width/length ..... 4-11
price field ....................... 4-9
reimage field ................. 4-13
restrictions ..................... 4-1
upload field data ............ 4-6
order to download packets . 6-1
P
packet
backfeed control ............ 2-15
clear from memory ......... 2-22
communication settings . 2-14
configuration .................. 2-3
control characters.......... 2-10
font ............................... 2-23
memory configuration .... 2-17
monetar y formatting ........ 2-9
network console ............ 2-27
print control setup .......... 2-8
RFID setup .................... 2-28
supply setup................... 2-7
system setup .................. 2-5
parity ............................... 2-14
password
access ..................... 6-7, 6-9
kill ........................... 6-7, 6-9
password lock
sample .......................... 3-16
PDF417 bar code
security level ........ 4-10, 4-11
permalock and password lock
sample .......................... 3-16
position
cut ................................. 2-7
dispense ....................... 2-15
graphic in field ............... 5-6
graphic in format ............ 5-7
graphic in packet ............ 5-6
price field
restriction w/check digit .. 4-9
restriction w/inc. field ..... 4-1
restriction with inc/dec ... 4-12
print
contrast ................... 2-8, 9-1
speed ............................ 2-8
speed vs throughput ....... 9-1
print multiple ..................... 6-3
printer
Batch data errors............ 8-6
check digit errors ........... 8-9
communication errors .... 8-10
configuration ................... 2-3
configure communications2-1
data errors8-4, 8-5, 8-8, 8-11
failure errors ................. 8-16
Format errors8-4, 8-5, 8-8, 8-11
graphic errors ................. 8-9
hardware errors............. 8-12
I packet errors ................ 8-7
job request status ........... 7-6
job response status ......... 7-6
Option errors ........... 8-6, 8-7
request status ................. 7-1
resetting ......................... 8-3
response status............... 7-1
script errors .................. 8-16
status s yntax .................. 7-1
printing
black to white ratio .......... 5-3
downloading order ........... 6-1
high speed ...................... 9-1
problems
’off tag’ errors ................. 9-3
check digit miscalculation 4-9
cut off human readables .. 9-3
framing error ................... 6-1
image time and changing data9-3
image time and repeating fields9-3
image time with unchanged data9-2
invalid s yntax .................. 2-2
missing/overlapping fields 9-3
no check digit generated.. 4-8
poor print quality ............. 9-1
price field ..................... 4-12
programming conventions ... 2-2
Q
Quick Response
sample ........................... 3-7
sample with URL ............. 3-7
structured append sample6-6, 3-7
R
RAM
storing images ................ 5-5
read before write .............. 2-28
read power ....................... 2-28
repeat EPC ...................... 2-28
reprint label ..................... 2-28
request printer status ......... 7-6
restrictions
field options .................... 4-1
retr y printing .................... 2-28
RF power
read ............................. 2-28
write ............................. 2-28
RFID
tag,check programming . 2-28
RFID tag
check programming ....... 2-28
RFID tags
lock ......................... 6-7, 6-9
ribbon ............................... 2-7
rotate
bar code field ................ 3-17
text characters ....... 3-4, 3-22
text field ................ 3-4, 3-22
S
sample
ASCII hex ..................... 3-13
Aztec ............................. 3-9
Aztec with appended data4-11
backfeed control packet . 2-15
bar code field ................ 3-18
batch control field ........... 6-4
batch data field .............. 6-9
batch data with special chars6-9
batch header .................. 6-2
batch method download . 6-11
bitmap field .................... 5-8
bold font ........................ 3-2
box field ........................ 3-27
calculate check digit ....... 4-8
care label font ................ 3-4
CG Triumvirate bold font . 3-3
CG Triumvirate font ........ 3-3
check digit .................... 4-17
communication settings packet2-14
compliance label ........... 3-10
constant text field .......... 3-24
control characters packet2-10
copy data ....................... 4-4
custom bar code density 4-10
data entr y prompt ........... 4-7
data entr y source ........... 4-5
data entr y template ......... 4-4
Data Matrix rectangle ..... 3-6
Data Matrix square ......... 3-6
Data Matrix w/Function 1 3-6
data type restriction ........ 4-3
DOS batch file ............... 6-12
DOS copy command ....... 6-1
download packet ............ 6-1
duplicate field ................ 5-9
EFF Swiss bold font ........ 3-2
fixed data ....................... 4-4
font packet .................... 2-23
format ............................ 3-1
format header ................. 3-1
graphic field .................. 5-12
graphic header ............... 5-7
hex graphic packet ........ 5-10
immediate command ...... 2-12
incrementing field .......... 4-12
Intelligent Mail® ............. 3-9
job response 4 ............... 7-8
line field ........................ 3-25
long field name............... 4-7
MaxiCode ....................... 3-1
MaxiCode compression ... 3-5
MaxiCode Mode 0 ........... 3-1
Index 5
MaxiCode Mode 2 ........... 3-3
MaxiCode Mode 3 ........... 3-4
memory configuration packet2-18
mode command ............... 2-1
monetar y formatting packet2-9
NAFTA font ..................... 3-5
network console ............ 2-27
next-bitmap field ............. 5-8
non-printable field ......... 3-19
OCRA-like font ................ 3-2
pad data ......................... 4-8
password lock ............... 3-16
PDF417 width/length ..... 4-11
PDF417 with security/truncation4-10
permalock and password lock3-16
price field ....................... 4-9
print control packet ......... 2-8
printer configuration ........ 2-3
QR Code structured append6-6, 3-7
QR Code with URL .......... 3-7
Quick Response (QR) Code3-7
reduced font ................... 3-2
reimage field ................. 4-13
RFID field ..................... 3-28
run length graphic packet5-11
scalable font ................... 3-7
sequential method download6-11
SGTIN 96...................... 3-15
SSCC96 ........................ 3-14
standard font .................. 3-2
supply setup packet ......... 2-8
system setup packet ........ 2-6
text field ......................... 3-5
time/date ........................ 4-7
upload field data ............. 4-6
variable data ................... 4-8
verifier field .................. 3-27
scalable font ...................... 3-7
secondar y
currenc y s ymbol .............. 2-9
security level
PDF417 bar code .......... 4-10
segments
line field ....................... 3-24
set first number
incrementing sequence .. 4-12
setting
format number ................. 3-1
supply size ..................... 3-1
unit of measure ............... 3-1
SGTIN 96
sample ......................... 3-15
size
monospaced fonts ........... 3-6
proportional fonts ............ 3-6
skip sense mark ................. 2-8
slash zero .......................... 2-5
smart imaging .................... 9-1
special characters .............. 6-9
SSCC96
sample ......................... 3-14
6 Packet Reference Manual
status polling ..................... 7-1
stop bits ........................... 2-14
storage device ................... 5-5
storing
graphics in RAM ............. 5-5
temporar y graphics ......... 5-6
sum of digits calculation
check digit .................... 4-18
sum of products calculation
check digit .................... 4-17
supply type........................ 2-7
symbol set................... 2-6, 3-1
ANSI .............................. 3-1
DOS Code pages 437/850 3-1
entering characters ......... 3-2
selecting ........................ 3-1
text field ................ 3-5, 3-23
syntax
Aztec error control level . 4-11
backfeed control packet . 2-15
bar code field ................. 3-6
batch control field ........... 6-3
batch data field .............. 6-4
batch header .................. 6-2
bitmap field .................... 5-8
box field ........................ 3-26
calculate check digit ....... 4-8
check digit .................... 4-16
communication settings packet2-14
constant text field .......... 3-20
control characters packet2-10
copy data ....................... 4-4
custom bar code density . 4-9
data entr y template ......... 4-3
data restrictions ............. 4-3
decrementing field ......... 4-12
duplicate field ................ 5-9
fixed data ....................... 4-2
font packet .................... 2-23
format header ................. 3-1
graphic field .................. 5-12
graphic header ............... 5-7
guidelines ...................... 2-2
incrementing field .......... 4-12
job request ..................... 7-6
job request 4 .................. 7-8
job response .................. 7-7
line field ........................ 3-24
long field names ............. 4-7
memory configuration packet2-17
monetar y formatting packet2-9
network console packet . 2-27
next-bitmap field ............ 5-8
non-printable text field ... 3-19
pad data ........................ 4-8
PDF417 security ............ 4-10
PDF417 truncation ......... 4-10
PDF417 width/length ..... 4-11
price field ....................... 4-9
print control packet ......... 2-8
printer configuration ....... 2-3
reimage field ................. 4-13
RFID setup packet ......... 2-28
supply setup packet ......... 2-7
system setup packet ........ 2-5
text field ......................... 3-2
upload field data ............. 4-6
T
table
bar code lengths ............. 3-8
ENQ reference byte 2 ...... 7-2
ENQ reference byte 3 ...... 7-4
temporar y
storing images ................ 5-6
text field
character height ..... 3-3, 3-20
character rotation ............ 3-4
character width ...... 3-3, 3-21
code page .............. 3-5, 3-23
field rotation .......... 3-4, 3-22
font color ............... 3-3, 3-21
justification ..................... 3-4
overlay .................. 3-3, 3-21
symbol set ............. 3-5, 3-23
text field definition .............. 3-2
thickness
line ............................... 3-25
transparent overlay.... 3-3, 3-21
TrueT ype
font ................................ 3-1
TrueT ype font ..... 3-3, 3-20, 3-2
downloading ................... 3-7
Turkish
characters ..................... 3-10
U
unsuccessful communication8-3
user memory ............... 6-7, 6-8
using entered/copied data .. 6-4
UTF-8
character mapping3-5, 3-23, 3-9
V
vectors
line field ........................ 3-24
Vietnamese
characters ..................... 3-12
W
width/length
PDF417 bar code .......... 4-11
word length ...................... 2-14
write power ...................... 2-28
write verify ....................... 2-28
Index 7
8 Packet Reference Manual
Avery Dennison
170 Monarch Lane
Miamisburg, OH 45342
1-800-543-6650 U.S.A
1-800-387-4740 Canada
www.monarch.averydennison.com
©1996 Avery Dennison Corp. All rights reserved.
Printer & Fastener
Solutions
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising